9500 MPR-A R4 2 0 Maintenance - TroubleClearing 3EM23956AMAA - 01 PDF

Main Documentation
Maintenance and Trouble Clearing
Alcatel-Lucent 9500
MICROWAVE PACKET RADIO for ANSI | RELEASE 4.2.0
Indoor: MSS-8/MSS-4/MSS-1/MPT-HL
Outdoor: ODU300/MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC
Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

3EM23956AMAA Edition 01
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
This document contains proprietary information of Alcatel-Lucent and is not to be disclosed
or used except in accordance with applicable agreements.
Copyright 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for the accuracy of the information presented, which is subject to change
without notice.
Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks
are the property of their respective owners.
Copyright 2013 Alcatel-Lucent.
All rights reserved.
Disclaimers
Alcatel-Lucent products are intended for commercial uses. Without the appropriate network design engineering,
they must not be sold, licensed or otherwise distributed for use in any hazardous environments requiring fail-safe
performance, such as in the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic
control, direct life-support machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of products could lead directly to
death, personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage. The customer hereby agrees that the use, sale,
license or other distribution of the products for any such application without the prior written consent of AlcatelLucent, shall be at the customer's sole risk. The customer hereby agrees to defend and hold Alcatel-Lucent harmless
from any claims for loss, cost, damage, expense or liability that may arise out of or in connection with the use, sale,
license or other distribution of the products in such applications.
This document may contain information regarding the use and installation of non-Alcatel-Lucent products. Please
note that this information is provided as a courtesy to assist you. While Alcatel-Lucent tries to ensure that this
information accurately reflects information provided by the supplier, please refer to the materials provided with any
non-Alcatel-Lucent product and contact the supplier for confirmation. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility or
liability for incorrect or incomplete information provided about non-Alcatel-Lucent products.
However, this does not constitute a representation or warranty. The warranties provided for Alcatel-Lucent products,
if any, are set forth in contractual documentation entered into by Alcatel-Lucent and its customers.
This document was originally written in English. If there is any conflict or inconsistency between the English
version and any other version of a document, the English version shall prevail.
THIS PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH D.H.H.S. RADIATION PERFORMANCE STANDARDS 21

CFR, 1040.10, FOR A CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT.
DANGER
Invisible laser radiation is present when the optic connector is open. AVOID DIRECT
EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
WARNING
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment
in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case users will be required to correct the
interference at their own expense.
NOTICE
This manual applies to 9500 MPR-A R4.2.0 software. Release notes describing revisions to this software
may impact operations described in this manual.
This transfer of commodities, technology, or software, if from the United States, is an export in accordance
with the U.S. Export Administration Regulations. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited. The export or
re-export (further transfer) of such commodities, technology, software or products made from such
technology is prohibited without proper authorization(s) from the U.S. Department of Commerce or other
appropriate U.S. government agency(s).
All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced, translated, stored in a retrieval system, or
transmitted or distributed by any means, electronic or mechanical, by photocopying, recording, or otherwise,
without the written permission of Alcatel-Lucent. Preparing derivative works or providing instruction based
on the material is prohibited unless agreed to in writing by Alcatel-Lucent.
The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information
purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the part of
Alcatel-Lucent. Such obligations will only be committed to in a written sales agreement signed by
Alcatel-Lucent.
Alcatel-Lucent 2013 - All Rights Reserved

Printed in U.S.A.

Printed in U.S.A.
ALCATEL-LUCENT PRACTICE
Standard
3EM23956AM
Issue 01, February 2013
Table of Contents
FCC part 15 subpart B
1. 9500 MPR-A unlicensed radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
FCC Class B compliance statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
FCC Class B requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Introduction
1. Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Writing conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Admonishments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Related documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Document types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
2. Maintenance philosophy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Before going to site checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Troubleshooting basics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Path problems on a commissioned link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Path problems on a new link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Troubleshooting configuration problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Troubleshooting ethernet problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
3. Safety awareness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Safety EMC-EMF-ESD norms and equipment labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Safety rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
General rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Labels indicating danger, forbiddance, command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
4. Electrostatic-sensitive devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Electrostatic-sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Handling circuit packs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
5. Product support information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
Telephone support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
Product documentation and training. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
Technical support center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Repair and return services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Spare parts and replacement cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Service center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Installation and maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
3EM23956AM
Index Task Lists (IXLs)

IXL-100
Task index list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
IXL-101
Alarm and abnormal condition clearing procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
IXL-102
Support procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
IXL-103
Equipment replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
IXL-104
Supporting information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
Routine Task Lists (RTLs)

RTL-100
Preventive maintenance procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Trouble Analysis Procedures (TAPs)

TAP-100
Facility alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
TAP-101
Abnormal conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
TAP-102
Power alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
TAP-103
Equipment alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
TAP-104
Radio alarms (MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, MOD300, ODU300, 9558HC) . . . . . . . . 8-57
TAP-105
Ethernet alarms (Core-E, MPTACC, P8ETH, MSS-1 Shelf Core) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-77
TAP-106
License/software mismatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-79
TAP-107
Internal loss of communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-83
TAP-108
Threshold crossing alarms (MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP,

9558HC, P32E1DS1, MSS-1 shelf P32E1DS1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-99
TAP-109
Synchronization alarms (Core-E, MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP,

P32E1DS1, SDHACC, 9558HC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-105
TAP-110
ATPC loop conditions (MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC). . . . . . . . . 8-117
TAP-111
Cable LOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-123
TAP-112
Loss of alignment (MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-129
TAP-113
Loss of frame (MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-135
ii
Table of Contents
3EM23956AM
TAP-114
RPS path fail (MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-147
TAP-115
Rx fail (MOD300) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-153
TAP-116
Housekeeping alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-159
TAP-117
LAG alarms (Core-E, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, ODU300, 9558HC,

MSS-1 shelf Core) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-161
TAP-118
Ethernet connectivity fault management alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-163
TAP-119
Clock failure (MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-167
TAP-120
Duplicate Address Detected alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-175
Detailed Level Procedures (DLPs)

DLP-100
Mechanical card removal and installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
DLP-101
MPT-HL transceiver air filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
DLP-102
SFP replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
DLP-103
Core switching module (Core-E) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
DLP-104
Core switching module (Core-E) flash card replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
DLP-105
Ethernet access switch (P8ETH) replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
DLP-106
MSS-4/8 shelf FAN replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
DLP-107
MOD300 (radio modem) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
DLP-108
MPT-HL transceiver replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
DLP-109
ODU300 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
DLP-110
P2E3DS3 (2-Port DS3) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
DLP-111
P32E1DS1 (32-Port DS1) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
DLP-112
Clean fiber-optic connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49
DLP-113
System power down and power up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
DLP-114
MPTACC (MPT Access) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
Table of Contents
iii
3EM23956AM
DLP-115
MPT ODU replacement (MPT-HC, MPT-XP, 9558HC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65
DLP-116
Auxiliary (AUX) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-71
DLP-117
Protection upgrade and downgrade procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73
DLP-118
Upgrade and downgrade radio profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-83
DLP-119
Upgrade unlicensed MPT-HL radio to lower 6 GHz radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-87
DLP-120
+24/-48 volt converter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-91
DLP-121
Power injector replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-95
DLP-122
RPS/XPIC module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-99
DLP-123
Upgrade MPT ODU to MPT ODU L1 LAG port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-105
DLP-124
Upgrade MPT-HL to MPT-HL L1 LAG port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-109
DLP-125
MPT Power Unit replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-115
DLP-126
SDHACC (2-Port OC-3) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-119
DLP-127
Software package rollback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-123
DLP-128
MSS-1 shelf replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-129
iv
Table of Contents
3EM23956AM
List of Figures
Figure 3-1.
Anti static protection device kit..................................................................................... 1-25
Figure 4-1.
Electrostatic-sensitive sign ........................................................................................... 1-29
Figure 112-1. Fiber-optic connector inspection .................................................................................. 9-51

Figure 112-2. Fiber-optic connector types, illustrations ...................................................................... 9-52
Figure 112-3. Fiber-optic connector types, photographs .................................................................... 9-53
Figure 120-1. +24/-48 Volt converter cabling diagram ....................................................................... 9-93
Figure 124-1. MPT-HL to L1 LAG information message .................................................................. 9-113
Figure 124-2. MPT-HL to L1 LAG warning message ....................................................................... 9-113
Figure 127-2. Software bank with upgrade software version Committed status .............................. 9-125
Figure 127-3. Software bank with Initial software version Standby status ....................................... 9-125
Figure 127-4. Software Management Action - Forced Activation ..................................................... 9-126
Figure 127-5. Software bank with initial software version Committed status ................................... 9-127
Figure 127-6. Software bank with upgrade software version Standby status................................... 9-127
List of Figures
3EM23956AM
vi
List of Figures
3EM23956AM
List of Tables
Table 100-A. Task Index List ............................................................................................................... 2-1
Table 101-A. Equipment friendly name syntax definitions ................................................................... 3-5
Table 101-B. Friendly name syntax definitions.................................................................................... 3-6
Table 101-C. Alarm monitor alarm types ............................................................................................. 3-8
Table 101-D. Abnormal condition ...................................................................................................... 3-40
Table 101-E. Core-E Card LED indications ....................................................................................... 3-50
Table 101-F. MSS-1 shelf LED indications........................................................................................ 3-51
Table 101-G. Transport Card LED indications ................................................................................... 3-52
Table 101-H. Ethernet LED indications.............................................................................................. 3-52
Table 101-I.
MPT-HL transceiver LED alarm indications ................................................................. 3-53
Table 101-J. TMN network troubleshooting ...................................................................................... 3-54

Table 102-A. Support procedures...................................................................................................... 4-57
Table 103-A. Equipment replacement procedures ............................................................................ 5-59
Table 104-A. Supporting information ................................................................................................. 6-61
Table 100-A. Preventive maintenance procedures.............................................................................. 7-1
Table 100-A. Facility alarms ................................................................................................................ 8-2
Table 101-A. Abnormal conditions..................................................................................................... 8-24
Table 102-A. Power Alarms............................................................................................................... 8-32
Table 103-A. Equipment alarms ........................................................................................................ 8-40
Table 104-A. Radio alarms ................................................................................................................ 8-58
Table 105-A. Ethernet alarms............................................................................................................ 8-77
List of Tables
vii
3EM23956AM
Table 106-A. License/software mismatch alarms .............................................................................. 8-79

Table 107-A. Internal communication problem alarms ...................................................................... 8-84
Table 108-A. Threshold crossing alarms ......................................................................................... 8-100
Table 109-A. Sync alarms ............................................................................................................... 8-106
Table 110-A. ATPC loop conditions................................................................................................. 8-118
Table 111-A. Clear radio alarms ...................................................................................................... 8-123
Table 112-A. Loss of alignment alarms ........................................................................................... 8-129
Table 113-A. Loss of frame radio alarms......................................................................................... 8-135
Table 114-A. RPS path fail alarms .................................................................................................. 8-147
Table 115-A. Rx fail alarms ............................................................................................................. 8-153
Table 116-A. Housekeeping alarms ................................................................................................ 8-159
Table 117-A. LAG alarms ................................................................................................................ 8-161
Table 118-A. ECFM alarms ............................................................................................................. 8-164
Table 119-A. Clock failure alarm ..................................................................................................... 8-167
Table 120-A. Duplicate address detected alarms ............................................................................ 8-176
Table 122-A. MPT ODU 1+1 module details ..................................................................................... 9-99
Table 124-A. MPT-HL L1 LAG bandwidth per service type ............................................................. 9-110
Table 127-A. Releases supporting software package rollback ........................................................ 9-123
viii
List of Tables
3EM23956AM

1.
9500 MPR-A unlicensed radio

1.1
The JF6-9558H/6933B-9500MPT (MPT-HL) unlicensed radio provides
fast deployment of service with microwave radio. No license and small
antennas (no FCC and Industry Canada requirements) allow immediate
turn-up. After the license is received, the unlicensed MPT-HL radio can be
easily converted to the lower 6 GHz licensed band.
1.2
The JF6-9558HC/6933B-9558HC (9558HC) unlicensed radio provides
fast deployment of service with microwave radio. No license and small
antennas (no FCC and Industry Canada requirements) allow immediate
turn-up. The 9558HC unlicensed radio can not be upgraded to licensed
operation.
1.3
The JF6-9558H/6933B-9500MPT and JF6-9558HC/6933B-9558HC
unlicensed radio operates in the 5725-5850 Information, Scientific, and
Medical (ISM) band in accordance with FCC Part 15.247 and IC RSS-210. This
unlicensed radio, although operating in the same band as a spread spectrum
radio, operates using narrower bandwidths than spread spectrum.
1.4
The 9558HC 5.8 Unlicensed band (JF6-9558HC/6933B-9558HC) has
been certified by the FCC and Industry Canada as of August 7, 2012.
FCC Class B compliance statement

1.5
The JF6-9558H/6933B-9500MPT and JF6-9558HC/6933B-9558HC
unlicensed radio have been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules and IC RSS-210.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and,
if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in
a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user
will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
1-1
3EM23956AM
FCC Class B requirements

1.6
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and IC RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following three conditions: (1) this device may not
cause harmful interference. (2) This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. (3) This
device must be professionally installed.
1.7
Cet appareil radio est conforme IC RSS-210. Son fonctionnement
respecte les trois conditions suivantes: 1) cette radio ne cause pas
dinterfrences nfastes, 2) cette radio peut recevoir des interfrences, ainsi
que des interfrences qui peuvent causer des oprations non dsires, et 3)
cette radio doit tre installe par des Professionnels.
CAUTION
Possibility of service interruption. Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by Alcatel-Lucent could void the authority to operate the
JF6-9558H/6933B-9500MPT and JF6-9558HC/6933B-9558HC (unlicensed)
radio.
CAUTION
Possibility of service interruption. Installation, Turn-Up, Maintenance, and

Operation Instruction supplied with the JF6-9558H/6933B-9500MPT and
JF6-9558HC/6933B-9558HC (unlicensed) radio require strict adherence for
continued part 15 of the FCC Rules and IC RSS-210 compliance.
Regulatory compliance warning: Physical changes or modifications to the
JF6-9558H/6933B-9500MPT and JF6-9558HC/6933B-9558HC (unlicensed)

radio are strictly prohibited.
1-2
3EM23956AM
Introduction
1.
Overview
1.1
This manual provides step-by-step procedures to enable the user to
perform a task. Each procedure contains important introductory information
that is essential to understanding and completing the task properly.
Procedures must be started at step 1, and steps must be performed in the order
given. Failure to do so may cause unforeseen hazardous conditions.
Writing conventions
1.2
Boldface characters indicate commands or parameters the user must
enter or keys the user must press. Enter input parameters exactly as shown in
the examples.
Admonishments
To avoid hazardous conditions, observe the following admonishments:
1.3
DANGER
Possibility of personal injury.
CAUTION
Possibility of service interruption.
WARNING
Possibility of equipment damage.
Related documentation
1.4
For additional system information, refer to the following related
documents:
Introduction
9500 MPR-A Product Information manual (PN 3EM23952AM)
9500 MPR-A Installation Practices manual (PN 3EM23953AM)
9500 MPR-A Operation and Administration manual

(PN 3EM23954AM)
9500 MPR-A Turn-Up manual (PN 3EM23955AM)
1-1
3EM23956AM
9500 MPR-A Engineering Support Documentation

(PN 3EM23957AM)
9500 MPR MPT-GC User Manual manual (PN 3DB19205AA)
9500 MPR MPR-e User Manual manual (PN 3DB19901EC)
9500 MPR MSS-1c User Manual manual (PN 3DB19901DC)
Document types
1.5
The documentation contains all instructions needed to perform a task.
This manual consists of the following types of documents:
Task Index List (IXL)
Routine Task List (RTL)
Trouble Analysis Procedure (TAP)
Detailed Level Procedure (DLP)
Task index list (IXL)

1.6
IXLs group procedures by function. Each IXL lists procedures
alphabetically by name and refers the user to the appropriate procedure
number.
Routine task list (RTL)

1.7
The RTL is a list of preventive maintenance procedures which
recommends a schedule (monthly, semiannual, or annual) for the performance
of each procedure.
Trouble analysis procedure (TAP)

1.8
TAPs contain sequential steps required to perform trouble clearing.
Trouble clearing involves clearing and repairing malfunctions in the system.
Trouble clearing may be done to answer a customer complaint or to respond to
an office alarm, a trouble report, or an abnormal display. Steps can refer to
other procedures.
1-2
Introduction
3EM23956AM
Detailed level procedure (DLP)

1.9
DLPs contain detailed steps and supporting information required to
complete tasks. When a DLP is referenced from another part of the manual,
perform the DLP, then return to the point where the DLP was referenced.
Introduction
1-3
3EM23956AM
1-4
Introduction
3EM23956AM
2.
Maintenance philosophy
2.1
Maintenance of the system consists of repair and preventive
maintenance. Repair covers isolation of faults, troubleshooting to the circuit
card level, and subsequent replacement of the faulty circuit card. Circuit card
repair is not covered. Preventive maintenance covers periodic routine tasks
that are performed to ensure continued proper operation of the system.
2.2
The system incorporates both software- and firmware-based
diagnostics to continuously monitor system integrity. Also available are
diagnostics that can be manually invoked. Problems detected by diagnostics
are reported as alarm/event messages displayed at a user terminal and/or
lighted alarm indicators on the equipment. These messages and lights are the
primary trouble analysis tools for fault isolation.
2.3
The instruction contact next level of technical support for assistance
appears throughout this manual. The intent of this statement is to escalate the
problems that are beyond the scope of this Task Oriented Practice (TOP) to a
higher level of expertise. Users who have local interim levels and/or procedures
should implement those in response to this instruction. See the Introduction for
customer access (HELP) contacts.
Troubleshooting
2.4
Troubleshooting procedures generally assume the following
conditions:
An alarm indication was received through the Alarm Monitor, Craft

Terminal or a lighted alarm indicator.
Maintenance personnel are familiar with system operation and use of

the Alarm Monitor and Craft Terminal.
Maintenance personnel have system administration privileges or a

system administrator is available.
Replacement components (spares) are available and fully functional.
2.5
The following guidelines and information should be observed during
troubleshooting:
Introduction
Trouble clearing begins with an analysis of alarm indications. The

correct TAP is referenced in the IXL.
1-5
3EM23956AM
Clear upstream problems first. This may also clear downstream

problems.
As a rule, no main circuit card should be physically removed unless

traffic was manually switched to protection by entering the
appropriate Craft Terminal command. Exceptions to this are
addressed in specific DLPs.
As a rule, no protection circuit card should be physically removed

unless a manual lockout switch issued by entering the appropriate
Craft Terminal command. Exceptions to this are addressed in specific
DLPs.
As a rule, in unprotected radio configurations physically removing a

circuit card will cause a loss of traffic. Exceptions to this are addressed
in specific DLPs.
To avoid unnecessary service interruption, exercise care when

removing circuit cards, performing commands, and doing other
maintenance tasks.
The procedures in this manual are used to aid in clearing alarms for
which protection is available. If alarms exist on both a card and its
mate card, or if alarms exist on a card and its mate card is not
available for protection, always contact the next level of technical
support for assistance with clearing the alarms.
Always follow electrostatic-sensitive device procedures when handling

circuit cards.
After circuit card replacement, allow time for alarms to clear. As a

general rule, allow a minimum of 120 seconds to clear. Some alarms
may take longer to clear. Allow time for the alarm to clear before
assuming the replacement did not clear the trouble.
When replacing a circuit card does not clear the trouble, remove the
replacement circuit card and return the original circuit card to service.
When TAPs fail to clear the fault, an obscure or multiple fault is

assumed to exist.
Before going to site checklist

Where possible, before going to site obtain the following information:
2.6
1-6
Does the fault require immediate attention?
Determine who is the best-placed person to attend the fault.
Introduction
3EM23956AM
Confirm the nature and severity of the reported fault, its location,
9500 MPR-A type, frequency band, high/low end ODU or MPT-HL
Transceiver, capacity modulation and configuration (non protected,
protected, diversity). Ask:
Is just one 9500 MPR-A link affected, or a number of links in the

same geographical area?
Is the path down completely or is traffic passing but with a BER

alarm?
Is only one or a number of tributaries affected?
Could the fault be in the equipment connected to 9500 MPR-A,

rather than in 9500 MPR-A? Are there alarms on other, connected
equipment?
Is it a hard or intermittent fault?
Do alarms confirm which end of an alarmed link is faulty?
Could the weather (rain, ice, high wind, temperature) be a factor in the
reported fault?
If the fault suggests a rain fade or other weather related fade

condition and it matches the prevailing weather conditions, do
not take any action until the weather abates.
Introduction
Does link history suggest any fault trends?
Does the fault history for the link indicate a likely cause?
Is the 9500 MPR-A link newly installed?
Has there been any recent work done on the link?
1-7
3EM23956AM
Ensure that you have with you:
Appropriate spares. Where an equipment failure is suspected,

these should include replacement Cards/plug-ins, MPT-HL
Transceiver and ODU. If an ODU is suspected then local/national
climbing safety requirements must be adhered to.
A laptop PC loaded with Craft Terminal, and an Ethernet cable.

If an Ethernet connection is to be used, you need the 9500 MPR-A
Node/Terminal IP address and also the addresses for any remote
sites to be accessed.
If login security has been enabled, you need the engineer

password for the local and also any remote sites to be accessed.
Any special test equipment that may be needed, such as a BER

tester.
Toolkit.
Key(s) for access to the site.
Troubleshooting basics
2.7
This section provides general guidance on 9500 MPR-A
troubleshooting:
2.8
Check front-panel LED indications. These provide summary alarm
indications, which can help narrow down the location and type of failure. See
IXL-101 for more information.
Where a Status LED on a plug-in is off (unlit), but power to the

MSS is confirmed by LEDs on other plug-ins, check the seating of
the affected plug-in.
2.9
Check Main Screen. When logging into 9500 MPR-A with Craft
Terminal, the opening screen is the Main Screen. Use the information provided
to check for severity and problem type. See Table 101-C for probable cause and
recommended action.
2.10
Check the basics first.
1-8
For example, if multiple alarms are present, and these include power
supply voltage or hardware alarms, always check their cause before
looking at resultant down-stream path failure or path warning (signal)
alarms.
Introduction
3EM23956AM
Similarly, if a path-related failure is indicated (no hardware or

software alarms), investigate the path. Go to the Craft Terminal
History screen (15 minute view) to check supporting data, such as low
RSL and incidence of intermittent pre-failure BER alarms, which if
present are evidence of a path-related failure. See Troubleshooting
path problems in this chapter for more information.
2.11
Check if symptoms match the alarm. Alarms reflect the alarm
state, but in exceptional circumstances an alarm may be raised because of a
failure to communicate correctly with the alarm source, or a failure in alarm
management processing. Always check to see if symptoms match the alarm,
using LED indications and the Craft Terminal.
2.12
Check if recent work may be a cause. Recent work at the site may
be a cause or contributing factor. Check for a configuration change, software
upgrade, power recycling (reboot), or other site work:
Many hardware alarms are only initiated as a loss-of-communications

alarm during a reboot, software upgrade, or reconfiguration. By not
being able to communicate with the Core, their settings cannot be
loaded. The fault may be at the hardware device (most likely),
communications to it, or the Core.
Hardware/software compatibility alarms will be raised when a new

plug-in is installed that needs a later version of 9500 MPR-A software.
Hardware incompatible alarms will be raised when a plug-in is

installed in a slot that has been configured for a different plug-in.
2.13
MSS before an ODU. If there is doubt about whether a fault is in the
MSS or ODU, always troubleshoot the MSS first.
2.14
Hot-pluggable. MSS cards are hot-pluggable. There is no need to
power-down before replacing, but traffic will be lost unless the plug-in is
protected.
2.15
Plug-in restoration time. Ensure adequate time is allowed for
services to resume when a plug-in is replaced.
Troubleshooting path problems

2.16
A path-related problem, with the exceptions of interference, reflection,
or multipath, is characterized by traffic being similarly affected in both
directions. Generally, if you are experiencing only a one-way problem, it is not
a path problem.
Introduction
1-9
3EM23956AM
A path extends from ODU or MPT-HL antenna port to ODU or

MPT-HL antenna port.
2.17
Normally a path problem is signalled by a reduced RSL, and
depending on its severity, a high BER.
2.18
Only in worst case situations, such as an antenna knocked out of
alignment, will a path fail completely, and stay that way.
2.19
For weather-related problems, such as rain or ducting, the path
problem will disappear as the weather returns to normal.
Path problems on a commissioned link

2.20
A path problem on an existing link, one that has been operating
satisfactorily may be caused by:
Weather-related path degradation
Changed antenna alignment or antenna feed problem
New path obstruction
Interference from other signal sources
Weather-related path degradation

2.21
If BER alarms are fleeting/not permanent and RSL returns to its
normal, commissioned level after the alarm is cleared, rain, diffraction, or
multipath fading is indicated. Rain fade is the likely cause of fade for links 13
GHz and higher. Diffraction and multipath/ducting for links 11 GHz and lower.
If these alarms are persistent, there could be a problem with the link design or
original installation.
1-10
Introduction
3EM23956AM
Changed antenna alignment or antenna feed problem

2.22
If RSLs do not return to commissioned levels after a period of
exceptionally strong winds, suspect antenna alignment. Also, check the
antenna for physical damage, such as may occur with ice-fall. For a remotemounted ODU or MPT-HL, check its antenna feeder.
New path obstruction
2.23
Where all other parameters check as normal, and the path has
potential for it to be obstructed by construction works, view/survey the path for
possible new obstructions.
Interference from other signal sources
2.24
Interference usually affects traffic in just one direction. Unlike other
path problems, RSL is not affected. If suspected, check for new link
installations at, or in the same geographical area, as the affected site.
Ultimately, a spectrum analyzer may have to be used to confirm interference,
which is not an easy task given the need to connect directly to the antenna port,
after removing the ODU or MPT-HL.
Path problems on a new link

For a new link, potential problems can extend to also include:
2.25
Incorrect antenna alignment
Mismatching antenna polarizations
Incorrect path calculations
Reflections
Incorrect antenna alignment

2.26
One or both antennas incorrectly aligned. Refer to 9500 MPR-A
Turn-Up manual (PN 3EM23955AM) Antenna Polarization Verification
(DLP-105) Antenna Feedhorn Verification - XPD Procedure.
Mismatching antenna polarizations
2.27
Given a typical polarization discrimination of 30 dB, for most links it
is not possible to capture a signal to begin the antenna alignment process.
Introduction
1-11
3EM23956AM
Incorrect path calculations

2.28
If the RSLs are too low or too high, antenna alignment is correct, and
Tx power settings are correct, check the path calculations used to determine
the link performance. A good calculation match is +/- 2dB. Disagreements in
excess of 3 dB should be investigated.
Reflections
2.29
Reflection (path cancellation) problems may not have been picked up
at the path planning stage, particularly if the survey was a simple line-of-sight.
If suspected, resurvey the path.
Troubleshooting configuration problems

2.30
Configuration problems should only occur during the setup of a new
link, or reconfiguration of an existing link. The more common problems may be
broadly categorized as:
Compatibility Problems
Incorrect circuit connections
Incorrect ID naming and commissioning
Incorrect/incompatible trib settings
Compatibility problems
2.31
The two alarms that may activate are Configuration Not Supported
and SW/HW Incompatible:
2.32
Configuration Not Supported: The plug-in installed is not enabled
or is incorrect for the configuration.
Incorrect circuit connections
2.33
No alarms are activated for incorrect circuit connections. An incorrect
assignment means the expected end-to-end circuit connectivity will not
happen. Re-check circuit assignments for all nodes carrying the lost circuit(s).
2.34
1-12
Take extra care when configuring ring circuits.
Introduction
3EM23956AM
2.35
Where the problem is not obvious, use the tributary loopback BER test
to track a single circuit through a 9500 MPR-A network, beginning at the node
closest to the node applying the BER test.
Incorrect ID naming and commissioning
2.36
All traffic-carrying circuits must have a unique flow ID for the crossconnect capability to operate.
Incorrect/incompatible trib settings
2.37
Trib line interface settings incorrect, or line levels incompatible. While
no alarm activates for an incorrect setting, its effect may result in line levels
being too low (LOS alarm), or too high, resulting in a high BER.
Troubleshooting ethernet problems

2.38
This section gives general guidance on troubleshooting problems
related to the four Ethernet ports on the Core-E Card and the eight Ethernet
ports on the P8ETH card.
2.39
The most common Ethernet problems are network and connectivity
related and therefore always check the following first:
Verify link partner capability, provisioning, and connection
Verify radio provisioning matches link partner
Verify cabling between radio and link partner
2.40
The LEDs on the Core-E and P8ETH Card front panel for each
Ethernet connector are a good indicator of correct connectivity and activity on
the Ethernet port. See Table 101-H for LEDs that are locally at the alarmed
site.
In order for the green Link LED to light:
2.41
Introduction
1.
Cable must be connected to Ethernet port
2.
Ethernet port must be enabled (provisioned Enabled on Core Settings

Screen)
3.
Speed and mode (on Core Settings Screen) must be provisioned the
same as the link partner.
1-13
3EM23956AM
2.42
The yellow LED opposite the green on the connector indicates activity
only. The flashing yellow LED is not an indicator of signal type or quality.
Troubleshooting TMN problems
2.43
This section gives general guidance on troubleshooting TMN problems
related to Ethernet port 4 on the Core-E Card. Ethernet port 4 on the Core-E
Card can be used to transport SNMP IP data. Troubleshoot port 4 connectivity
alarms the same as Ethernet ports 1-3. See sections 2.38 to 2.42.
2.44
The most common TMN problems are network related and first alert
is normally observed by improper operation at the SNMP master. Always check
the following first:
Verify master is properly registered in NE to receive traps.
Verify SNMP version matches system requirements
Verify correct community string and privileges
Verify proper network routing.
See Table 101-J for information about TMN network troubleshooting.
1-14
Introduction
3EM23956AM
3.
Safety awareness
Safety EMC-EMF-ESD norms and equipment labeling

3.1
This section describes the equipment labeling and the norms
mandatory or suggested that must be considered to avoid injuries on persons
and/or damage to the equipment.
Safety rules
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC norms)
Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges
Cautions to avoid equipment damage
Safety rules
General rules
3.2
Before performing any installation, turn-on, tests or operation and
maintenance operations, read carefully the related sections of this Manual,
specifically:
Hardware Installation
Commissioning
Maintenance and Upgrade
Observe safety rules

3.3
When equipment is operating, do not access the equipment parts
which are protected with Cover Plate Shields removable with tools.
3.4
If you must access the equipment parts when it is operating, this is
allowed exclusively to service personnel, where for Service Personnel or
Technical assistance is meant:
Introduction
Personnel which has adequate Technical Knowledge and experience

necessary to be aware of the danger that he might find in carrying out
an operation and of the necessary measurements to reduce danger to
minimum for him and for others.
1-15
3EM23956AM
The Service Personnel can only replace the faulty units with spare
parts.
The Service Personnel is not allowed to repair: hence the access to the
parts not specified is not permitted.
The keys and/or the tools used to open doors, hinged covers to remove
parts which give access to compartments in which are present high
dangerous voltages must belong exclusively to the service personnel.
3.5
For the eventual cleaning of the external parts of the equipment,
absolutely do not use any inflammable substance or substances which in some
way may alter the markings, inscriptions etc.
It is recommended to use a slightly wet cleaning cloth.
3.6
3.7
The Safety Rules stated in the handbook describe the operations
and/or precautions to observe to safeguard service personnel during the
working phases and to guarantee equipment safety, i.e., not exposing persons,
animals, things to the risk of being injured/damaged.
3.8
POWER.
Whenever the safety protection features have been impaired, REMOVE
3.9
To cut off power proceed to switch off the power supply units as well as
cut off power station upstream (rack or station distribution frame).
The safety rules described in this handbook are distinguished by the following
symbol and statement:
Labels indicating danger, forbiddance, command

3.10
Follow the instructions printed on the labels affixed to the units and
assemblies.
1-16
Dangerous electrical voltages
Risks of explosions
Moving mechanical parts
Equipment connection to earth
Heat-radiating mechanical parts
Microwave radiations (EMF norms)
Laser precautions
Introduction
3EM23956AM
3.11
Pay attention to the information stated in the following, and proceed
as instructed.
The symbols presented in following paragraphs are all the

possible symbols that could be present on Alcatel-Lucent
equipment, but are not all necessarily present on the equipment
this handbook refers to.
Dangerous electrical voltages

Labeling:
3.12
The following warning label is affixed next to dangerous voltages
(>42.4 Vp; >60 VDC).
3.13
If it is a Class 1 equipment connected to mains, then the label
associated to it will state that the equipment will have to be grounded before
connecting it to the power supply voltage, e.g.:
Introduction
1-17
3EM23956AM
Safety instructions:
DANGER! Possibility of personal injury:
3.14
Carefully observe the specific procedures for installation / turn-up and
commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where D.C. power is present,
described in the relevant installation / turn-up and commissioning /
maintenance documents and the following general rules:
Personal injury can be caused by -48VDC. Avoid touching powered

terminals with any exposed part of your body.
Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, DC circuits can cause

severe arcing that can result in burns and/or eye damage. Remove
rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with primary
circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.
Risks of explosions
Labeling:
3.15
This risk is present when batteries are used, and it is signaled by the
following label:
3.16
Therefore, slits or apertures are made to let air circulate freely and
allow dangerous gasses to down flow (battery-emitted hydrogen). A 417-IEC5641 Norm. compliant label is affixed next to it indicating that the openings
must not be covered up.
1-18
Introduction
3EM23956AM
Moving mechanical parts

Labeling:
3.17
The following warning label is affixed next to fans or other moving
mechanical parts:
3.18
Before carrying out any maintenance operation see that all the moving
mechanical parts have been stopped.
Equipment connection to earth

Labeling:
3.19
Terminals for equipment connection to earth, to be done according to
international safety standards, are pointed out by the suitable symbol:
Introduction
1-19
3EM23956AM
3.20
The position of earth connection terminals is specified in the
Hardware Installation section.
Heat-radiating mechanical parts

Labeling:
3.21
The presence of heat-radiating mechanical parts is indicated by the
following warning label in compliancy with IEC 417 Norm, Fig.5041:
DANGER! Possibility of personal injury:

3.22
Carefully observe the specific procedures for installation / turn-up and
commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where heat-radiating
mechanical parts are present, described in the relevant installation / turn-up
and commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rule:
3.23
Personal injury can be caused by heat. Avoid touching powered
terminals with any exposed part of your body.
1-20
Introduction
3EM23956AM
Microwave radiations (EMF norms)

3.24
Equipment emitting RF power (Reminder from site preparation
procedure):
3.25
The site must be compliant with ICNIRP guidelines or local regulation
if more restrictive.
The following rules should be strictly applied by Customer:
3.26
Non authorized persons should not enter the compliance boundaries,

if any, for the general public.
Compliance RF boundaries, if any, related to Electro Magnetic Field

exposure must be marked.
Workers should be allowed to switch-off the power if they have to

operate inside compliance boundaries.
Assure good cable connection.
Install the antenna as high as possible from floor or area with public
access (if possible the cylinder delimitating the compliance
boundaries, if any, or the cylinder corresponding to the transmission
area directly in front of antenna with the same diameter as the
antenna, more than 2 meters high).
Install the antenna as far as possible from other existing equipment

emitting RF power.
3.27
Always remember that someone standing in front of the 9500 MPR-A
antenna may cause traffic shutdown.
3.28
Place the relevant stickers:
EMF emission warning sign
Introduction
1-21
3EM23956AM
3.29
On the site when applicable (when people can cross the compliance
boundaries and/or the transmission area of the antenna, i.e. roof top
installation)
Warning label Do not stand on the antenna axis

On the mast (front side)
3.30
EMF emission warning sign (Yellow and black) to be placed at bottom

of antenna, visible by someone moving in front of the antenna (roof top
installation)
On the antenna (rear side)
3.31
EMF emission warning sign, placed on the antenna.
Compliance boundaries for 9500 MPR-A transceivers with 1ft (30 cm) antenna:
System Modulation
Worst Configuration
A (m)
B (m)
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC norms)

3.32
The equipment's EMC norms depend on the type of installation being
carried out (cable termination, grounding etc.,) and on the operating conditions
(equipment, setting options of the electrical/electronic units, presence of
dummy covers, etc.).
3.33
Before carrying out any installation, turn-on, tests & operation and
maintenance operations, read carefully the related sections of this Manual, in
particular:
1-22
Hardware Installation
Maintenance and Upgrade
Introduction
3EM23956AM
3.34
The norms set down to guarantee EMC compatibility, are
distinguished inside this Manual by the symbol and term:
EMC Norms
Introduction
1.
EMC General Norms - Installation
All connections (towards the external source of the equipment) made

with shielded cables use only cables and connectors suggested in this
Manual or in the relevant Plant Documentation, or those specified in
the Customer's Installation Norms (or similar documents)
Shielded cables must be suitably terminated
Install filters outside the equipment as required
Ground connect the equipment utilizing a conductor with proper

diameter and impedance
Mount shields (if utilized), previously positioned during the

installation phase, but not before having cleaned and degrease it.
Before inserting the shielded unit proceed to clean and degrease all
peripheral surfaces (contact springs and connection points, etc.)
Screw fasten the units to the subrack.
To correctly install EMC compatible equipment follow the instructions

given.
2.
EMC General Norms - Turn-on, Tests & Operation
Preset the electrical units as required to guarantee EMC compatibility
Check that the equipment is operating with all the shields properly
positioned (dummy covers, ESD connector protections, etc.)
To properly use EMC compatible equipment observe the information

given
3.
EMC General Norms - Maintenance
Before inserting the shielded unit, which will replace the faulty or
modified unit, proceed to clean and degrease all peripheral surfaces
(contact springs and connection points, etc.)
Clean the dummy covers of the spare units as well.
1-23
3EM23956AM
Screw fasten the units to the subrack.
Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges

3.35
Before removing the ESD protections from the monitors, connectors
etc., observe the precautionary measures stated. Make sure that the ESD
protections have been replaced and after having terminated the maintenance
and monitoring operations.
3.36
Most electronic devices are sensitive to electrostatic discharges, to this
concern the following warning labels have been affixed:
3.37
Observe the precautionary measures stated when having to touch the
electronic parts during the installation/maintenance phases.
3.38
Workers are supplied with anti static protection devices consisting of
an elasticized band worn around the wrist and a coiled cord connected to the
elasticized band and to the stud on the subrack. See Figure 3-1.
Cautions to avoid equipment damage
Anti static protection device kit
3.39
Whenever is necessary to handle spare parts and cards out of their
own box, this kit, as shown in Figure 3-1, must be always warn and its
termination must be connected to a grounded structure, to avoid the possible
damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges.
1-24
Introduction
3EM23956AM
Figure 3-1. Anti static protection device kit
Screw fixing
3.40
In normal operation conditions, all screws (for unit box closing, cable
fixing, etc.) must be always tightened to avoid item detachment and to ensure
the equipment EMI-EMC performance.
The screw tightening torque must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) 10%
2.4317 in lb. (0.2026 ft lb.) 10%
Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking.
MSS-ODU300 cable disconnection / connection

3.41
To avoid equipment damage, always unplug the MOD300 card first
before disconnecting the MSS-ODU300 cable (at MSS or ODU300 side).
Fan, equipment rack, and equipment cabinet precautions

3.42
When installing the equipment observe the following:
DANGER
Possibility of personal injury. Keep your fingers away from the rotating fan
blades. Pull the fan-tray card by the thumbscrews only and wait for the fan
blades to stop spinning before you attempt to remove the fan-tray card
completely from the chassis.
DANGER
Possibility of personal injury. The Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR-A requires at

least two people to support, align, and attach the MSS-8 shelf or MPT-HL
shelf to an equipment rack. To prevent equipment damage or personal injury,
make sure you have enough help.
Introduction
1-25
3EM23956AM
DANGER

least three people to lift and carry an equipment rack populated with
9500 MPR-A equipment. To prevent equipment damage or personal injury,
make sure you have enough help or the appropriate lifting and transporting
equipment.
DANGER

least two people to align and secure an equipment rack populated with
9500 MPR-A equipment. To prevent equipment damage or personal injury,
make sure you have enough help.
DANGER
Possibility of personal injury. To prevent personal injury and equipment

damage due to unbalanced loading of the equipment rack or cabinet, make
sure the equipment rack or cabinet is properly secured to the floor, ceiling,
or other rigid structure before mounting the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR-A in it.
For approved methods of securing the equipment rack, read the equipmentrack installation instructions or contact the equipment-rack manufacturer.
Electrical precautions
3.43
Take appropriate safety precautions when performing procedures on
electrical equipment. Hazardous electrical potentials are present when system
power is on.
3.44
Some procedures in this manual require working with small
conductive objects, such as screwdrivers, fuses, washers, screws, and nuts.
When working on a chassis at the top of an equipment rack, a dropped object
that falls into a lower chassis can cause physical damage and electrical short
circuits. To prevent this, place a piece of paper or other cover over the lower
chassis to catch fallen objects. Remove the paper or other cover when work is
complete.
1-26
DANGER
Possibility of personal injury. Install the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR-A in a

restricted-access area only. Entrance to a restricted-access area is intended
for qualified or trained personnel and access to it is controlled by a locked
barrier.
DANGER
Possibility of personal injury. The chassis does not contain main overcurrent
protection devices. The user must provide circuit breakers or fuses and
disconnects between the power source and the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR-A.
Each power feed from a source (-48 V dc and Return) requires a 25-amp dcrated fast-trip circuit breaker or fuse and disconnect. Circuit breakers or
fuses must meet applicable local and national electrical safety codes and be
approved for the intended application.
Introduction
3EM23956AM
DANGER
Possibility of personal injury. Make sure you connect the node to a -48 V dc
source that is electrically isolated from the ac source and is reliably
connected to earth ground.
DANGER
Possibility of personal injury. For personal safety, make sure you connect
and secure the installation sites frame-ground (earth ground) wire to the
frame-ground terminal on the 9500 MPR-A before you connect any other
wires to the node.
DANGER
Possibility of personal injury. A dc-power source provides high energy,

which can cause serious injury or equipment damage. Only Alcatel-Lucent
qualified personnel should connect the dc power to the Alcatel-Lucent
9500 MPR-A. To prevent serious injury or equipment damage, make sure the
power source cables are de-energized before you handle or connect them to
the node.
Laser precautions
3.45
Verify that laser labels on equipment state that the system conforms
to all applicable standards of 21 CFR 1040.10. If there are no danger labels, call
the Alcatel-Lucent Technical Support Center (TSC).
3.46
The invisible infrared radiation emitted by the fiber-optic transmitter
can cause eye damage. Observe local office procedures and the following
dangers:
DANGER
Possibility of personal injury. The use of controls and/or adjustments, or the

performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in
hazardous infrared radiation exposure.
DANGER
Possibility of personal injury. Laser infrared radiation is not in the visible

spectrum; therefore, it is not visible to the naked eye or with laser safety
glasses. Although it cannot be seen, laser radiation may be present.
DANGER
Possibility of personal injury. Never look directly into an unterminated

fiber-optic connector unless it is absolutely known that no optical power is
being emitted by the connector.
DANGER
Possibility of personal injury. Never look into a broken optical fiber cable
unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present.
DANGER
Possibility of personal injury. Never look at an optical fiber splice, cable, or

connector unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present in
the fiber. Laser radiation can come from a fiber-optic transmitter, an Optical
Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR), or other optical test equipment.
Introduction
1-27
3EM23956AM
DANGER
Possibility of personal injury. Never look directly into an unterminated

optical connector or cable with a magnifier/microscope unless it is
absolutely known that no laser radiation is being emitted from the connector
or cable. A magnifier or microscope greatly increases the laser radiation
hazard to the eyes.
DANGER
Possibility of personal injury. This system normally operates as a Class I

Laser Product (no hazard). However, during servicing operations, when
optical connectors are being connected, disconnected, or handled without
dust covers, it is possible to be exposed to Class IIIb laser radiation, which
can cause eye damage.
DANGER
Possibility of personal injury. Everyone within a 10-foot radius of an

unterminated optical fiber or connector that is connected to a powered
transmitter must wear laser safety goggles or eye shields.
3.47
Laser safety goggles or eye shields are not required if the following
work rules are strictly followed:
1-28
1.
Always remove electrical power from fiber-optic transmitters before

disconnecting fiber-optic connectors in the path between the
transmitter and the receiver.
2.
Never connect an unterminated optical cable to a fiber-optic

transmitter. Always connect fiber-optic cables to fiber-optic receivers,
test sets, or some other termination first.
Introduction
3EM23956AM
4.
Electrostatic-sensitive devices
Electrostatic-sensitivity
4.1
An Electrostatic-Sensitive Device (ESD) can withstand voltage spikes
of only 10 to 100 volts and can be damaged or effectively destroyed by a
discharge that might go unnoticed by a technician. Some devices have built-in
protection. However, because this protection is effective only against the lower
levels of electrostatic charges, a false sense of security often prevails.
WARNING
Possibility of equipment damage. Common plastic, white foam,

cellophane, and masking adhesive tapes must not come in contact with
ESDs or their packaging.
4.2
Common plastics (synthetic insulating materials), clothing, and paper
or cardboard are the most common sources of static charges.
4.3
Observe special precautions when the ESD sign is displayed. See
Figure 4-1.
Figure 4-1. Electrostatic-sensitive sign
671-0592-1
061405
The following items are examples of ESDs:
4.4
Introduction
MOS (Metal Oxide Semiconductor) capacitors, transistors, Integrated

Circuits (ICs)
CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor) transistors, ICs
JFET (Junction Field Effect Transistors)
IGFET (Insulated Gate Field Effect Transistors)
1-29
3EM23956AM
Handling circuit packs

4.5
Although the risk of damage to an ESD is reduced considerably after
it is assembled into a circuit designed to protect sensitive components, take the
following precautions to reduce static charges to harmless levels:
WARNING
Handle all circuit packs as ESDs unless they are known not to contain
electrostatic-sensitive parts.
Possibility of equipment damage. Heel straps are effective only while

standing on conductive or electrostatic-dissipative surfaces.
Wear ground straps, wrist (PN 1AD012470001) before and while

touching or handling circuit packs containing ESDs.
Cover surfaces with resistance to ground in excess of 100 megohms,

such as ordinary tile, with properly grounded static dissipative
runners.
Workbenches must be earth-grounded, and work surfaces must be

covered with an antistatic or static dissipative material bonded to the
bench (bolt). A field service kit (PN 1AD068980001) or equivalent can
be used if an adequate workbench is not available.
ESDs are delivered with protective packing (containers or conductive

foam). The devices should remain in their original containers until
needed. Store (even temporarily), pack, and ship circuit packs in
antistatic bags or containers.
Containers with ESDs must contact the antistatic work surface, and
the wrist strap must be connected before parts are removed from
packaging. Devices must be handled by their bodies.
Do not handle printed circuit board or components unnecessarily. Use

plastic handle.
Do not use synthetic bristled brushes or acid brushes to clean circuit

packs.
Handle failed circuit packs with same precautions as good circuit

packs.
4.6
ESDs are protected when properly packaged in conductive or
antistatic packaging. Acceptable packaging is marked as either conductive or
antistatic.
1-30
Introduction
3EM23956AM
5.
Product support information
Telephone support
Customer service telephone support
5.1
For telephone support for the customer services mentioned in this
Product Support Information, call the Alcatel-Lucent North America Service
Center at 1-(888) 252-2832 for details, 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Central Time,
Monday through Friday. Ask the operator for the appropriate service to be
connected to a qualified representative or engineer.
5.2
After-hours emergency telephone support is also available by calling
the Alcatel-Lucent North America Service Center at 1-(888) 252-2832. An
emergency is defined as an out-of-service, traffic-affecting problem or a
nonoperating alarm system on traffic-bearing systems.
Product documentation and training

Product documentation
5.3
Product documentation is available on CD-ROM. The documentation
can also be accessed through Alcatel-Lucents OnLine Customer Support
(OLCS) web site at:
https://support.alcatel-lucent.com/portal/olcsHome.do
Product documentation updates appear on Alcatel-Lucents OnLine Customer

Support web site before they are available in any other format.
5.4
At Alcatel-Lucents OnLine Customer Support web site, follow the onscreen instructions to register for access and obtain a login ID. In addition to
accessing product documentation, the Alcatel-Lucents OnLine Customer
Support web site allows the user to view the following:
Introduction
Application notes
Configuration notes
Data collections
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)
1-31
3EM23956AM
General information books
General Release Documents (GRDs)
Installation documents
Methods of Procedure (MOPs)
Product Change Notifications (PCNs)
Product Information Bulletins (PIBs)
Product manual updates
Software patch and software load documents
Software Update Documents (SUDs)
Technical bulletins
Training documents
Urgent Product Warnings (UPWs)
Training
5.5
Equipment training is available to all customers. Crafts and
maintenance personnel who are trained by Alcatel-Lucent's Training
department can expect more effective assistance if they need to call the
Technical Assistance Center. Regularly scheduled courses are available at the
training facilities in Plano, Texas. If a customer cannot attend a standard
course, the Training department can arrange a course for a specific
requirement and conduct it at the customer's facility. For further information,
call customer service telephone support and ask for a training coordinator or
write to one of the following addresses:
IN USA:
IN CANADA:
Alcatel-Lucent USA
3400 W. Plano Pkwy.
Plano, Texas 75075
ATTN: Training M/S 1206-553
Alcatel-Lucent Canada
Network Services Division
P.O. Box 13600
Ottawa, Ontario K2K 2E6
5.6
The annual Product Training Catalog can be ordered by calling the
training coordinator, or it can be viewed on-line at:
http://www1.alcatel-lucent.com/us/product_training/catalog
1-32
Introduction
3EM23956AM
Technical support center

5.7
The Technical Support Center (TSC) staff is always ready to provide
high-quality technical assistance. Customers can expect effective telephone
assistance when their crafts and maintenance personnel have been trained by
Alcatel-Lucent's Training department and are equipped with adequate test
equipment, spares, and documentation at the site.
5.8
For technical assistance, call Alcatel-Lucent North America Service
Center at 1-(888) 252-2832.
After-hours emergency telephone support

5.9
Emergency support is available after-hours for emergencies by calling
1-(888) 252-2832.
5.10
An emergency is defined as an out-of-service, traffic-affecting problem
or a nonoperating alarm system on traffic-bearing systems.
5.11
Nonemergency is defined as installation turn-ups, application
questions, traffic cutover, routine maintenance, or other non-service-affecting
maintenance. All non-service-affecting, after-hours telephone services are
billable to the customer.
Please provide the operator with the following information:
5.12
Company name
Caller name
A telephone number where caller can be reached
A brief description of the problem, including the product involved
After-hours non emergency telephone support

5.13
After-hours telephone support to address new installations, system
expansions, system operations, system application, or other
non-service-affecting issues is available by contacting Alcatel-Lucent at
1-(888) 252-2832.
Introduction
1-33
3EM23956AM
On-site technical support

5.14
On-site technical support is available when an issue cannot be
resolved remotely. This determination is usually made by Alcatel-Lucent TSC
during the problem investigation process. These services may or may not be
billable to a customer. This depends on several factors such as what type of
Service Level Agreement a customer has with Alcatel-Lucent, the age of the
product, etc.
Repair and return services

5.15
As part of a comprehensive technical support program, Alcatel-Lucent
provides factory repair services for equipment. This service is available both
during and after the warranty period through Alcatel-Lucent's Return and
Repair department.
Spare parts and replacement cards

5.16
For spare parts, spare cards, card exchange, and in-warranty
replacement on a routine or emergency basis, call customer service telephone
support.
Provide the following information:
5.17
Customer Contact Name
Customer Company Name
Customer telephone number
Customer E-mail Address
A brief description of the problem, including product line, part

number, and quantity of parts needed
5.18
For emergency assistance after normal business hours, call customer
service telephone support, ask the operator for Emergency Parts Assistance,
and provide the operator with the required information. The operator will
contact an appropriate individual to respond.
1-34
Introduction
3EM23956AM
Return for credit or warranty exchange procedure

5.19
Returned equipment must have a Parts Request (PR) number. Obtain
an PR number by calling the Alcatel-Lucent Welcome Center at
1-866-582-3688.
5.20
No equipment should be returned without an PR number. The
following information is required:
Description and quantity of equipment to be returned
Reason for return
Order number the equipment was purchased against and approximate

date of purchase
Service center
5.21
The Service Center tests, repairs, and modifies all cards (both in and
out of warranty). Cards received for repair or modification are returned
promptly.
Return for repair procedure

5.22
Refer to paragraph 5.19 for information on obtaining an PR number.
Notification to the Service Center and issuance of an PR number by
Alcatel-Lucent personnel must be made prior to shipment of parts. The
following information must be furnished with the request for return
authorization:
Introduction
Purchase order number or requisition number
Description and quantity of equipment to be returned
Reason for return:
Modification required
Defective equipment to be repaired
Warranty status (in or out of warranty) and warranty date stamped on

unit
Specific nature of problem
Name and telephone number of person who identified problem
1-35
3EM23956AM
Special instruction/information
Shipping instructions for repair, credit, or

warranty exchange
5.23
Return equipment or parts prepaid to the address provided when the
PR number was issued. The PR number must be prominently marked on the
shipping label, the packing list, and any correspondence regarding the order.
Include company name, address, and name of person to contact in case

of a question.
Include specific reason for return. (This aids prompt processing.)
Include the same requisition number or purchase order number that

was furnished with request for return authorization.
Include type number and part number of unit.
State whether equipment is in or out of warranty.
Furnish shipping address for return of unit, if applicable, or other

pertinent details.
Mail purchase order, if applicable, to address shown under Return for

Repair Procedure, Attention: Service Center.
Installation and maintenance services

Engineering and installation service
5.24
Whether installation for specific equipment or a full turnkey network
facility is needed, Installation Service can help. Alcatel-Lucent has experience
in central office, outside plant, and customer premises applications, and
specializes in flexible scheduling and high-quality service. Qualified staff are
in place nationwide, so an installation can be started and completed promptly.
Contract maintenance service

5.25
Field service from Alcatel-Lucent US and Canada offices are available.
Alcatel-Lucent field service is well-suited for private networks of any size.
1-36
Introduction
3EM23956AM
5.26
Factory-trained service technicians are qualified on similar systems
before they are allowed to maintain customer equipment. They have direct
access to additional technical support around the clock and to all necessary
tools and test equipment.
Introduction
1-37
3EM23956AM
1-38
Introduction
IXL-100
3EM23956AM
Index Task Lists (IXLs)

IXL-100 Task index list
IXL-100
Task index list
Table 100-A lists the type of procedure or information needed to perform maintenance and trouble
clearing on the system.
Table 100-A. Task Index List
Type of procedure/information
See
Alarm and abnormal condition clearing procedures
IXL-101
Support procedures
IXL-102
Equipment replacement procedures
IXL-103
Supporting information
IXL-104
Preventive maintenance procedures
RTL-100
Task index list
2-1
3EM23956AM
2-2
IXL-100
Task index list
IXL-101
3EM23956AM
IXL-101 Alarm and abnormal condition clearing procedures
IXL-101
See Table 101-C to identify alarms reported by the Alarm Manager and the corresponding procedure,
which describes how to clear the alarm.
See Table 101-D to identify Abnormal Condition types and the corresponding procedure, which
describes how to clear the Abnormal Condition type. The EQUIPMENT column list the entities to
which an Abnormal Condition type can apply.
See Table 101-E to identify Core-E card LED alarm indications and the corresponding procedure,
which describes how to clear the condition type.
See Table 101-F to identify MSS-1 shelf CORE LED alarm indications and the corresponding
procedure, which describes how to clear the condition type.
See Table 101-G to identify Transport card status LED alarm indications and the corresponding
See Table 101-H to identify Ethernet LED alarm indications and the corresponding procedure, which
describes how to clear the condition type.
See Table 101-I to identify MPT-HL Transceiver LED alarm indications and the corresponding
See Table 101-J to identify TMN Network Trouble conditions and troubleshooting techniques, which
describes how to clear the condition type.
This manual supports alarm naming conventions for the Alarm Monitor.
To retrieve alarms using the Alarm Monitor, execute the following sequence from the main menu
bar:
Diagnosis>Alarms>NE Alarms
To retrieve Abnormal Conditions using the Craft Terminal, execute the following sequence from the
main menu bar:
Diagnosis>Abnormal Condition List
Alarm manager / craft terminal

Equipment / facility column
The EQUIPMENT/FACILITY column in Table 101-C lists the entities to which an alarm type can
apply. Depending on the entities affected, some alarm types have more than one corresponding
procedure.
3-3
IXL-101
3EM23956AM
In the EQUIPMENT/FACILITY column, equipment entities are listed using the following
definitions:
AUX: Auxiliary card
Core-E: Core Switching Module card
FAN: MSS-4/8 Fan card
MOD300: Radio Modem card
MPTACC: MPT Access card
MSS: MSS-1/4/8 shelf
MPT-HC: MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU) outdoor unit
MPT-HL: MPT-HL Transceiver card
SFP: Small Form Factor Pluggable equipped on listed equipment type
P2E3DS3: 2-Port DS3 card
P8ETH: 8-Port Ethernet Access Switch
P32E1DS1: 32-Port DS1 card
SDHACC: 2-Port OC-3 card
In the EQUIPMENT/FACILITY column, facility entities are listed using the following definitions:
Core-E: Ethernet facility supported by the Core-E card
DS3: DS3 facility supported by P2E3DS3 card
DS1: DS1 facility supported by P32E1DS1 card
MOD300: IF facility supported by MOD300 card
MPT-HC: RF facility supported by MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU)

outdoor unit
MPT-HL: RF facility supported by MPT-HL Transceiver card
OC-3: OC-3 facility supported by SDHACC card
P8ETH: Ethernet facility supported by the P8ETH card
Friendly name / entity column

The FRIENDLY NAME/ENTITY column identifies the location of the alarming entity.
3-4
IXL-101
3EM23956AM
Equipment friendly names are constructed using the following structure:

r<rack number>s<subrack number>b<board number>d<daughter>
The syntax for equipment Friendly Names / Entities is described in Table 101-A.
Table 101-A. Equipment friendly name syntax definitions
Location
Syntax
Values
Description
Rack
r01
Rack number
Subrack
s1
Subrack number for MSS-1, MSS-4, and MSS-8 shelves
s[3-8][1-4]
Subrack number for (MPT ODU) connected to MPTACC

card (MPTACC slot number and Ethernet port number
associated with MPT ODU)
s[3-8][5-8]
Subrack number for (MPT ODU) connected to P8ETH card

(P8ETH slot number and Ethernet port number associated
with MPT ODU)
s1[1-6]
Subrack number for MPT ODU connected to Core-E card

or MSS/CORE (Core-E slot number and Ethernet port
number associated with MPT ODU)
s[3-8][5-8]
Subrack number for MPT-HL transceiver connected to

P8ETH card (P8ETH slot number and Ethernet port
number associated with MPT-HL Transceiver)
s1[1-6]
Subrack number for MPT-HL Transceiver connected to

Core-E card or MSS/CORE (Core-E slot number and
Ethernet port number associated with MPT-HL
Transceiver)
s[3-8]
Subrack number for ODU300 connected to MOD300 card

(MOD300 slot number associated with ODU300)
board#[1-9]
Board/slot number of equipment in alarm
Board
b#[1-9]
Slot#[1-9]
Daughter
daughter#[05-06] Daughter SFP port number of equipment in alarm

associated with Core-E card or MSS/CORE
associated with MPTACC card
associated with P8ETH card
associated with SDHACC card
Radio facility friendly names are constructed using the following structure:
f<facility name>rd<radio direction>b<board number>p<port number>c<channel number>
3-5
IXL-101
3EM23956AM
DS1, DS3, and Ethernet facility friendly names are constructed using the following structure:
f<facility name>b<board number>p<port number>
The syntax for facility Friendly Names / Entities is described in Table 101-B.
Table 101-B. Friendly name syntax definitions
Location
Syntax
Values
Description
Facility
Name
DS-1-in, out
DS1 facility and direction
DS-3-in, out
DS3 facility and direction
EleSdh-in
OC-3 facility and direction (supported by electrical SFP)
OptSdh-in
OC-3 facility and direction (supported by optical SFP)
MAU
Ethernet signal
Radio
Radio facility
Dir#[3-8].[1-4]
Radio direction of MPT ODU radio channel in alarm

connected to MPTACC card (MPTACC slot number and
port number)
Dir#1.[1-6]
Radio direction of MPT ODU radio channel in alarm

connected to Core-E card or MSS/CORE (Core-E slot
number and port number)
Dir#[3-8].[5-8]
Radio direction of MPT-HL radio channel in alarm

connected to P8ETH card (P8ETH slot number and port
number)
Dir#1.[5-6]
Radio direction of MPT-HL radio channel in alarm

connected to Core-E card or MSS/CORE (Core-E slot
number and port number)
Dir#[3-8]
Radio direction of ODU300 radio channel in alarm

connected to MOD300 card (MOD300 slot number)
board#[1-9]
board/slot number of MSS-8 (1-9), MSS-4 (1-5) equipment

in alarm
Radio
Direction
Board
rd
b#[1-9]
Slot#[1-9]
MSS/CORE
board/slot number of MSS-1 equipment in alarm
MSS/DS1
Port
Number
3-6
Port#[1-16]
DS1 port number of facility in alarm on MSS-1 shelf
Port#[1-32]
DS1 port number of facility in alarm on P32E1DS1
Port#[1-2]
DS3 port number of facility in alarm
Port#[1-2]
OC-3 port number of facility in alarm
Port#[1-6]
Ethernet port number of facility in alarm associated with

Core-E card or MSS/CORE
Port#[1-8]
Ethernet port number of facility in alarm associated with

P8ETH card
IXL-101
3EM23956AM
Table 101-B. Friendly name syntax definitions (cont.)

Location
Syntax
Values
Description
Channel
Number
Ch#1
Main radio channel in alarm
Ch#0
Spare radio channel in alarm
ERPS
ERP
ERP[1-2]#[1-2]
Ethernet Ring Protection Switch
The following are examples to illustrate how to interpret the probable cause and friendly name
combinations:
Example: Probable Cause: Replaceable Unit Missing
Friendly Name: r01s1/board#8
Translation: Missing card at r01 (rack 01) s1 (subrack 1 (MSS-8 Shelf))

/board#8 [missing card provisioned for slot #8]
Friendly Name: r01s1b3/daughter#05
Translation: Missing SFP at r01 (rack 01) s1 (subrack 1 (MSS-8 Shelf)) b3

(card in slot #3 (P8ETH)) /daughter#05 [missing SFP provisioned in slot #3
(P8ETH), SFP port #5]
Example: Probable Cause: Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch
Friendly Name: r01s1/board#7
Translation: Card in r01 (rack 01) s1 (subrack 1 (MSS-8 Shelf)) /board#7 [card
installed in slot #7 does not match card configured in Core-E memory]
Friendly Name: r01subrack#37
Translation: Card in r01 (rack 01) subrack 37 [MPT-HL Transceiver 3.7,

associated with P8ETH card in slot #3, SFP port #7, does not match MPT-HL
Transceiver configured in Core-E memory]
3-7
IXL-101
3EM23956AM
Example: Probable Cause: Loss Of Signal
Friendly Name: DS1-in/slot#5/Port#22
Friendly Name: MAU/Slot#4/Port#7
Translation: DS1-input, slot #5, Port #22 [Loss Of incoming DS1 Signal, on
P32E1DS1 card in slot #5, port #22]
Translation: Ethernet signal, slot #4, Port #7 [Loss Of Ethernet Signal on

P8ETH card in slot #4, SFP port #7]
Friendly Name: MAU/Port#2
Translation: Ethernet signal, Port #2 [Loss Of Ethernet Signal on the active

Core-E card, port #2]
Example: Probable Cause: Loss Of Frame
Friendly Name: DS3-in/slot#6/Port#2
Friendly Name: Radio/Dir#3.6/Slot#3/Port#6/Ch#1
Translation: DS3-input, slot #6, Port #2 [Loss Of DS3 Frame on P2E3DS3

card in slot #6, port #2]
Translation: Radio signal, Direction 3.6, associated with card in slot #3, SFP
port #6, Channel #0 [Loss of Frame on MPT-HL Transceiver 3.6 associated
with P8ETH card in slot #3, SFP port #6, Channel #0 (main)]
Friendly Name: Radio/Dir#6/Ch#1
Translation: Radio signal, Direction 6, Channel #0 [Loss of Frame on ODU300

#6 channel #0 (spare) associated with MOD300 card in slot #6]
Table 101-C describes the alarms that are reported by the Alarm Manager and the corresponding
procedure to clear the alarm.
Table 101-C. Alarm monitor alarm types
Probable
cause
Friendly name/entity
Facility/
equipment
AIS
DS1-in/MSS/DS1/Port#[1-16] DS1 on
MSS-1 shelf
DS1-in/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-32] DS1 on
P32E1DS1
DS3-in/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-2]
3-8
Description
See
AIS detected incoming to the TAP-100

PDH card from the
demarcation panel for the
DS1 or DS3 facility.
DS3
IXL-101
3EM23956AM
Table 101-C. Alarm monitor alarm types (cont.)

Probable
cause
Facility/
equipment
AIS
EleSdh-in/slot#[3-8]/Port[1-2] OC-3
OptSdh-in/slot#[3-8]/Port[1-2]
AIS
DS1-out/MSS/DS1/Port#[116]
DS1 on
MSS-1 shelf
DS1-out/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[132]
DS1 on
P32E1DS1
DS3-out/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-2] DS3
AIS
EleSdh-out/slot#[3-8]/
Port[1-2]
OC-3
OptSdh-out/slot#[3-8]/
Port[1-2]
ATPC loop
problem
Bandwidth
degrade for
protection
switch
Description
See
AIS detected incoming to the TAP-100

SDHACC card from the
OC-3 facility.
AIS detected from the
Core-E switch matrix for the
DS1 or DS3 facility,
indicating an upstream
failure.
TAP-100
AIS detected from the

OC-3 facility, indicating an
upstream failure.
TAP-100
TAP-110
MPT ODU
Reported for a ATPC High
connected to Power Time-out. When
Core-E
ATPC is enabled, the local
transmitter was operating
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/MSS/
MPT ODU
CORE/Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]
connected to continuously at full power for
MSS/CORE 5 minutes, and the
transmitter was reduced to its
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/
MPT ODU
minimum power setting and
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1] connected to this condition notification was
MPTACC
generated. This condition will
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
MPT ODU
remain active until a
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#1
connected to message is received that the
P8ETH
active receiver at the other
end of the link is no longer
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
MPT-HL
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1] connected to requesting additional
transmitter power.
P8ETH
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]
Radio/Dir#1.[5-6]/
Slot#1/Port#[5-6]/Ch#1
MPT-HL
connected to
Core-E
CORE/Port#[5-6]/Ch#1
MPT-HL
connected to
MSS/CORE
Radio/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#[0-1]
MOD300
ERP#[1-2]#[1-2]
Core-E
An ERPS Instance has

entered a Protection state.
TAP-105
3-9
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Probable
cause
Facility/
equipment
Description
See
Bandwidth over Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/

MPT ODU
While the MPT ODU/
TAP-104
flow
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1] connected to MPT-HL was not
MPTACC
communicating with the
Core-E, EAS, or
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
MPT ODU
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]
connected to MSS/CORE, TDM/SDH
cross-connections were
Core-E
provisioned with a total
MPT ODU
bandwidth which exceeds
connected to the net bandwidth capacity of
MSS/CORE the radio profile.
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
MPT ODU
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1] connected to
P8ETH
MPT-HL
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
P8ETH
Radio/Dir#1.[5-6]/
MPT-HL
connected to
Core-E
MPT-HL
connected to
MSS/CORE
Battery failure
r01/subrack#1
MSS-1/4/8
A battery feed failed or is

missing.
Cable LOS
r01s1/board#[3-8]
MOD300
Bad cable connection at IF

TAP-111
in/out connector on MOD300
card.
CLA
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/
MPT ODU
The standby transmitter
TAP-104
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1] connected to has/had a silent failure which
MPTACC
caused the far end to request
a HSB switch.
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
MPT ODU
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]
connected to
Core-E
MPT ODU
connected to
MSS/CORE
TAP-102
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
MPT-HL
P8ETH
3-10
MOD300
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Probable
cause
Facility/
equipment
Description
See
Clock failure
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT ODU
The MPT ODU/MPT-HL is
TAP-119
connected to not able to lock the air Tx
Core-E
symbol rate to the NE clock.
MPT ODU
connected to
MSS/CORE
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/
MPT ODU
MPTACC
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#1
MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH
MPT-HL
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
P8ETH
Degrade
Radio/Dir#1.[5-6]/
MPT-HL
connected to
Core-E
MPT-HL
connected to
MSS/CORE
Sync-in/Port#1
Core-E
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
Frequency of the source

TAP-109
signal
is
degraded.
Managed
MOD300
only if the interface has been
MPT ODU
configured as a primary or
connected to
secondary synchronization
Core-E
source.
MPT ODU
connected to
MSS/CORE
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#1
MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#1
MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH
3-11
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Probable
cause
Facility/
equipment
Degrade
(cont.)
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
MPT-HL
P8ETH
Radio/Dir#1.[5-6]/
MPT-HL
connected to
Core-E
MPT-HL
connected to
MSS/CORE
RadioLAG#[1-14]
MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH,
MPT-HL
connected to
P8ETH
Description
See
TAP-109
DS1-in/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-32] P32E1DS1
Degrade
RadioLAG#[1-14]
ODU
Signal on the Radio LAG

interface is degraded.
Degrade
EthLAG#[1-14]
Core-E,
MSS/CORE
RadioLAG#[1-14]
MPT ODU,
MPT-HL,
ODU
A member(s) of an Ethernet TAP-117

or Radio LAG group has no
activity. Degrade is declared
when the number of active
ports in the LAG are greater
than zero and less than the
LAG size.
DemXPIC LOS r01s1b1[1-6]/daughter#04
MPT ODU
Bad or missing cable/cable
connected to connection at XPIC
Core-E,
connector on MPT ODU.
MSS/CORE
TAP-117
TAP-111
r01s1/b[3-8][1-4]/daughter#04 MPT ODU

connected to
MPTACC
r01s[3-8][5-8]b1/daughter#04 MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH
3-12
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Probable
cause
Facility/
equipment
Demodulator
fail
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/
MPT ODU
Loss of receive signal, bad
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1] connected to receive signal, or internal
MPTACC
receive circuit failure.
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT ODU
connected to
Core-E
MPT ODU
connected to
MSS/CORE
Description
See
TAP-104
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
MPT-HL
P8ETH
Dialog failure
Radio/Dir#1.[5-6]/
MPT-HL
connected to
Core-E
MPT-HL
connected to
MSS/CORE
r01/subrack#1[1-6]
MPT ODU
Temporary Loss of
connected to communication with
Core-E,
MPT ODU/MPT-HL
MSS/CORE
r01/subrack#[3-8][1-4]
MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC
r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8]
MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH
r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8]
MPT-HL
connected to
P8ETH
r01/subrack#1[5-6]
MPT-HL
connected to
Core-E,
MSS/CORE
TAP-107
3-13
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Probable
cause
Facility/
equipment
Duplicate
address
detected
TMNEthernet/MngtPort
Core-E/TMN Duplication of IPv6 Global

TAP-120
MGMT Port Unicast address detected on
Core-E/TMN TMN management port,
Port#4, In-Band port 1-2
Port#4
Duplicate
address
detected
3-14
TMNEthernet/Port#4
TMNInBand#[1-2]
Core-E/TMN
In-Band Port
[1-2]
PPP-IP/RF#[3-8]
MOD300
PPP-IP/RF#1[1-6]
Description
See
Duplication of IPv6 Global

TAP-120
Unicast address detected on
MPT ODU
connected to TMN-RF over PPP
Core-E,
MSS/CORE
PPP-IP/RF#[3-8][1-4]
MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC
PPP-IP/RF#[3-8][5-8]
MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH
PPP-IP/RF#[3-8][5-8]
MPT-HL
connected to
P8ETH
PPP-IP/RF#1[5-6]
MPT-HL
connected to
Core-E,
MSS/CORE
PPP-IP/RF/LAG#[1-14]
MPT ODU,
MPT-HL,
ODU
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Probable
cause
Facility/
equipment
Description
Early warning
indication
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT ODU
10E-9 BER detected
connected to
Core-E
MPT ODU
connected to
MSS/CORE
See
TAP-104
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/
MPT ODU
MPTACC
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
MPT ODU
P8ETH
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
MPT-HL
P8ETH
Radio/Dir#1.[5-6]/
MPT-HL
connected to
Core-E
MPT-HL
connected to
MSS/CORE
MOD300
Eth OAM loss of MEP#MDID[1-16]#MA ID

continuity
[1-512]#MEPID[1-8191]
Core-E,
MSS/CORE
MEP received no CCM

TAP-118
frames from a peer MEP
during an interval equal to 3.5
times the CCM transmission
interval configured at the
MEP.
Eth OAM
MisMerge
condition
MEP#MDID[1-16]#MA ID
[1-512]#MEPID[1-8191]
Core-E,
MSS/CORE
MEP received a CCM frame TAP-118

with correct MD Level but
incorrect MA ID.
Eth OAM
remote defect
indication
[1-512]#MEPID[1-8191]
Core-E,
MSS/CORE

with the RDI field set.
Eth OAM
unexpected
level
[1-512]#MEPID[1-8191]
Core-E,
MSS/CORE

with the incorrect MD Level.
Eth OAM
unexpectedME
PID
[1-512]#MEPID[1-8191]
Core-E,
MSS/CORE
Received MEPID value is

different than the expected
MEPID.
TAP-118
3-15
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Probable
cause
Facility/
equipment
Description
Eth OAM
unexpected
period
[1-512]#MEPID[1-8191]
Core-E,
MSS/CORE
Received MEP Time-Out

TAP-118
period value is different than
the expected MEP Time-Out
period.
Excessive
environmental
temperature
r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8]
MPT-HL
Excessive temperature on
connected to MPT-HL Transceiver
P8ETH
r01/subrack#1[5-6]
MPT-HL
connected to
Core-E,
MSS/CORE
r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8]
MPT-HL
Failure or Missing MPT-HL
connected to Transceiver Fan Unit
P8ETH
detected
r01/subrack#1[5-6]
MPT-HL
connected to
Core-E,
MSS/CORE
3-16
See
TAP-103
TAP-103
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Probable
cause
Facility/
equipment
Description
See
Firmware
Download
On Going
r01s1/board#[8]
AUX
r01s1/board#[1-2]
Core-E
r01s1/board#[3-8]
MOD300,
MPTACC,
P2E3DS3,
P8ETH,
P32E1DS1,
SDHACC
Download Status. A
download of an FPGA or
other software unit on the
addressed card.
No
action
required.
r01/subrack#[3-8]
ODU300
r01/subrack#1[1-6]
MPT ODU
connected to
Core-E
r01/subrack#[3-8][1-4]
MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC
r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8]
MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH
r01/subrack#1[5-6]
MPT-HL
connected to
Core-E
r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8]
MPT-HL
connected to
P8ETH
3-17
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Probable
cause
Facility/
equipment
High BER
TAP-104
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/
MPT ODU
Bit Error Rate threshold
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1] connected to (10E-4) exceeded on receiver
MPTACC
input circuits on MOD300/
MPT ODU/MPT-HL card.
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
MPT ODU
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]
connected to
Core-E
MPT ODU
connected to
MSS/CORE
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#1
MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH
Description
See
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
MPT-HL
P8ETH
High BER
Radio/Dir#1.[5-6]/
MPT-HL
connected to
Core-E
MPT-HL
connected to
MSS/CORE
MOD300
High BER
OC-3
TAP-100
-5
(10E ) exceeded on transmit
output circuits on SDHACC
card to the demarcation
panel for the OC-3 facility.
ExtPt/Input#[1-6]
AUX
ExtPt/Input#[11-14]
Fan
Housekeeping alarm input is TAP-116

active.
ExtPt/Input#[11-14]
MSS-1
Port[1-2]
Port[1-2]
Housekeeping
alarm
3-18
TAP-100
-5
(10E ) exceeded on receiver
input circuits on SDHACC
card from demarcation panel
for the OC-3 facility.
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Probable
cause
Facility/
equipment
Description
Incompatible
frequency
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT ODU
Configured frequency is
connected to outside of the supported
Core-E
frequency range.
MPT ODU
connected to
MSS/CORE
See
TAP-104
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/
MPT ODU
MPTACC
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#1
MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH
MPT-HL
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
P8ETH
Radio/Dir#1.[5-6]/
MPT-HL
connected to
Core-E
MPT-HL
connected to
MSS/CORE
ODU300
3-19
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Probable
cause
Facility/
equipment
Incompatible
modulation
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/
MPT ODU
Configured modulation is not TAP-104
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1] connected to supported by MPT ODU,
MPTACC
MPT-HL, or ODU300.
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT ODU
connected to
Core-E
MPT ODU
connected to
MSS/CORE
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#1
MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH
Description
See
MPT-HL
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
P8ETH
Incompatible
protection
3-20
Radio/Dir#1.[5-6]/
MPT-HL
connected to
Core-E
MPT-HL
connected to
MSS/CORE
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/
MPT ODU
Incorrectly configured or
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1] connected to missing RPS/XPIC module
MPTACC
on MPT ODU.
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT ODU
connected to
Core-E
MPT ODU
connected to
MSS/CORE
TAP-104
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Probable
cause
Facility/
equipment
Incompatible
shifter
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/
MPT ODU
Configured shifter value not
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1] connected to supported by MPT ODU,
MPTACC
MPT-HL, or ODU300.
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT ODU
connected to
Core-E
MPT ODU
connected to
MSS/CORE
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#1
MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH
Description
See
TAP-104
MPT-HL
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
P8ETH
Incompatible
power
Radio/Dir#1.[5-6]/
MPT-HL
connected to
Core-E
MPT-HL
connected to
MSS/CORE
ODU300
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
MPT-HL
Configured Tx power value
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1] connected to not supported by MPT-HL.
P8ETH
Radio/Dir#1.[5-6]/
MPT-HL
connected to
Core-E
MPT-HL
connected to
MSS/CORE
TAP-104
3-21
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Probable
cause
Facility/
equipment
Description
Incompatible TX Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/
MPT ODU
Configured Tx power value
power
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1] connected to not supported by MPT ODU
MPTACC
or ODU300.
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT ODU
connected to
Core-E
MPT ODU
connected to
MSS/CORE
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#1
MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH
ODU300
Internal
r01/subrack#1[1-6]
communication
problem
3-22
See
TAP-104
MPT ODU
Loss of communications with TAP-107
connected to MPT ODU, MPT-HL, or
Core-E,
ODU300.
MSS/CORE
r01/subrack#[3-8][1-4]
MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC
r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8]
MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH
r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8]
MPT-HL
connected to
P8ETH
r01/subrack#1[5-6]
MPT-HL
connected to
Core-E,
MSS/CORE
r01/subrack#[3-8]
ODU300
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Probable
cause
Facility/
equipment
Link identifier
mismatch
AirFrame/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#1,
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]
MPT ODU
Link identifier number
TAP-104
connected to provisioned on MOD300/
MPTACC
MPT ODU/MPT-HL card
settings screen is different
from link identifier number
MPT ODU
connected to provisioned at far end of hop.
AirFrame/Dir#1.[1-6]/
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#1,
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]
See
Core-E
AirFrame/Dir#1.[1-6]/MSS/
CORE/Port#[1-6]/Ch#1,
CORE/Port#[1-6]
MPT ODU
connected to
MSS/CORE
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#1
MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#1,
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]
MPT-HL
connected to
P8ETH
Slot#1/Port#[5-6]
MPT-HL
connected to
Core-E
CORE/Port#[5-6]
MPT-HL
connected to
MSS/CORE
AirFrame/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#1,
AirFrame/Dir#[3-8]
MOD300
Description
3-23
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Probable
cause
Facility/
equipment
Description
See
Loop problem
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT ODU
Loss of ATPC command path TAP-110
connected to between far end transmitter
Core-E
and local receiver.
MPT ODU
connected to
MSS/CORE
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/
MPT ODU
MPTACC
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#1
MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH
MPT-HL
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
P8ETH
Loss of
alignment
3-24
Radio/Dir#1.[5-6]/
MPT-HL
connected to
Core-E
MPT-HL
connected to
MSS/CORE
Hitless/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]
MPT ODU
Delay/loss of alignment
connected to between main and protect
MPTACC
RPS RF paths detected.
Hitless/Dir#1.[1-6]
MPT ODU
connected to
Core-E,
MSS/CORE
MPT-HL
connected to
P8ETH
Hitless/Dir#[3-8]
MOD300
TAP-112
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Probable
cause
Loss Ethernet
MAU/Slot#[1-2]/Port#[1-6]
synchronization Radio/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#[0-1]
messaging
RadioLAG#[1-14]
channel
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]
Facility/
equipment
Description
See
Core-E
Reported if there is a loss of TAP-109

the Ethernet Synchronization
MOD300
Message Channel. The
MPT ODU,
alarm is applicable to Core-E
MPT-HL
Ethernet ports and Radio
MPT ODU
interfaces (MPT ODU,
connected to MPT-HL, or MOD300)
Core-E
configured with SSM support
enabled and is assigned as a
MPT ODU
connected to synchronous clock source
MSS/CORE input.
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/
MPT ODU
MPTACC
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#1
MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
MPT-HL
P8ETH
Loss Of
CESoETH
frame
Radio/Dir#1.[5-6]/
MPT-HL
connected to
Core-E
MPT-HL
connected to
MSS/CORE
CircuitTDM/MSS/DS1/
Port#[1-16]
DS1 on
MSS-1 shelf
CircuitTDM/Slot#[3-8]/
Port#[1-32]
DS1 on
P32E1DS1
Port#[1-2]
DS3
Port#[1-2]
OC-3
Packets are not being

TAP-100
received by the DS1, DS3, or
OC-3 emulation circuits on
the receive circuits from the
switch matrix.
3-25
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Probable
cause
Facility/
equipment
Loss Of Frame
MSS-1 shelf
P32E1DS1
DS3
Description
See
Loss of DS1, DS3, or OC-3

frame detected incoming to
the PDH/SDH card from the
DS1, DS3, or OC-3 facility.
TAP-100
Loss of DS1, DS3, or OC-3

frame detected from the
DS1, DS3, or OC-3 facility
TAP-100
Loss of frame
DS1-out/Slot#[3-8]/
Port#[1-32]
DS1/
P32E1DS1
DS3-out/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-2] DS3
Port[1-2]
OC-3
Port[1-2]
Loss of frame
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]
TAP-113
MPT ODU
Far end TX problems, RF
connected to path problems, or local circuit
Core-E
failures have caused BER to
increase to the point that
MPT ODU
connected to frames are being lost.
MSS/CORE
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/
MPT ODU
MPTACC
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#1
MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
MPT-HL
P8ETH
3-26
Radio/Dir#1.[5-6]/
MPT-HL
connected to
Core-E
MPT-HL
connected to
MSS/CORE
MOD300
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Probable
cause
Facility/
equipment
Loss of
protection
Radio/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#1
MOD300
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#1
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
Loss of signal
Description
See
The radio direction is

TAP-104
affected
by
a
failure
that
radio
MPT ODU
connected to protection (RPS) cant
recover. Only reported if RPS
MPTACC
is provisioned.
MPT ODU
connected to
Core-E
MPT ODU
connected to
MSS/CORE
MSS-1 shelf
No DS1, DS3, or OC-3 input TAP-100

signal detected.
P32E1DS1
DS3
Loss of signal
ETHInterface#100
ETHInterfaceonCore#4
MAU/MSS/CORE/Port#[1-6]
Loss of signal
r01s1[1-6]b1/daughter#03
RPS SFP on
MPT ODU
connected to
Core-E,
MSS/CORE
MAU/subrack[#3-8].[1-4]
daughter#03
MPT ODU
Loss of Signal detected on an TAP-104
connected to MPT ODU/MPT-HL Ethernet
MPTACC
Coupler Port. Only reported
when RPS is provisioned.
MPT-HL
MAU/subrack[#3-8].[5-8]
Port#n
Loss of signal
Core-E/TMN Loss of Signal is declared

TAP-105
MGMT Port when either:
Core-E/TMN no Ethernet input signal
detected on the Ethernet
Port#4
port
Core-E
a communication
MSS/CORE
problem with the remote
peer (i.e. a link down
MPTACC
condition)
P8ETH
Sync-in/Port#1
connected to
P8ETH
Core-E
Generated when no signal is TAP-109

present on the incoming
Sync-In port.
3-27
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Probable
cause
Facility/
equipment
Description
Loss of signal
EthLAG#[1-14]
Core-E,
MSS/CORE
RadioLAG#[1-14]
MPT ODU,
MPT-HL,
ODU
ALL members of an Ethernet TAP-117

or Radio LAG group have no
activity. Loss of Signal is
declared when the number of
active ports in the LAG
equals zero.
r01/subrack#[3-8][1-4]
MPTACC
r01/subrack#1[1-2]
MSS/Core
PPP-IP/RF#1[1-6]
MPT ODU
TMN over PPP Fail
connected to
Core-E,
MSS/CORE
PPP-IP/RF#[3-8][1-4]
MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC
PPP-IP/RF#[3-8][5-8]
MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH
PPP-IP/RF#[3-8][5-8]
MPT-HL
connected to
P8ETH
PPP-IP/RF#1[5-6]
MPT-HL
connected to
Core-E,
MSS/CORE
PPP-IP/RF#[3-8]
MOD300
r01s1/board#[1-2]
Core-E
r01s1/board#1
MSS/CORE
Power supply
failure
PPP fail
Provisioning
mismatch
3-28
MPT Power Supply Failure

detected, either an OpenCircuit or Over-Current
condition on a MPTACC or
MSS-1 shelf (PFoE) power
supply port.
See
TAP-102
TAP-104
The wrong flash card is

TAP-106
installed and the current
database is in conflict with
the license string on the card.
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Probable
cause
Facility/
equipment
Description
See
Replaceable
unit missing
r01s1/board#[8]
AUX
r01s1/board#[1-2]
Core-E
r01s1/board#[5,9]
FAN
r01s1/board#[3-8]
MOD300,
MPTACC,
P2E3DS3,
P8ETH,
P32E1DS1,
SDHACC
Card/SFP is missing from

TAP-103
slot (Only declared, if the
card/SFP has been
provisioned. Card/SFP could
be unreachable.).
r01s1b[1-2]/daughter#[5-6]
SFP on
Core-E
r01s1b1/daughter#[5-6]
SFP on
MSS/CORE
r01s1b[3-8]/daughter#[03-04] SFP on
MPTACC
P8ETH
SDHACC
r01s[3-8][1-4]b1/daughter#03 RPS SFP on
MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC
RPS SFP on
MPT ODU
connected to
Core-E,
MSS/CORE
3-29
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Probable
cause
Facility/
equipment
Description
See
Replaceable
unit problem
r01s1/board#[8]
AUX
Card failed.
TAP-103
r01s1/board#[1-2]
Core-E
r01s1/board#[5,9]
FAN
r01s1/board#[3-8]
MOD300,
MPTACC,
P2E3DS3,
P8ETH,
P32E1DS1,
SDHACC
r01/subrack#1[1-6]
MPT ODU
connected to
Core-E,
MSS/CORE
r01/subrack#[3-8][1-4]
MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC
r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8]
MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH
r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8]
MPT-HL
connected to
P8ETH
r01/subrack#1[5-6]
MPT-HL
connected to
Core-E,
MSS/CORE
r01/subrack#[3-8]
ODU300
r01/subrack#[3-8][1-4]
MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC
Core-E
SFP on
MSS/CORE
MPTACC
P8ETH
SDHACC
3-30
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Probable
cause
Facility/
equipment
Replaceable
unit problem
(cont.)
r01s[3-8][1-4]b1/daughter#03 RPS SFP on Card failed.

MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC
RPS SFP on
MPT ODU
connected to
Core-E,
MSS/CORE
RPS or XPIC
Module on
MPT ODU
connected to
Core-E,
MSS/CORE
r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8]/
daughter#04
XPIC Module
on MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH
Description
See
TAP-103
r01s[3-8][1-4]b1/daughter#04 RPS or XPIC

Module on
MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC
3-31
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Probable
cause
Facility/
equipment
Description
Replaceable
unit type
mismatch
r01s1/board#[8]
AUX
r01s1/board#[1-2]
Core-E
r01s1/board#[5,9]
FAN
Card/ODU in slot does not

TAP-103
match card/ODU configured
in Core-E memory
r01s1/board#[3-8]
MOD300,
MPTACC,
P2E3DS3,
P8ETH,
P32E1DS1,
SDHACC
r01/subrack#1[1-6]
MPT ODU
connected to
Core-E,
MSS/CORE
r01/subrack#[3-8][1-4]
MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC
r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8]
MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH
r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8]
MPT-HL
connected to
P8ETH
r01/subrack#1[5-6]
MPT-HL
connected to
Core-E,
MSS/CORE
r01/subrack#[3-8]
ODU300
3-32
See
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Probable
cause
Remote defect
indication
TAP-104
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/
MPT ODU
Remote Defect Indication
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1] connected to (RDI) in a received Radio
MPTACC
Direction. Alarm is reported
when an RDI is received
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
MPT ODU
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]
connected to on a given radio direction
from the remote end of radio
Core-E
link.
MPT ODU
connected to
MSS/CORE
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#1
Facility/
equipment
Description
See
MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
MPT-HL
P8ETH
Remote defect
indication
Radio/Dir#1.[5-6]/
MPT-HL
connected to
Core-E
MPT-HL
connected to
MSS/CORE
MOD300
RPS path fail
RadioProt/Dir#[3-8][1-4]
RadioProt/Dir#1[1-6]
TAP-100
Remote Defect Indication
(RDI) in a received OC-3
Direction. Alarm is reported
when an RDI is received
on a given OC-3 direction
from the remote end of OC-3
link.
MPT ODU
A communication failure is
TAP-114
connected to detected between
MPTACC
MPT ODUs. Only reported
for an MPT ODUs working in
MPT ODU
connected to 1+1 configuration with Virtual
Protection.
Core-E,
MSS/CORE
MPT-HL
Communication failure is
connected to detected between RPS
P8ETH
coupler port between radio
boards. Only reported if RPS
is provisioned.
3-33
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Probable
cause
Facility/
equipment
Description
Rx fail
ODU300
Failure in receive direction of TAP-115

ODU300 RF transceiver.
Includes no input signal.
Secondary
battery failure
r01/subrack#1
MSS-1/4/8
B battery feed failed or is

missing.
MPT ODU
connected to
Core-E,
MSS/CORE
Standby software version on TAP-106

MPT ODU/MPT-HL does not
match software version on
Core-E.
Standby version r01/subrack#1[1-6]

mismatch
3-34
r01/subrack#[3-8][1-4]
MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC
r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8]
MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH
r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8]
MPT-HL
connected to
P8ETH
r01/subrack#1[5-6]
MPT-HL
connected to
Core-E,
MSS/CORE
See
TAP-102
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Probable
cause
Synchronization Sync-in/Port#1
signal fail
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
Facility/
equipment
Description
See
Core-E
Synchronization Signal Fail TAP-109

is reported if the received
MOD300
source signal is not suitable
MPT ODU
as a Sync Source. Managed
connected to
only if the interface has been
Core-E
configured as a primary or
MPT ODU
secondary synchronization
connected to source.
MSS/CORE
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#1
MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#1
MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#1
MPT-HL
connected to
P8ETH
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
MPT-HL
connected to
Core-E
MPT-HL
connected to
MSS/CORE
RadioLAG#[1-14]
MPT ODU,
MPT-HL
DS1-in/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-32] P32E1DS1
3-35
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Probable
cause
Facility/
equipment
Description
Threshold
crossed
Hop/Dir#1[1-6]/Slot#1/
MPT ODU
Threshold Crossing Alarm
Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]-PM15min connected to (TCA) indicates alarm
Core-E
threshold has been
exceeded. Applies to
Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]-PM1day
performance monitor
Link/Dir#1[1-6]-PM15min
parameters with an
Link/Dir#1[1-6]-PM1day
accumulation period of 24
hours and 15 minutes.
Hop/Dir#1[1-6]/MSS/CORE/ MPT ODU
Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]-PM15min connected to
Hop/Dir#1[1-6]/MSS/CORE/ MSS/CORE
See
TAP-108
Hop/Dir#[3-8][1-4]/Slot#[3-8]/ MPT ODU
Hop/Dir#[3-8][1-4]/Slot#[3-8]/ MPTACC
Link/Dir#[3-8][1-4]-PM15min
Link/Dir#[3-8][1-4]-PM1day
Port#[5-8]/Ch#1-PM15min
connected to
Hop/Dir#[3-8][5-8]/Slot#[3-8]/ P8ETH
Port#[5-8]/Ch#1-PM1day
Hop/Dir#[3-8][5-8]/Slot#[3-8]/ MPT-HL
Hop/Dir#[3-8][5-8]/Slot#[3-8]/ P8ETH
Hop/Dir#1[5-6]/MSS/CORE/
3-36
MPT-HL
connected to
Core-E
MPT-HL
connected to
MSS/CORE
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Probable
cause
Facility/
equipment
Description
See
Threshold
crossed
(cont.)
Hop/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#[0-1]PM15min
MOD300
Threshold Crossing Alarm

(TCA) indicates alarm
threshold has been
exceeded. Applies to
performance monitor
parameters with an
accumulation period of 24
hours and 15 minutes.
TAP-108
Hop/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#[0-1]PM1day
Link/Dir#[3-8]-PM15min
Link/Dir#[3-8]-PM1day
DS1-in/Slot#[3-8]/
Port#[1-32]-PM15min
P32E1DS1
DS1-in/Slot#[3-8]/
Port#[1-32]-PM1day
DS1-out/Slot#[3-8]/
Port#[1-32]-PM15min
DS1-in/MSS/DS1/
Port#[1-16]-PM15min
DS1 on
MSS-1 shelf
DS1-in/MSS/DS1/
Port#[1-16]-PM1day
DS1-out/MSS/DS1/
Port#[1-16]-PM15min
DS1-out/MSS/DS1/
Port#[1-16]-PM1day
Trace identifier
mismatch
Trace Identifier Mismatch

TAP-100
condition indicates there is a
J0 Trace Mismatch detected
in the incoming signal from
the demarcation panel.
3-37
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Probable
cause
Facility/
equipment
Description
See
Unavailable
time
MPT ODU
A period of unavailable time TAP-108
Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]-PM15min connected to begins when 10 consecutive
Core-E
SES events are detected.
Alarms are associated to the
performance monitoring port.
Hop/Dir#1[1-6]/MSS/CORE/ MPT ODU
Hop/Dir#1[1-6]/MSS/CORE/ MSS/CORE
Hop/Dir#[3-8][1-4]/Slot#[3-8]/ MPTACC
connected to
Hop/Dir#[3-8][5-8]/Slot#[3-8]/ P8ETH
Hop/Dir#[3-8][5-8]/Slot#[3-8]/ MPT-HL
Hop/Dir#[3-8][5-8]/Slot#[3-8]/ P8ETH
3-38
MPT-HL
connected to
Core-E
MPT-HL
connected to
MSS/CORE
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Probable
cause
Facility/
equipment
Description
Unavailable
time
(cont.)
Hop/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#[0-1]PM15min
MOD300
A period of unavailable time TAP-108

begins when 10 consecutive
SES events are detected.
Alarms are associated to the
performance monitoring port.
Hop/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#[0-1]PM1day
See
DS1-in/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-32]- P32E1DS1
PM15min
DS1-in/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-32]PM1day
DS1-out/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[132]-PM15min
DS1-out/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[132]-PM1day
DS1-in/MSS/DS1/Port#[116]-PM15min
DS1 on
MSS-1 shelf
DS1-in/MSS/DS1/Port#[116]-PM1day
DS1-out/MSS/DS1/Port#[116]-PM15min
DS1-out/MSS/DS1/Port#[116]-PM1day
Unconfigured
equipment
present
r01s1/board#[8]
AUX
r01s1/board#[2]
Core-E
r01s1/board#[5,9]
FAN
r01s1/board#[3-8]
MOD300,
MPTACC,
P2E3DS3,
P8ETH,
P32E1DS1,
SDHACC
Card in MSS shelf slot 2

through 8 is not provisioned
(enabled) but is present in
slot.
SFP is not provisioned
card.
TAP-103
Core-E
SFP on
MSS/CORE
MPTACC
3-39
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Probable
cause
Facility/
equipment
Unconfigured
equipment
present
(cont.)
P8ETH
Version
mismatch
r01/subrack#1[1-6]
MPT ODU
connected to
Core-E,
MSS/CORE
r01/subrack#[3-8][1-4]
MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC
r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8]
MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH
r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8]
MPT-HL
connected to
P8ETH
r01/subrack#1[5-6]
MPT-HL
connected to
Core-E,
MSS/CORE
r01/subrack#[3-8]
ODU300
r01s1/board#[1-2]
Core-E
SDHACC
Description
See
Card in MSS shelf slot 2

through 8 is not provisioned
slot.
SFP is not provisioned
card.
TAP-103
Software version on ODU,

TAP-106
MPT ODU/MPT-HL does not
match software version on
Core-E.
Table 101-D. Abnormal condition

Operation
Name
Core facing PDH DS1 Port#[1-16] Internal

loopback
3-40
Type
(equipment)
Description
See
DS1 Port#[1-32] Internal
Loopback
The associated entity has a TAP-101
DS1 on MSS-1 core facing PDH (DS1 or
shelf
DS3) loopback activated at
the near end.
Loopback
SLOT#[3-8]
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Operation
Name
Type
(equipment)
Description
Digital core
facing loopback
Direction #1.[1-6]
Loopback
(MPT ODU
connected to
Core-E,
MSS/CORE)

loopback activated at the
near end.
Direction #[3-8].[1-4]
Loopback
(MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC)
Loopback
(MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH)
Loopback
(MPT-HL
connected to
P8ETH)
Direction #1.[5-6]
Loopback
(MPT-HL
connected to
Core-E,
MSS/CORE)
See
3-41
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Operation
Name
Type
(equipment)
Description
See
Forced adaptive
modulation
Direction #[3-8]
Radio
(MOD300)
TAP-101
Direction #1.[1-6]
Radio
(MPT ODU
connected to
Core-E,
MSS/CORE)
Manual Adaptive
Modulation command has
been executed.
Radio
(MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC)
Radio
(MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH)
Direction #[3-8].[5-8] Channel #[0-1]
Radio
(MPT-HL
connected to
P8ETH)
Direction #1.[5-6]
Loopback
(MPT-HL
connected to
Core-E,
MSS/CORE)
3-42
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Operation
Name
Type
(equipment)
Description
Forced switch
EPS
Main#1 Slot#1
Equipment
Protection
(Core-E)
Main#1 Slot#[3,5,7]
Equipment
Protection
(MOD300,
P2E3DS3,
P32E1DS1,
SDHACC)
A Forced Equipment
TAP-101
Protection Switch (EPS) has
been executed for the
protection group.
Main#1 Slot #[3-8]

Port #[1-4]
Equipment
Protection
(MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC)
Main#1 Slot #1
Port #[1,3,5]
Equipment
Protection
(MPT ODU
connected to
Core-E)
Main#1 MSS/CORE
Port #[1,3,5]
Equipment
Protection
(MPT ODU
connected to
MSS/CORE)
Main#1 Slot #[3,5,7]

Port #[5-8]
Equipment
Protection
(MPT-HL
connected to
P8ETH)
See
3-43
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Operation
Name
Type
(equipment)
Description
See
Forced switch
RPS
Main#1 Slot#[3,5,7]
Rx Radio
Protection
(MOD300)
TAP-101
Main#1 Slot #[3-8]

Port #[1-4]
Rx Radio
Protection
(MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC)
A Forced Rx Protection
Switch (RPS) has been
executed for the protection
group.
Main#1 Slot #1
Port #[1,3,5]
Rx Radio
Protection
(MPT ODU
connected to
Core-E)
Main#1 MSS/CORE
Port #[1,3,5]
Rx Radio
Protection
(MPT ODU
connected to
MSS/CORE)

Port #[5-8]
Rx Radio
Protection
(MPT-HL
connected to
P8ETH)
3-44
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Operation
Name
Type
(equipment)
Description
See
Forced switch
TPS
Main#1 Slot#[3,5,7]
HSB
Protection
(MOD300)
TAP-101
Main#1 Slot #[3-8]

Port #[1-4]
HSB
Protection
(MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC)
A Forced Tx Protection
Switch (TPS) has been
group.
Main#1 Slot #1
Port #[1,3,5]
HSB
Protection
(MPT ODU
connected to
Core-E)
Main#1 MSS/CORE
Port #[1,3,5]
HSB
Protection
(MPT ODU
connected to
MSS/CORE)

Port #[5-8]
HSB
Protection
(MPT-HL
connected to
P8ETH)
IF cable loopback Direction #[3-8]
Loopback
(MOD300)

near end.
Line facing circuit Direction #1.[1-6]

loopback
Loopback
(MPT ODU
connected to
Core-E,
MSS/CORE)

near end.
Loopback
(MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC)
Loopback
(MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH)
3-45
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Operation
Name
Type
(equipment)
Line facing PDH

loopback
DS1 Port#[1-16] External
Loopback
DS1 on MSS-1 line facing PDH (DS1 or
shelf
DS3) loopback activated at
the near end.
Loopback
SLOT#[3-8]
Spare#0 Slot#2
Equipment
Protection
(Core-E)
Spare#0 Slot#[4,6,8]
Equipment
Protection
(MOD300,
P2E3DS3,
P32E1DS1,
SDHACC)
Spare#0 Slot#[3-8]
Port #[1-4]
Equipment
Protection
(MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC)
Spare#0 Slot #1
Port #[2,4,6]
Equipment
Protection
(MPT ODU
connected to
Core-E)
Spare#0 MSS/CORE
Port #[2,4,6]
Equipment
Protection
(MPT ODU
connected to
MSS/CORE)
Port #[5-8]
Equipment
Protection
(MPT-HL
connected to
P8ETH)
Lockout switch
EPS
3-46
Description
See
A Lockout Equipment
TAP-101
Protection Switch (EPS) has
been executed for the
protection group.
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Operation
Name
Type
(equipment)
Description
See
Lockout switch
RPS
Rx Radio
Protection
(MOD300)
TAP-101
Spare#0 Slot#[3-8]
Port #[1-4]
Rx Radio
Protection
(MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC)
A Lockout Rx Protection
Switch (RPS) has been
group.
Spare#0 Slot #1
Port #[2,4,6]
Rx Radio
Protection
(MPT ODU
connected to
Core-E)
Spare#0 MSS/CORE
Port #[2,4,6]
Rx Radio
Protection
(MPT ODU
connected to
MSS/CORE)
Port #[5-8]
Rx Radio
Protection
(MPT-HL
connected to
P8ETH)
3-47
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Operation
Name
Type
(equipment)
Description
See
Lockout switch
TPS
HSB
Protection
(MOD300)
TAP-101
Spare#0 Slot#[3-8]
Port #[1-4]
HSB
Protection
(MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC)
A Lockout Tx Protection
Switch (TPS) has been
group.
Spare#0 Slot #1
Port #[2,4,6]
HSB
Protection
(MPT ODU
connected to
Core-E)
Spare#0 MSS/CORE
Port #[2,4,6]
HSB
Protection
(MPT ODU
connected to
MSS/CORE)
Port #[5-8]
HSB
Protection
(MPT-HL
connected to
P8ETH)
3-48
IXL-101
3EM23956AM

Operation
Name
Type
(equipment)
Description
See
TXMute
Direction #1.[1-6] Channel #[0-1]
Radio
(MPT ODU
connected to
Core-E,
MSS/CORE)
Manual or automatic mute

command has been
executed.
TAP-101
Radio
(MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC
Direction #[3-8].[5-8] Channel #1
Radio
(MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH
Radio
(MPT-HL
connected to
P8ETH)
Direction #1.[5-6] Channel #1
Radio
(MPT-HL
connected to
Core-E,
MSS/CORE)
Direction #[3-8] Channel #1
Radio
(ODU300)
3-49
IXL-101
3EM23956AM
Table 101-E. Core-E Card LED indications

LED
Indication
Probable cause
Corrective action
Status
OFF
Card Not Provisioned
Provision card
Not Powered
Verify MSS-4/8 shelf fuse is not blown

or missing.
Verify Power cable(s) are properly
terminated at both ends.
Verify voltage level at the PDU.
Not Equipped
Verify the card is properly installed.
Green
Blinking
Configuration Downloading, SW
Booting, or flash card realignment.
Wait for configuration download or

software boot to complete.
Green
Card Properly Equipped and

Provisioned. currently InService/Active.
Normal Operating condition. No

Action required.
Yellow

Provisioned as EPS. Currently in
Standby.
Normal operating condition for

Standby card.
No Action required.
Red
Card Fail
Replace card
Red Blinking Card Mismatch
Check alarms for replaceable unit

type mismatch, see
TAP-103.
Major
Alarm
Red
At least one alarm with Critical or

Major severity present in the NE.
Retrieve alarms using the alarm

monitor, see IXL-101 Table 101-C,
and troubleshoot accordingly.
Minor
Alarm
Red
At least one alarm with Minor severity Retrieve alarms using the alarm
present in the NE.
Warning
Yellow
At least one alarm with Warning

severity present in the NE.

Abnormal Yellow
At least one abnormal condition

present in the NE.
Retrieve abnormal condition using

JSUM, see IXL-101 Table 101-D, and
troubleshoot accordingly.
3-50
IXL-101
3EM23956AM
Table 101-F. MSS-1 shelf LED indications

LED
Indication
Probable cause
Corrective action
Status
OFF
MSS-1 shelf not Provisioned
Provision MSS-1 shelf.
MSS-1 shelf not Powered
Verify MSS-1 shelf fuse is not blown

or missing.
MSS-1 shelf not Equipped
Verify the MSS-1 shelf is properly

installed.
Green
Blinking
Booting.

Green
MSS-1 shelf Properly Equipped and

Provisioned. currently In-Service.

Action required.
Red
MSS-1 shelf Fail
Replace MSS-1 shelf
Major
Alarm
Red
At least one alarm with Critical or

Major severity present in the NE.

Minor
Alarm
Red
At least one alarm with Minor severity Retrieve alarms using the alarm
present in the NE.
Warning
Yellow
At least one alarm with Warning

severity present in the NE.

Abnormal Yellow
At least one abnormal condition

present in the NE.
Retrieve abnormal condition using

JSUM, see IXL-101 Table 101-D, and
PFoE
Yellow
Port is emitting power according to the

configuration.
OFF
Port is emitting power according to the

configuration.
3-51
IXL-101
3EM23956AM
Table 101-G. Transport Card LED indications

LED
Indication
Probable cause
Corrective action
Status
OFF
Provision card
Not Powered
Verify MSS-4/8 shelf fuse is not blown

or missing.
Not Equipped
Verify the card is properly installed.
Green
Blinking
Booting, or flash card realignment.

Green

Provisioned. currently InService/Active.

Action required.
Yellow

Provisioned as EPS. Currently in
Standby.

Standby card.
No Action required.
Red
Card Fail
Replace card
Red Blinking Card Mismatch
Check alarms for replaceable unit

type mismatch, see
TAP-103.
Table 101-H. Ethernet LED indications

LED
Indication
ETH Link Green LED

Not Lit
Description
Probable cause
Loss of Ethernet 1. Cable between link

communication
partner and Ethernet
with link partner.
port is disconnected/
broken.
Corrective action
Connect/repair cable.
2. Speed/Mode
1. Check local Ethernet
provisioning mismatch
provisioning screen.
between link partner and 2. Check link partner
Ethernet port.
provisioning.
3-52
IXL-101
3EM23956AM
Table 101-I. MPT-HL transceiver LED alarm indications

LED
Indication
Probable cause
Corrective action
Status
OFF
Provision card
Not Powered
Verify MPT-HL Transceiver fuse is not

blown or missing.
Verify Power cable is properly
Invalid Configuration
Verify configuration provisioning and

correct as required.
Green
Blinking
Configuration Downloading, or SW
Booting. (Different blink rates should
be used to identify each step of the
startup process.)

Green

Provisioned. EPS or RPS currently In- Action required.
Service/Active.
Yellow

Provisioned. EPS and RPS currently
in Standby.
Green/Red
Blinking

Provisioned. Either TX or RX
equipment or signal Fault. EPS or
RPS currently In-Service/Active.
Traffic is probable affected.

Standby MPT-HL Transceiver.
No Action required.
Equipment problem at either near end 1. Check alarms.

or far end:
2. Check abnormal conditions.
3. Check protection schemes.
Path related problem:
1. Check RSL levels

2. Check equipment alarms.
3. Verify no weather related issue.
PA switch at the far end is set to OFF 1. Verify PA switch position at far end
0 position:
and set to ON 1 position.
Yellow/Red
Blinking

Provisioned, TX or RX signal Fault,
EPS and RPS currently in Standby.
Traffic maybe affected:
Equipment problem at either near end 1. Check alarms.
or far end:
2. Check abnormal conditions.
3. Check protection schemes.
Path related problem:
1. Check RSL levels

2. Check equipment alarms.
3. Verify no weather related issue.
3-53
IXL-101
3EM23956AM
Table 101-I. MPT-HL transceiver LED alarm indications (cont.)

LED
Indication
Probable cause
Corrective action
Status
(cont.)
Red
Card Fail
Replace MPT-HL Transceiver
Red Blinking MAP Communication Time-out:

Communication between the MPT-HL
Transceiver and the P8ETH cards is
lost.
Power
Green LED
Emission ON
MPT-HL Transceiver is emitting

power as expected according to the
known configuration.
Green LED
Blinking
MPT-HL Transceiver is not emitting

power due to a forced squelch
condition.
Most probable causes:
Green LED
OFF
Check alarms for Internal

Communication
Problem, if present, see
TAP-107.
No Action required
1. TX mute active
Release TX mute
2. PA switch is positioned Off
Position PA switch to On position
MPT-HL Transceiver is not emitting

power for reasons other than forced
squelch.
1. Transmit Protection Switch (TPS) Verify MPT-HL Transceiver should be
is currently in standby state.
in standby state.
2. Software booting or FPGA
download in progress
Wait for software booting or FPGA

download to complete
Table 101-J. TMN network troubleshooting

Problem
Possible Cause
Possible Solution
Unusually slow
communication in radio
network
1. Normal network management

traffic is saturating the
communications channel.
2. Polling radios for PM data or
missed alarms too rapidly
3. Multiple remote software
downloads in process
4. IP traffic other than network
management traffic being routed
through radio network
1. There may be too many radios

being managed within a single
region. Split the radio network
management into different regions
and backhaul the traffic for each
region through separate channels.
2. Poll the radios more slowly.
3. Download to fewer radios at a
time.
4. Configure external routers to allow
only network management related
traffic through the Management
network of the radios. Dynamic
route updates (OSPF, RIP) may
attempt to reroute high speed
traffic through the TMN network if
a high speed ink fails.
3-54
IXL-101
3EM23956AM
Table 101-J. TMN network troubleshooting (cont.)

Problem
Possible Cause
Possible Solution
Unable to operate
controls using SNMP
To perform control operations, the

Register the Manager as a craft
Manager must be registered as a craft device. Manager registration type can
device.
be changed as needed to type ct to
allow control operation and then be
changed back to nml for normal
operation.
Can Read SNMP

1. Incorrect community string
1. Use the correct community string.
objects but cannot Write 2. If the TMN Interface is configured 2. Use the correct write community
to SNMP objects
for SNMPv2, the write community
string.
string is probably wrong.
No traps being received 1. Manager not registered in NE to 1. Register Manager with NE.
from NE
receive traps
2. Check network connectivity.
2. Communication failure in network
Check redundant network paths
3. Traps are blocked by firewall
and routing. Traceroute (tracert) is
useful for locating path or routing
faults.
3. Check firewall provisioning to
allow trap UDP ports.
Unable to communicate 1. Possible communication path
1. Use traceroute (tracert) to help
with the NE through the
failure or routing failure within the
locate for communication path or
radio network (unable to
radio network.
routing problems.
ping the NE).
2. Incorrect IP address on the PC.
2. Verify PC IP address, subnet, and
default route.
Can ping the TMN
1. If using SNMPv2, using the wrong 1. Verify community string,
Interface but cannot
community string, username, or
username, and passphrase.
communicate with the
passphrase.
2. Verify Manager registration with
NE using SNMP, or can 2. Manager not registered or
the NE and register or correct
only see a few SNMP
properly registered with the NE.
registration.
objects in the NE.
The objects visible to an
unregistered manager are
generally: the 'system' MIB, a few
objects under
'tsdimSnmpNEMibObject', the
'opticsIMMgrPollingInfoTable', the
'snmpUsmMib', and
'snmpVacmMib' objects.
3-55
3EM23956AM
3-56
IXL-101
IXL-102
3EM23956AM
IXL-102 Support procedures
IXL-102
Support procedures
Table 102-A lists the support procedures that are needed to perform maintenance and trouble
clearing on the system.
For more information about operation and administration, see the 9500 MPR-A Operation and
Administration Manual (PN 3EM23954AM).
Table 102-A. Support procedures
Support procedure
See
Alarm and event reports, Retrieve
Operation and Administration

manual
Clean fiber-optic connectors
DLP-112
Clock reference and operation mode selections

manual
Log into system

manual
Loopback (Core Facing)

manual
Manage cross-connections

manual
MIB Database Management (Backup and Restore)

manual
Password change

manual
Performance monitoring

manual
Protection switching controls

manual
Provision equipment

manual
Provision or edit ports

manual
RTL-100
Protection upgrade and downgrade procedures
DLP-117
Software package rollback
DLP-127
System power down and power up
DLP-113
Upgrade and downgrade radio profile
DLP-118
Upgrade unlicensed MPT-HL radio to lower 6 GHz radio
DLP-119
Support procedures
4-57
IXL-102
3EM23956AM
Table 102-A. Support procedures (cont.)

Upgrade MPT ODU to MPT ODU L1 LAG port
DLP-123
Upgrade MPT-HL to MPT-HL L1 LAG port
DLP-124
4-58
Support procedures
IXL-103
3EM23956AM
IXL-103 Equipment replacement procedures
IXL-103
Table 103-A lists where to find the detailed level procedure (DLP) for replacing or adding each
9500 MPR-A replaceable unit.
Table 103-A. Equipment replacement procedures
Equipment
See
+24/-48 volt converter replacement
DLP-120
Auxiliary (AUX) replacement
DLP-116
Core switching module (Core-E) replacement
DLP-103
Core switching module (Core-E) flash card replacement
DLP-104
Ethernet access switch (P8ETH) replacement
DLP-105
Mechanical card removal and installation
DLP-100
MSS-1 shelf replacement
DLP-128
MSS-4/8 shelf FAN replacement
DLP-106
MPT-HL transceiver air filter replacement
DLP-101
MPT-HL transceiver replacement
DLP-108
ODU300 replacement
DLP-109
MOD300 (radio modem) replacement
DLP-107
MPTACC (MPT Access) replacement
DLP-114
MPT ODU replacement (MPT-HC, MPT-XP, 9558HC)
DLP-115
MPT Power Unit replacement
DLP-125
P2E3DS3 (2-Port DS3) replacement
DLP-110
DLP-111
Power injector replacement
DLP-121
RPS/XPIC module replacement
DLP-122
SDHACC (2-Port OC-3) Replacement
DLP-126
SFP replacement
DLP-102
5-59
3EM23956AM
5-60
IXL-103
IXL-104
3EM23956AM
IXL-104 Supporting information
IXL-104
Table 104-A lists the supporting information that is required to perform maintenance and trouble
clearing on the system. The following references are used:
For information about operation and administration, see the 9500 MPR-A
Operation and Administration Manual (PN 3EM23954AM).
See the 9500 MPR-A Product Information (PN 3EM23952AM) to determine card
location and type.
Table 104-A. Supporting information
See
Alarm condition types
Operation and Administration manual
Card locations
Product Information Manual
Product support information
Introduction
Electrostatic-sensitive devices
Introduction
How to use TOP documentation
Introduction
Laser precautions
Introduction
Maintenance philosophy
Introduction
Operations support system
Safety awareness
Introduction
Security/user authorization
6-61
3EM23956AM
6-62
IXL-104
RTL-100
3EM23956AM
Routine Task Lists (RTLs)

RTL-100 Preventive maintenance procedures
RTL-100
There are no preventive maintenance procedures associated with 9500 MPR-A, R4.2.0.
Table 100-A lists the preventive maintenance procedure and the corresponding reference. The
frequency that is listed is recommended. Local conditions may require maintenance procedures be
performed more or less frequently.
Table 100-A. Preventive maintenance procedures
Activity
Frequency
See
Every 6 months
DLP-101
7-1
3EM23956AM
7-2
RTL-100
TAP-100
3EM23956AM
Trouble Analysis Procedures (TAPs)

TAP-100 Facility alarms
TAP-100
Facility alarms
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear Facility alarms.
General
An AIS (on DS1/3-in) is an alarm indication signal on one or more DS1 or DS3 input signals incoming
to the NE on the P32E1DS1, P2E3DS3 cards, or MSS-1 shelf. The problem is associated with the DS1
or DS3 input signal to the P32E1DS1, P2E3DS3 cards, or MSS-1 shelf.
An AIS (on DS1/3-out) is alarm indication signal (AIS) detected by the receive circuit from the radio
link on one or more of the DS1 or DS3 lines, indicating an upstream failure.
An AIS (on Ele/OptSDH-in) is an alarm indication signal on one or more OC-3 input signals incoming
to the NE on the SDHACC card. The problem is associated with the OC-3 input signal to the
SDHACC card.
An AIS (on Ele/OptSDH-out) is alarm indication signal (AIS) detected by the receive circuit from the
radio link on one or more of the OC-3 lines, indicating an upstream failure.
A High BER (on Ele/OptSDH-in) alarm indicates that Bit Error Rate threshold of 10E-5 has been
exceeded on receiver input circuits from the client to the SDHACC card.
A High BER (on Ele/OptSDH-out) alarm indicates that Bit Error Rate threshold of 10E-5 has been
exceeded on transmit output circuits to the client from the SDHACC card.
A Loss Of CESoETH Frame (CircuitTDM) indicates packets are not being received by the emulation
circuits from the switch matrix.
A Loss Of Frame (DS1/3-in) indicates no DS1 or DS3 frame is detected on the input from the client
to the P32E1DS1, P2E3DS3 cards, or MSS-1 shelf.
A Loss Of Frame (DS1/3-out) indicates no DS1, DS3 frame is detected on a DS1 or DS3 facility from
the switch matrix.
A Loss Of Signal (DS1/3-in) indicates no DS1 or DS3 signal detected on the input on the P32E1DS1,
P2E3DS3 cards, or MSS-1 shelf.
A Remote Defect Indication in a received OC-3 facility. Alarm is reported when an RDI is received
on a given OC-3 from the remote end of OC-3 facility.
A Trace Identifier Mismatch indicates a J0 byte value received on the OC-3 facility is different than
the provisioned expected value for the OC-3 facility.
See the 9500 MPR-A Product Information (PN 3EM23952AM) to determine card location and
address.
Facility alarms
8-1
TAP-100
3EM23956AM
See the 9500 MPR-A Operation and Administration (PN 3EM23954AM) for information about how
to execute the commands that are described in this procedure.
STEP
PROCEDURE
Using the Alarm Monitor, retrieve all alarms.
Review the output. See Table 100-A for information about facility alarms.
Table 100-A. Facility alarms
Probable cause
Facility type
See
AIS
DS1-in/MSS/DS1/Port#[1-16]
DS1 (MSS/DS1)
Step 3
DS1 (P32E1DS1)
DS3
DS1-out/MSS/DS1/Port#[1-16]
DS1 (MSS/DS1)
DS1-out/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-32]
DS1 (P32E1DS1)
DS3
EleSdh-in/slot#[3-8]/Port[1-2]
OC-3
Step 10
OC-3
Step 14
OC-3
Step 17
OC-3
Step 21
DS1 (MSS/DS1)
Step 24
AIS
AIS
Step 7
AIS
EleSdh-out/slot#[3-8]/Port[1-2]
OptSdh-out/slot#[3-8]/Port[1-2]
High BER
High BER
Port[1-2]
Port[1-2]
Loss Of CESoETH frame CircuitTDM/MSS/DS1/Port#[1-16]
Loss Of Frame
Loss of frame
Loss of frame
CircuitTDM/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-32]
DS1 (P32E1DS1)
DS3
OC-3
DS1 (MSS/DS1)
DS1 (P32E1DS1)
DS3
DS1-out/MSS/DS1/Port#[1-16]
DS1 (MSS/DS1)
DS1 (P32E1DS1)
DS3
OC-3
Step 77
Step 108
Step 77
8-2
Facility alarms
TAP-100
3EM23956AM
Table 100-A. Facility alarms (cont.)

Loss of frame
EleSdh-out/slot#[3-8]/Port[1-2]
OC-3OC-3
Step 108
DS1 (MSS/DS1)
Step 155
DS1 (P32E1DS1)
DS3
OC-3
Step 155
OC-3
Step 178
OC-3
Step 182
IXL-101
OptSdh-out/slot#[3-8]/Port[1-2]
Loss of signal
Loss of signal
Remote defect indication EleSdh-in/slot#[3-8]/Port[1-2]
Trace identifier mismatch EleSdh-in/slot#[3-8]/Port[1-2]
None of the above
AIS
On DS1/3-in on DS1 or DS3 facility
3
Troubleshoot the source of input that is associated with the DS1 or DS3 input signal
to the P32E1DS1, P2E3DS3 cards, or MSS-1 shelf.
Verify the cabling that is associated with the input DS1 or DS3 signal to the
P32E1DS1, P2E3DS3 cards, or MSS-1 shelf.
Retrieve the alarms using the Alarm Monitor.
Did AIS (on DS1/3-in) alarm clear?

If yes, go to step 190.
If no, go to step 189.
AIS
On DS1/3-out on DS1 or DS3 facility
7
Troubleshoot the upstream source of the incoming DS1 or DS3.
Did the AIS (on DS1/3-out) alarm clear?

Facility alarms
8-3
TAP-100
3EM23956AM
AIS
On EleSdh/EleSDH-in on OC-3 facility
10
Troubleshoot the source of input that is associated with the OC-3 input signal to the
SDHACC card.
11
Verify the cabling that is associated with the input OC-3 signal to the SDHACC card.
12
13
Did AIS (on EleSdh/OptSdh-in) alarm clear?

AIS
On EleSdh/EleSDH-out on OC-3 facility
14
Troubleshoot the upstream source of the incoming OC-3.
15
16
Did the AIS (on EleSdh/OptSdh-out) alarm clear?

High BER
On EleSdh/EleSDH-in on OC-3 facility
17
Troubleshoot the source of input that is associated with the OC-3 input signal to the
SDHACC card from the demarcation panel.
18
Verify the cabling that is associated with the input OC-3 signal to the SDHACC card.
19
20
Did High BER (on EleSdh/OptSdh-in) alarm clear?

8-4
Facility alarms
TAP-100
3EM23956AM
High BER
On EleSdh/EleSDH-out on OC-3 facility
21
Troubleshoot the upstream source of the incoming OC-3.
22
23
Did the High BER (on EleSdh/OptSdh-out) alarm clear?

Loss Of CESoETH frame

on DS1, DS3, or OC-3 facility
24
Verify that there are no current path or circuit alarms associated with the facility in
alarm for the near end, the far end, and all intermediate NEs.
25
Verify that the radio path PM is not taking errors to traffic.
26
Are there path or circuit alarms, or path PM errors at near end or far end NE?
If yes, clear the path or circuit alarms, or path PM errors, then go to
step 27.
27
28
Did the Loss Of CESoETH Frame alarm clear?

29
30
Verify the circuit provisioning for near end, the far end, and all intermediate NEs:
a.
Verify the Signal Mode is set the same and is correct.
b.
Verify the Line Coding is set the same and is correct.
c.
Verify the Flow ID is set the same and is correct.
d.
Verify the Service Profile is set the same and is correct.
Is the Service Profile TDM2ETH?

Facility alarms
8-5
TAP-100
3EM23956AM
31
Verify the TDM2ETH provisioning for the near end, far end, and all intermediate NEs:
a.
Verify the Payload Size is set the same and is correct.
b.
Verify the TDM Clock Source is set the same and is correct.
c.
Verify the near end ECID Tx and far end ECID Rx are set the same and are
correct.
d.
Verify the far end ECID Tx and near end ECID Rx are set the same and are
correct.
32
Verify the cross-connection provisioning for the near end, far end, and all intermediate
NEs:
33
34

35
Is the facility associated with a LAG?

36
Verify that there are no active LAG alarms at all NEs in the LAG associated with the
facility in alarm.
37
38

39
Is the facility associated with an ERP (Ring)?

40
Verify that there are no active RING alarms at all NEs in the ring associated with the
facility in alarm.
41
8-6
Facility alarms
TAP-100
42
3EM23956AM

43
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. The following steps cause a loss of

traffic on ALL facilities supported by the card or MSS-1 shelf, associated with the
facility in alarm. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local practices and
procedures.
Is it appropriate to proceed with Loss Of CESoETH Frame procedure?
44
Is the facility protected?

45
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Reseating card in an unprotected

facility cause a loss of traffic on ALL facilities that are associated with the card
being reseated. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local practices and
procedures.
46
For the P32E1DS1 or P2E3DS3 cards, reseat the card at near end. Physically remove
the card and reinsert.
For the MSS-1 shelf, locate the fuses protecting the A and B battery feeds to the near
end MSS-1 shelf and remove. Wait ten seconds. Then install the fuses protecting the
A and B battery feeds.
47
48

49
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing card in an unprotected

being replaced. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local practices and
procedures.
Which card reported the Loss Of CESoETH Frame alarm?
If MSS-1 shelf, see DLP-128 to replace near end MSS-1 shelf.
If P32E1DS1, see DLP-111 to replace near end P32E1DS1 card.
Facility alarms
8-7
TAP-100
3EM23956AM

If SDHACC, see DLP-126 to replace near end SDHACC card.
50
51

52

procedures.
53
For the P32E1DS1 or P2E3DS3 cards, reseat the card at far end. Physically remove
For the MSS-1 shelf, locate the fuses protecting the A and B battery feeds to the far
54
55

56

procedures.
Which card reported the Loss Of CESoETH Frame alarm?
If MSS-1 shelf, see DLP-128 to replace far end MSS-1 shelf.
If P32E1DS1, see DLP-111 to replace far end P32E1DS1 card.
If SDHACC, see DLP-126 to replace far end SDHACC card.
57
58

8-8
Facility alarms
TAP-100
3EM23956AM
59
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Forced/Lockout switching traffic

causes a disruption to traffic.
60
Is the DS1/DS3/OC-3 facility in alarm associated with the main or spare?

If main, perform Forced EPS Switch at near end using Craft Terminal.
If spare, perform Lockout EPS Switch at near end using Craft Terminal.
61
Reseat the card in alarm at the near end. Physically remove the card and reinsert.
62
63

64
Which card reported the Loss Of CESoETH Frame?

65
66
Did the Loss Of CESoETH Frame condition clear?

67

Is the card in alarm the main or spare?
If main, perform Forced EPS Switch at far end using Craft Terminal.
If spare, perform Lockout EPS Switch at far end using Craft Terminal.
68
Reseat the card in alarm at the far end. Physically remove the card and reinsert.
69
70

Facility alarms
8-9
TAP-100
3EM23956AM
71
Which card reported the Loss Of CESoETH Frame?

72
73
Did the Loss Of CESoETH Frame condition clear?

74
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Releasing Forced/Lockout switch may

cause a disruption to traffic.
Release Forced/Lockout EPS Switch at far end using Craft Terminal.
75

Release Forced/Lockout EPS Switch at near end using Craft Terminal.
76
Go to step 190.
Loss Of Frame
On DS1/3-in on DS1 or DS3 or Ele/OptSdh-in on OC-3 facility
77
Verify that there are no active circuit alarms associated with the facility in alarm at
the near end and client end NE of the facility.
78
Are there active circuit alarms at the near end or client end of the facility?
If yes, clear circuit alarms, then go to step 79.
79
80
Did the Loss Of Frame alarm the clear?

8-10
Facility alarms
TAP-100
81
3EM23956AM
Verify the circuit provisioning for both the near end and client end of the facility in
alarm:
a.
Verify that the Signal Mode is set the same and is correct.
b.
Verify that the Line Coding is set the same and is correct.
c.
Verify that the Flow ID is set the same and is correct.
d.
Verify that the Service Profile is set the same and is correct.
e.
Verify that the LBO setting is correct for the installation.
82
83
Did the Loss Of Frame alarm clear?

84
Verify that the Source Signal is error-free with a test set configured to match the
provisioning of the facility.
85
86

87
Verify the cabling:

a.
Verify that the cabling from the customer interconnect to the patch panel or card
as appropriate. Confirm that the connectors are correctly seated and secured.
b.
Verify that the cabling from the patch panel to the module if appropriate. Confirm
that the connectors are correctly seated and secured.
88
89

Facility alarms
8-11
TAP-100
3EM23956AM
90

traffic on ALL facilities that are supported by the card or MSS-1 shelf, associated
with the facility in alarm. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local
practices and procedures.
Is it appropriate to proceed with Loss Of Frame procedure?
91

92

facility causes a loss of traffic on ALL facilities that are associated with the card
procedures.
93
94
95

96
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing card or MSS-1 shelf in an

unprotected facility causes a loss of traffic on ALL facilities that are associated with
the card or MSS-1 shelf being replaced. Schedule appropriate maintenance window
per local practices and procedures.
Which card reported the Loss Of Frame alarm?
97
8-12
Facility alarms
TAP-100
98
3EM23956AM

99

Is the DS1/DS3/OC-3 facility in alarm associated with the main or spare?
100
Reseat the card in alarm at near end. Physically remove card and reinsert.
101
102

103
Which card reported the Loss Of Frame?

104
105
Did the Loss Of Frame condition clear?

106

107
Go to step 190.
Loss of frame
On DS1/3-out on DS1 or DS3 or Ele/OptSdh-out on OC-3 facility
108
Facility alarms
Check the far end facility for Loss of Frame (DS1/3-in, Ele/OptSdh-in) that is
associated with the facility in alarm.
8-13
TAP-100
3EM23956AM
109
110

111
Verify that there are no active path or circuit alarms associated with the facility in
alarm for the near end or far end NE.
112
Verify that the radio path PM is not taking errors to traffic.
113
Are the path or circuit alarms, or path PM errors existing at the near end or far end
NE?
If yes, clear path or circuit alarms or path PM errors, then go to
step 114.
114
115

116
117
Check the circuit provisioning for the near end and far end facility in alarm and that
they are correct, as required:
a.
Verify that the Signal Mode is set the same and is correct.
b.
Verify that the Line Coding is set the same and is correct.
c.
d.
Verify that the Service Profile is set the same and is correct.
Is the Service Profile TDM2ETH?

8-14
Facility alarms
TAP-100
118
3EM23956AM
Check the TDM2ETH provisioning for the near end and far end facility in alarm and
that it is correct, as required:
a.
Verify that the Payload Size is set the same and is correct.
b.
Verify that the TDM Clock Source is set the same and is correct.
c.
Verify that the near end ECID Tx and far end ECID Rx are set the same and are
correct.
d.
Verify that the far end ECID Tx and near end ECID Rx are set the same and are
correct.
119
120

121
Check the cross-connection provisioning at near end, far end, and all intermediated
NEs that are associated with the facility in alarm are correct, as required:
a.
b.
Verify that the MAC address is set the same and is correct.
c.
Verify that the TDM profile is set correct
d.
Verify that the TDM Clock Source is set correct.
122
123

124

traffic on ALL facilities supported by the card or MSS-1 shelf, associated with the
facility in alarm. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local practices and
procedures.
Is it appropriate to proceed with Loss Of Frame procedure?
Facility alarms
8-15
TAP-100
3EM23956AM
125

126

facility cause a loss of traffic on ALL facilities that are associated with the card or
MSS-1 shelf being reseated. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local
127
128

129

procedures.
Which card reported the Loss Of Frame alarm?
130
131

8-16
Facility alarms
TAP-100
132
3EM23956AM

procedures.
For the P32E1DS1 or P2E3DS3 cards, reseat the card at far end. Physically remove
For the MSS-1 shelf, locate the fuses protecting the A and B battery feeds to the far
133
134

135

procedures.
Which card reporting Loss Of Frame alarm?
If MSS-1 shelf, see DLP-128 to replace far end MSS-1 shelf.
136
137

138

Is DS1/DS3/OC-3 facility in alarm associated with main or spare?
139
Reseat card in alarm at near end. Physically remove card and reinsert.
140
Facility alarms
8-17
TAP-100
3EM23956AM
141

142
Which card reporting Loss Of Frame?

143
144

145

Is card in alarm main or spare?
If main, perform Forced EPS Switch at far end using Craft Terminal.
If spare, perform Lockout EPS Switch at far end using Craft Terminal.
146
Reseat the card in alarm at the far end. Physically remove the card and reinsert.
147
148

149
Which card reporting Loss Of Frame?

150
151

8-18
Facility alarms
TAP-100
152
3EM23956AM

Release Forced/Lockout EPS Switch at far end using Craft Terminal.
153

154
Go to step 190.
Loss of signal
DS1/3-in on DS1, DS3, or OC-3 facility
155
Troubleshoot source of input to MSS-1 shelf, P32E1DS1, P2E3DS3, or SDHACC card.
156
Verify cabling associated with the input signal to the MSS-1 shelf, P32E1DS1,
P2E3DS3, or SDHACC card.
157
Retrieve alarms using craft terminal.
158
Did the Loss Of Signal alarm clear?

159
Retrieve alarms using craft terminal. Determine if Loss Of Signal alarm is declared
against ALL facilities associated with the MSS-1 shelf, P32E1DS1, P2E3DS3, or
SDHACC card.
160
Are ALL facilities associated with the MSS-1 shelf, P32E1DS1, P2E3DS3, or SDHACC
card declaring Loss Of Signal?
161

Facility alarms
8-19
TAP-100
3EM23956AM
162

procedures.
Reseat the card that declares the Loss Of Signal alarm. Physically remove the card
and reinsert.
163
164
Did declaring Loss Of Signal alarm clear?

165

procedures.
Which card reported the Loss Of Signal alarm?
166
167

168
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Forced EPS switching traffic causes a

disruption to traffic.
169
Verify that the card in alarm status is Standby.
170
Reseat the card that declared the Loss Of Signal alarm. Physically remove the card
and reinsert.
171
8-20
Facility alarms
TAP-100
172
3EM23956AM
Did the declaring Loss Of Signal alarm clear?

173
Which card reported the Loss Of Signal alarm?

174
175

176
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Releasing EPS switch may cause a

177
Go to step 190.
Remote defect indication

178
Retrieve the alarms for the far end of the OC-3 facility using the Alarm Monitor.
179
Determine all of the facility alarms that are declared against the far end OC-3 facility
associated with the OC-3 facility declaring the Remote Defect Indication (RDI) and
180
181
Did the RDI alarm clear?

Facility alarms
8-21
TAP-100
3EM23956AM
Trace identifier mismatch

182
Using the Craft Terminal, retrieve the provisioned Trace Identifier values for the
alarmed OC-3 facility.
Note: The section trace identifier (J0) value is not generated within the 9500 MPR-A
network. The received J0 value is verified against the provisioned expected value. To
determine the provisioned J0 value the operator must query the originating OC-3
equipment.
183
Determine the origination of the OC-3 facility and retrieve the provisioned Trace
Identifier parameters.
184
Verify the desired Trace Identifier parameters of the OC-3 facility.
185
Determine which Trace Identifier parameters are incorrect.
186
Provision the Trace Identifier parameters according to the results of step 185.
187
188
Did the Trace Identifier Mismatch alarm clear?

189
Contact the next level of technical support for assistance.
190
STOP. This procedure is complete.
8-22
Facility alarms
TAP-101
3EM23956AM
TAP-101 Abnormal conditions
TAP-101
Abnormal conditions
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear a protection switch (Forced and Lockout),
loopback, Forced Adaptive Modulation, and TxMute abnormal conditions on Core-E, MOD300,
MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU), MPT-HL ODU300, P2E3DS3, P32E1DS1, SDHACC cards
or MSS-1 shelf.
General
A Core Facing PDH Loopback indicates that PDH (DS1 or DS3) entity has a loopback activated at
the near end.
A Digital Core Facing Loopback indicates that the entity has a loopback activated at the near end.
A Forced Adaptive Modulation indicates that a manual Forced Adaptive Modulation command has
been issued.
A Forced Switch EPS/RPS/TPS indicates that a forced switch has been executed for the protection
group.
An IF Cable Loopback indicates that the MOD300/ODU300 has a loopback activated at the near end.
A Line Facing Circuit Loopback indicates that the entity has a loopback activated at the near end.
A Line Facing PDH Loopback indicates that PDH (DS1 or DS3) entity has a line facing loopback
activated at the near end.
A Lockout Switch EPS/RPS/TPS indicates that a lockout switch has been executed for the protection
group.
TxMute indicates that a manual or automatic mute command has been executed.
address.
STEP
PROCEDURE
Using the Craft Terminal, retrieve abnormal conditions.
Review the output. See Table 101-A for information about abnormal conditions.
Abnormal conditions
8-23
TAP-101
3EM23956AM
Table 101-A. Abnormal conditions

Operation
Name
Type (equipment)
See
Core facing PDH

loopback
Loopback
MSS/DS1
Step 3
Loopback
SLOT#[3-8]

Digital core facing
loopback
Forced adaptive
modulation
Direction #1.[1-6]
Loopback
Step 7
(MPT ODU connected to
Core-E, MSS/CORE)
Loopback
MPTACC)
Loopback
P8ETH)
Loopback
(MPT-HL)
Direction #[3-8]
Radio
(MOD300)
Direction #1.[1-6]
Radio
Core-E, MSS/CORE)
Radio
MPTACC)
Radio
P8ETH)
Step 11
Direction #[3-8].[5-8] - Channel #[0-1] Radio

(MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH)
Direction #1.[5-6]
8-24
Radio
(MPT-HL connected to
Core-E, MSS/CORE)
Abnormal conditions
TAP-101
3EM23956AM

Operation
Name
Type (equipment)
See
Forced switch EPS
Main#1 Slot#1
(Core-E)
Step 15
Main#1 Slot#[3,5,7]
(MOD300, P2E3DS3,
P32E1DS1, SDHAC)
Main#1 Slot #[3-8] Port #[1-4]
MPT ODU connected to

MPTACC
Main#1 Slot #1 Port #[1,3,5]

Core-E
Main#1 MSS/CORE Port #[1,3,5]

MSS/CORE
Main#1 Slot #[3,5,7] Port #[5-8]
MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH

MPTACC

Core-E

MSS/CORE
Main#1 Slot #[3,5,7] Port #[5-8]
MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
Main#1 Slot#[3,5,7]
MOD300

MPTACC

Core-E

MSS/CORE
Main#1 Slot #[3,5,7] Port #[5-8]
MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
Main#1 Slot#[3,5,7]
MOD300
IF cable loopback
Direction #[3-8]
MOD300
Line facing circuit

loopback
Direction #1.[1-6]
Loopback
Step 24
Core-E, MSS/CORE)
Loopback
MPTACC)
Loopback
P8ETH)
Forced switch RPS
Forced switch TPS
Abnormal conditions
Step 15
Step 15
Step 20
8-25
TAP-101
3EM23956AM

Operation
Name
Type (equipment)
See
Line facing PDH

loopback
Loopback
MSS/DS1]
Step 28

Loopback
SLOT#[3-8]
Spare#0 Slot#2
Core-E
MOD30, P2E3DS3,
P32E1DS1, SDHACC
Spare#0 Slot#[3-8] Port #[1-4]

MPTACC
Spare#0 Slot #1 Port #[2,4,6]

Core-E
Spare#0 MSS/CORE Port #[2,4,6]

MSS/CORE
Spare#0 Slot #[4,6,8] Port #[5-8]
MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
Spare#0 Slot#[3-8] Port #[1-4]

MPTACC

Core-E

MSS/CORE
Spare#0 Slot #[4,6,8] Port #[5-8]
MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
MOD300
Spare#0 Slot #[3-8] Port #[1-4]

MPTACC

Core-E

MSS/CORE
Spare#0 Slot #[4,6,8] Port #[5-8]
MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
MOD300
Lockout switch EPS
Lockout switch RPS
Lockout switch TPS
8-26
Step 32
Step 32
Step 32
Abnormal conditions
TAP-101
3EM23956AM

Operation
Name
Type (equipment)
See
TXMute
Direction #1.[1-6] - Channel #[0-1]

Core-E, MSS/CORE
Step 36
Direction #[3-8].[1-4] - Channel #[0-1] MPT ODU connected to

MPTACC
Direction #[3-8].[5-8] - Channel #1

P8ETH
Direction #[3-8].[5-8] - Channel #[0-1] MPT-HL connected to

P8ETH
None of the above
Direction #1.[5-6] - Channel #1
MPT-HL connected to
Core-E, MSS/CORE
Direction #[3-8] - Channel #[0-1]
ODU300
IXL-101
Core facing PDH loopback

3
Ready to release the Core Facing PDH Loopback?

Using the Craft Terminal, release the loopback.
Retrieve the Abnormal Condition List using the Craft Terminal.
Did the Core Facing PDH Loopback condition clear?

Digital core facing loopback

7
Ready to release the Digital Core Facing Loopback?

10
Did the Digital Core Facing Loopback condition clear?

Abnormal conditions
8-27
TAP-101
3EM23956AM
Forced adaptive modulation

11
Ready for the Forced Adaptive Modulation to be released?

12
Using the Craft Terminal, release the Forced Adaptive Modulation.
13
14
Did the Forced Adaptive Modulation condition clear?

Forced switch
EPS, RPS, and TPS
15
Ready to release the Forced Switch EPS/RPS/TPS?

16
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Releasing a Forced Switch causes a

17
Using the Craft Terminal, release Forced Switch EPS/RPS/TPS.
18
19
Did the Forced Switch EPS/RPS/TPS condition clear?

IF cable loopback
20
Ready to release the IF Cable Loopback?

21
22
8-28
Abnormal conditions
TAP-101
23
3EM23956AM
Did the IF Cable Loopback condition clear?

Line facing circuit loopback

24
Ready to release the loopback?

25
26
27
Did the Line Facing Circuit Loopback condition clear?

Line facing PDH loopback

28
Ready to release the Line Facing PDH Loopback?

29
30
31
Did the Line Facing PDH Loopback condition clear?

Lockout switch
EPS, RPS, and TPS
32
Ready to release the Lockout Switch EPS/RPS/TPS?

33
Using the Craft Terminal, release the lockout switch.
34
Abnormal conditions
8-29
TAP-101
3EM23956AM
35
Did the Lockout Switch EPS/RPS/TPS condition clear?

TXMute
36
Ready for the TxMute to be released?

37
Using the Craft Terminal, release the TxMute.
38
39
Did the TxMute condition clear?

40
41
8-30
Abnormal conditions
TAP-102
3EM23956AM
TAP-102 Power alarms
TAP-102
Power alarms
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear power alarms that are associated with the
MSS-1/MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf, MPTACC card, and MSS-1 Core.
General
A Battery Failure alarm indicates that the A battery feed has failed or is missing, when battery
protection is available.
A Power Supply Failure alarm indicates one or more of the following:
hardware failure:
on the MPTACC card supplying power to an MPT-HC/9558HC (MPT-ODU)
on the MSS-1 Core Ethernet ports 1 and 2, supplying power to an MPT-ODU
bad cable, or an improperly terminated cable between:
the MPTACC and MPT-ODU
the MSS-1 Core and MPT-ODU
A Secondary Battery Failure alarm indicates that either the B battery feed has failed or is missing,
when battery protection is available.
The supported voltage range of the MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf is -40.8 VDC to -57.6 VDC.
The MPTACC card provides power to the MPT ODU using the PFoE supported RJ45 or QMA coaxial
connectors.
The MSS-1 Core provides power to the MPT ODU using the two PFoE supported RJ45 connectors.
address.
See the 9500 MPR-A Operation and Administration (PN 3EM23954AM) for the procedures about
how to execute the commands that are described in this procedure.
STEP
PROCEDURE
Review the output. See Table 102-A for information about the power alarms.
Power alarms
8-31
TAP-102
3EM23956AM
Table 102-A. Power Alarms

Probable cause
Equipment type
See
Battery failure
r01/subrack#1
MSS-1/4/8
Step 3
Power supply failure
r01/subrack#[3-8][1-4]
MPTACC
Step 14
r01/subrack#[1][1-2]
MSS/Core
Secondary battery failure
r01/subrack#1
MSS-1/4/8
Step 72
None of the above
IXL-101
Battery failure
3
Verify that there is no blown fuse providing power to the A-power feed.
Verify the shelf power cable connections between the MSS-1/4/8 and the PDU.
Verify the A-power connections between the BDFB and PDU.
Verify the A-power BDFB breakers are in the ON position.
Did the Battery Failure clear?

9
10
Measure the voltage of the A-power feed.

Is the measured voltage within the supported voltage range (MSS-4/8: -40.8 VDC to 57.6 VDC, MSS-1: -24.0 VDC to -48.0 VDC)?
11
Troubleshoot the A-power feed voltage problem.
12
13
Did Battery Failure condition clear?

8-32
Power alarms
TAP-102
3EM23956AM
Power supply failure

14
Inspect the power supply cable connection for radio port in alarm:
For MPTACC, verify RJ45 connector for PFoE port or Coax connector for QMA port.
For MSS-1 CORE, verify RJ45 connector for PFoE port.
15
Is the power supply cable damaged or improperly connected?

16
Terminate, repair, or replace power supply cable as required.
17
18
Did the Power Supply Failure alarm clear?

19
Which card is Power Supply Failure alarm declared?

If MPTACC, go to step 20.
If MSS-1 CORE, go to step 44.
20
Determine the MPTACC configuration.

a.
Does the MPTACC support one or two radio channels?
b.
Are the radio channels protected?
c.
Is protection available for both radio channels?
21
Verify the radio protection is available for all traffic that is supported by the MPTACC
to reseat/replace or appropriate maintenance window is scheduled per local practices
and procedures.
22
Is it appropriate to proceed with MPTACC Power Supply Failure procedure?

23
Is the MPTACC in alarm in a protected system?

Power alarms
8-33
TAP-102
3EM23956AM
24
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Removing an in-service card in an

unprotected link causes loss of traffic. Removing an in-service card in a protected
link requires switching the traffic onto the protected channel.
25
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. In redundant MPTACC protected radio

configurations, the Main MPTACC card(s) resides in slots 3, 5, and/or 7. The spare
MPTACC cards reside in slots 4, 6, and/or 8.
26
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. In single MPTACC protected radio

configurations, the Main MPT ODU and the spare MPT ODU are supported by a
single MPTACC card. Reseating/Replacing an MPTACC card in this configuration
causes a loss of traffic. Schedule appropriate maintenance window prior to
MPTACC replacement per local practices and procedures.
27
Is the card in alarm main or spare?

If main, go to step 28.
If spare, go to step 33.
28
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Forced EPS/HSB/RX Radio switching

traffic causes a disruption to traffic.
29
Perform the Forced EPS Switch using the Craft Terminal.
30
Perform the Forced HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal.
31
Perform the Forced Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal.
32
Go to step 36.
33
Perform Lockout EPS Switch using the Craft Terminal.
34
Perform Lockout HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal.
35
Perform Lockout Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal.
36
Verify card in alarm status is Standby.
37

unprotected link causes loss of traffic.
38
Physically reseat card in alarm and wait for the status LED to turn steady green or
amber.
39
8-34
Power alarms
TAP-102
40
3EM23956AM

41
See DLP-114 to replace MPTACC.
42
43

44
Determine the MSS-1 configuration.

a.
Does the MSS-1 support one or more radio channels?
b.
Are DS1 ports configured and carrying traffic?
c.
Are Ethernet ports configured and carrying traffic?
45
Based on the answers to step 44, verify the appropriate maintenance window is
scheduled per local practices and procedures.
46
Is it appropriate to proceed with MSS-1 CORE Power Supply Failure procedure?

47
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Power cycling an in-service MSS-1

shelf WILL cause a loss of ALL traffic associated with the MSS-1 shelf.
48
Remove both the A and B fuses supplying power to the MSS-1 shelf in alarm.
49
Wait ten seconds and install both the A and B fuses removed in step 48. Then wait for
the status LED to turn steady green.
50
51

52
See DLP-128 to replace MSS-1 shelf.
53
Power alarms
8-35
TAP-102
3EM23956AM
54

55
Inspect the power supply cable connection at MPT ODU.
56
Is power supply cable damaged or improperly connected?

57
Terminate, repair, or replace power supply cable as required.
58
59

60
Inspect the power supply cable run between the MPTACC/MSS-1 CORE and
MPT ODU.
61
Is the power supply cable damaged?

62
Repair or replace the power supply cable as required.
63
64

65
Which card is Power Supply Failure alarm declared?

If MPTACC, go to step 66.
If MSS-1 CORE, go to step 84.
66
Is MPTACC in alarm in a protected system?

8-36
Power alarms
TAP-102
3EM23956AM
67
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Releasing Forced EPS/HSB/RX Radio

switch causes a disruption to traffic.
68
Release the Forced/Lockout EPS Switch using the Craft Terminal.
69
Release the Forced/Lockout HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal.
70
Release the Forced/Lockout Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal.
71
Go to step 84.
Secondary battery failure

72
Verify that there is no blown fuse providing power to the B-power feed.
73
Verify the shelf power cable connections between the MSS-1/4/8 and the PDU.
74
Verify the B-power connections between the BDFB and PDU.
75
Verify that the B-power BDFB breakers are in the ON position.
76
77
Did the Secondary Battery Failure clear?

78
Measure the voltage of the B-power feed.
79
Is the measured voltage within the supported voltage range (-40.8 VDC to -57.6 VDC)?
80
Troubleshoot the B-power feed voltage problem.
81
82
Did the Secondary Battery Failure condition clear?

83
84
Power alarms
8-37
3EM23956AM
TAP-102
8-38
Power alarms
TAP-103
3EM23956AM
TAP-103 Equipment alarms
TAP-103
Equipment alarms
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear Equipment alarms (Replaceable Unit Problem,
Replaceable Unit Missing, Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch, Excessive Environmental
Temperature, or Unconfigured Equipment Present) on Core-E, FAN, MOD300, MPTACC,
MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU), MPT-HL, ODU300, P2E3DS3, P8ETH, P32E1DS1, or
SDHACC.
General
An Excessive Environmental Temperature alarm indicates that excessive temperature on MPT-HL
card has been detected, or MPT-HL fan unit has failed, or is missing.
Normal operating temperature of 5 to 40 C and short term operating temperature of -5 to 50 C
for a period not to exceed 72 hours is supported.
A Replaceable Unit Missing alarm indicates that a card/SFP is missing or unreachable from the
configured slot/port location.
A Replaceable Unit Problem alarm indicates that a card/SFP failure has been detected against the
indicated card/SFP.
A Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch alarm indicates that a card is present in a slot/port provisioned
for a different card/SFP type.
A Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch alarm indicates that an ODU300 is present on a radio channel
provisioned for a different ODU300 type.
An Unconfigured Equipment Present alarm indicates that a card/SFP is present in an unprovisioned
slot.
address.
See the 9500 MPR-A Operation and Administration (PN 3EM23954AM) for the procedures about
how to execute the commands that are described in this procedure.
STEP
PROCEDURE
Review the output. See Table 103-A for information about equipment alarms.
Equipment alarms
8-39
TAP-103
3EM23956AM
Table 103-A. Equipment alarms

Operation
Name
Excessive environmental r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8]

temperature
r01/subrack#1[5-6]
Replaceable unit missing r01s1/board#[8]
8-40
Equipment type
See
MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
Step 3
MPT-HL connected to
Core-E, MSS/CORE
Step 14
AUX
r01s1/board#[1-2]
Core-E
r01s1/board#[5,9]
FAN
r01s1/board#[3-8]
MOD300, MPTACC,
P2E3DS3, P8ETH,
P32E1DS1, SDHACC
r01s1b[1-2]/daughter#[5-6]
SFP on Core-E
SFP on MSS/CORE
r01s1b[3-8]/daughter#[03-04]
SFP on MPTACC
r01s1b[3-8]/daughter#[05-08]
SFP on P8ETH
r01s1b[3-8]/daughter#[01-02]
SFP on SDHACC
r01s[3-8][1-4]b1/daughter#03
RPS SFP on MPT ODU

connected to MPTACC
RPS SFP on MPT ODU

connected to Core-E,
MSS/CORE
Equipment alarms
TAP-103
3EM23956AM
Table 103-A. Equipment alarms (cont.)

Operation
Name
Replaceable unit problem r01s1/board#[8]
Equipment alarms
Equipment type
See
AUX
Step 24
r01s1/board#[1-2]
Core-E
r01s1/board#[5,9]
FAN
r01s1/board#[3-8]
MOD300, MPTACC,
P2E3DS3, P8ETH,
P32E1DS1, SDHACC
r01/subrack#1[1-6]

Core-E, MSS/CORE
r01/subrack#[3-8][1-4]

MPTACC
r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8]

P8ETH
r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8]
MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
r01/subrack#1[5-6]
MPT-HL connected to
Core-E, MSS/CORE
r01/subrack#[3-8]
ODU300
r01s1b[1-2]/daughter#[05-06]
SFP on Core-E
SFP on MSS/CORE
r01s1b[3-8]/daughter#[03-04]
SFP on MPTACC
r01s1b[3-8]/daughter#[05-08]
SFP on P8ETH
r01s1b[3-8]/daughter#[01-02]
SFP for SDH
r01s[3-8][1-4]b1/daughter#03
RPS SFP on MPT ODU

connected to MPTACC
RPS SFP on MPT ODU

connected to Core-E,
MSS/CORE
RPS or XPIC Module on

Core-E, MSS/CORE
r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8]/daughter#04
XPIC Module on
P8ETH
r01s[3-8][1-4]b1/daughter#04
RPS or XPIC Module on

MPTACC
8-41
TAP-103
3EM23956AM
Table 103-A. Equipment alarms (cont.)

Operation
Name
Equipment type
See
Replaceable unit type

mismatch
r01s1/board#[8]
AUX
Step 161
r01s1/board#[1-2]
Core-E
r01s1/board#[5,9]
FAN
r01s1/board#[3-8]
MOD300, MPTACC,
P2E3DS3, P8ETH,
P32E1DS1, SDHACC
r01/subrack#1[1-6]

Core-E, MSS/CORE
r01/subrack#[3-8][1-4]

MPTACC
r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8]

P8ETH
r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8]
MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
r01/subrack#1[5-6]
MPT-HL connected to
Core-E, MSS/CORE
r01/subrack#[3-8]
ODU300
Step 178
AUX
Step 188
Replaceable unit type

mismatch - ODU300
Unconfigured equipment r01s1/board#[8]

present
r01s1/board#[2]
None of the above
Core-E
r01s1/board#[5,9]
FAN
r01s1/board#[3-8]
MOD300, MPTACC,
P2E3DS3, P8ETH,
P32E1DS1, SDHACC
r01s1b[1-2]/daughter#[05-06]
SFP on Core-E
SFP on MSS/CORE
r01s1b[3-8]/daughter#[03-08]
SFP on MPTACC
r01s1b[3-8]/daughter#[05-08]
SFP on P8ETH
r01s1b[3-8]/daughter#[01-02]
SFP on SDHACC
IXL-101
Excessive environmental temperature

3
Verify that the MPT-HL card fan is equipped and operating properly.
Is the MPT-HL fan equipped and operating properly?

8-42
Equipment alarms
TAP-103
5
3EM23956AM
Is the traffic affected?

Replace the MPT-HL. See DLP-108 to replace MPT-HL.
Did the Excessive Environmental Temperature alarm clear?

Verify that the building temperature is within acceptable temperature range (Normal
operating temperatute is 5 to 40 C. Short term operating temperature is -5 to 50 C
for a period not to exceed 72 hours).
10
Verify the condition of MPT-HL shelf air filter and replace if air filter condition
indicates that filter replacement is required. See DLP-101 to replace the MPT-HL air
filter.
11
Verify that no obstruction occurred that prevents proper air flow through the MPT-HL
card.
12
13
Did the Excessive Environmental Temperature alarm clear?

Replaceable unit missing

14
Visually inspect the indicated slot location.
15
Is the slot location empty?

16
Install the card/SFP type corresponding to slot provisioning.
17
Equipment alarms
8-43
TAP-103
3EM23956AM
18
Did the Replaceable Unit Missing alarm clear?

19
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Performing the Restart NE command

may cause a disruption to traffic.
20
Perform the NE restart on the NE: Supervision/Restart NE. Communication with the
NE is lost during the NE restart and you are logged out of the system.
21
Log into the NE.
22
23
Did the Replaceable Unit Missing alarm clear?

Replaceable unit problem

24
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Core-E, P2E3DS3, P32E1DS1,

MPTACC, P8ETH cards support multiple services in both the protected and not
protected configuration, Reseating and replacing any of these cards may cause a
loss of traffic on the other services supported by the card. Schedule appropriate
maintenance window prior to reseating or replacing cards per local practices and
procedures.
25
What equipment type is the Replaceable Unit Problem declared against?

If Core-E, P2E3DS3, or P32E1DS1 go to step 68.
If FAN, go to step 99.
If MPTACC go to step 77.
If MOD300, MPT ODU, ODU300, or P8ETH go to step 85.
If MPT-HL, go to step 26.
If SFP, go to step 113.
If RPS SFP on MPT ODU go to step 139.
If RPS or XPIC module on MPT ODU go to step 154.
26
Verify that the MPT-HL PA switch is in the ON 1 position.
27
Is the MPT-HL PA switch in the ON 1 position?

8-44
Equipment alarms
TAP-103
28
3EM23956AM
Ready to move the MPT-HL PA switch to the ON 1 position?

29
When the MPT-HL PA is in the OFF 0 position, the Replaceable Unit Problem
condition is raised and Tx Mute > Local > Auto > Enable is displayed on the EAS Main
View Settings tab, go to step 199.
30
Position the MPT-HL PA switch to the ON 1 position.
31
32
Did the Replaceable Unit Problem alarm clear?

33
Is the MPT-HL in alarm in a protected system?

34
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Performing Manual EPS/HSB/Rx

Radio switch causes a disruption to traffic.
35
Is the MPT-HL in alarm main or spare?

36
37
38
39
40
Go to step 47.
41
Perform the Lockout EPS Switch using the Craft Terminal.
42
Perform the Lockout HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal.
43
Perform the Lockout Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal.
44
Equipment alarms
8-45
TAP-103
3EM23956AM
45
Go to step 47.
46

47
See DLP-108 to replace MPT-HL.
48
49

50
Is the MPT-HL in alarm in a protected system?

51
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Releasing Forced EPS/HSB/Rx Radio

52
53
54
55
Is the protection scheme configured as Not Revertive?

56
NOTE: To verify the replaced MPT-HL is capable of carrying traffic, the replaced MPT-HL
must be placed in the Active state.
57
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Performing Manual EPS/HSB/Rx

Radio switch causes a disruption to traffic.
58
Perform the Manual EPS Switch using the Craft Terminal.
59
Perform the Manual HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal.
60
Perform the Manual Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal.
61
Verify that the replaced MPT-HL status is Active.
62
Verify that the local and far end radio direction are alarm free and error-free.
8-46
Equipment alarms
TAP-103
63
3EM23956AM
Are the local and far end alarm free and error-free?
64
Release the Manual EPS Switch using the Craft Terminal.
65
Release the Manual HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal.
66
Release the Manual Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal.
67
Go to step 199.
68
Is the card in alarm in a protected system?

69

70

71
72
Verify that the card in the alarm status is Standby.
73
Go to step 99.
74
75
76
Go to step 99.
77
Determine the MPTACC configuration.

a.
b.
c.
d.
Is the power to the radio channels provided by the MPTACC card?
Equipment alarms
8-47
TAP-103
3EM23956AM
78
Verify that the radio protection is available for all traffic supported by the MPTACC
to be replaced or appropriate maintenance window is scheduled per local practices and
procedures.
79
Is it appropriate to proceed with the MPTACC Replaceable Unit Problem procedure?

80
Is the MPTACC in alarm in a protected system?

81

82

configurations, the Main MPTACC card(s) resides in slots 3, 5, and/or 7. The spare
MPTACC card(s) resides in slots 4, 6, and/or 8.
83

single MPTACC card. Replacing an MPTACC card in this configuration causes a
loss of traffic. Schedule appropriate maintenance window prior to MPTACC
replacement per local practices and procedures.
84

85

If MPT ODU go to step 86.
If MOD300, ODU300, or P8ETH, go to step 87.
86
Is the MPT ODU in alarm supported by the Core-E card?

87
Is the MPT ODU in alarm in a protected system?

8-48
Equipment alarms
TAP-103
88
3EM23956AM
Is the MPT ODU in alarm the main or spare?

89

90
91
92
93
Go to step 97.
94
95
Perform the Lockout HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal.
96
Perform the Lockout Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal.
97
98

99
Physically reseat the card in alarm and wait for the status LED to turn steady green
or amber.
100
101

102

If Core-E, see DLP-103 to replace Core-E.
If FAN, see DLP-106 to replace FAN.
If MOD300, see DLP-107 to replace MOD300.
If MPT ODU see DLP-115 to replace MPT ODU.
If ODU300, see DLP-109 to replace ODU300.
If P2E3DS3, see DLP-110 to replace P2E3DS3.
If P8ETH, see DLP-105 to replace P8ETH.
If SDHACC, see DLP-126 to replace SDHACC.
Equipment alarms
8-49
TAP-103
3EM23956AM
103
104

105
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Releasing EPS switch may cause a

106
107
Go to step 199.
108
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Releasing Forced EPS/HSB/RX Radio

109
110
111
112
Go to step 199.
113
Is the SFP (Ethernet/OC-3/Radio equipment) in alarm protected?

114

115
Is the SFP in alarm the main or spare?

116
117
Perform the Forced HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal (radio SFP only).
118
Perform the Forced Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal (radio SFP only).
119
120
Go to step 127.
8-50
Equipment alarms
TAP-103
3EM23956AM
121
122
Perform the Lockout HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal (radio SFP only).
123
Perform the Lockout Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal (radio SFP only).
124
125
Go to step 127.
126
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Removing SFP in an unprotected

system causes a loss of traffic on ALL facilities that are associated with the SFP
removed. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local practices and
procedures.
127
Physically reseat the SFP in alarm.
128
129

130
See DLP-102 to replace SFP in alarm.
131
132

133
Is the SFP protected?

134

135
136
Release the Forced/Lockout HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal (radio SFP only).
137
Release the Forced/Lockout Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal (radio SFP
only).
Equipment alarms
8-51
TAP-103
3EM23956AM
138
Go to step 199.
139
Physically reseat the RPS cable at both ends that are associated with RPS SFP in
alarm.
140
141

142
Physically reseat the RPS SFP in alarm.
143
144

145
See DLP-102 to replace the RPS SFP in alarm.
146
147

148
Replace the RPS cable that is associated with the RPS SFP in alarm.
149
150

151
See DLP-115 to replace MPT ODU associated with RPS SFP in alarm.
152
153

8-52
Equipment alarms
TAP-103
3EM23956AM
154
See DLP-122 to replace RPS/XPIC module in alarm.
155
156

157
See DLP-115 to replace MPT ODU associated with RPS/XPIC module in alarm.
158
159

160
Go to step 199.
Replaceable unit type mismatch

161
Is the Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch alarm declared against an SFP?

162
Visually inspect the indicated slot location.
163
Is the card in indicated slot location the correct card type?

164
Replace the installed card with card type provisioned in Core-E memory.
If Core-E, see DLP-103 to replace Core-E.
If FAN, see DLP-106 to replace FAN.
If MOD300, see DLP-107 to replace MOD300.
If MPTACC, see DLP-114 to replace MPTACC.
If MPT ODU, see DLP-115 to replace MPT ODU.
If MPT-HL, see DLP-108 to replace MPT-HL.
If P8ETH, see DLP-105 to replace P8ETH.
If SDHACC, see DLP-126 to replace SDHACC.
165
Equipment alarms
8-53
TAP-103
3EM23956AM
166
Did the Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch alarm clear?

167
Reprovision the slot to the correct card type.
168
169

170
Using the Craft Terminal, determine the SFP type in alarm.
171
Is the SFP in alarm the correct SFP type as described in the site engineering
documentation?
172
Replace the SFP with the type corresponding to the SFP card slot provisioning. See
DLP-102 to replace an SFP.
173
174

175
Reprovision the SFP slot to the correct SFP type.
176
177

Replaceable unit type mismatch - ODU300

178
8-54
Verify that the radio channel provisioning corresponding to the ODU300 in alarm is
correct as described in the site engineering documentation.
Equipment alarms
TAP-103
179
3EM23956AM
Is the radio channel provisioning correct?

180
Verify that the equipped ODU300 supports radio channel provisioning.
181
Is the ODU300 connected to the MOD300 the correct ODU300 type?

182
Replace the ODU300 with ODU300 type supporting radio channel provisioning that is
stored in Core-E memory. See DLP-109 to replace ODU300.
183
184

185
Reprovision the radio channel as described in the site engineering documentation.
186
187

Unconfigured equipment present

188
Visually inspect the indicated slot/SFP location.
189
Is the indicated slot location equipped with a card/SFP?

190
Is the card/SFP that is equipped in the slot location expected to be there?

191
Provision the slot to the correct the card/SFP type.
192
Equipment alarms
8-55
TAP-103
3EM23956AM
193
Did the Unconfigured Equipment Present alarm clear?

194
Remove the card/SFP from the slot.
195
Install the blank filler panel or face plate into the slot that the card was removed.
196
197
Did the Unconfigured Equipment Present alarm clear?

198
199
8-56
Equipment alarms
TAP-104
3EM23956AM
TAP-104 Radio alarms (MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, MOD300, ODU300, 9558HC)
TAP-104
Radio alarms (MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, MOD300, ODU300,
9558HC)
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear radio alarms on MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC
(MPT ODU), MPT-HL, MOD300, and ODU300.
General
A Bandwidth Over Flow alarm indicates that while the MPT ODU/MPT-HL was not communicating
with the Core-E or P8ETH, TDM2TDM and/or TDM2ETH cross-connections were provisioned with
a total bandwidth which exceeds the net bandwidth capacity of the radio profile.
A CLA alarm indicates that the standby transmitter has/had a silent failure which caused the far
end to request a HSB protection switch.
A Demodulator Fail alarm indicates that a loss of receive signal, bad receive signal, or internal
receive circuit failure.
An Early Warning Indication alarm indicates that a 10E-9 Bit Error Rate detected.
A High BER alarm indicates that Bit Error Rate threshold of 10E-4 has been exceeded on receiver
input circuits.
An Incompatible Frequency alarm indicates that the configured frequency is outside the supported
frequency range.
An Incompatible Modulation alarm indicates that the configured modulation is not supported by
MPT ODU/MPT-HL in alarm.
An Incompatible Protection alarm indicates that the RPS/XPIC module is missing or equipped with
a mixture of RPS and XPIC modules on the MPT ODU protection pair in alarm.
An Incompatible Shifter alarm indicates that the configured shifter value is not supported by the
MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300.
An Incompatible Power/Incompatible TX Power alarm indicates that the configured transmit power
value is not supported by the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300.
A Link Identifier Mismatch alarm indicates that the link identifier number provisioned on
MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300 settings screen is different than link identifier number provisioned at
far end of the hop.
A Loss Of Protection alarm indicates that a loss the radio direction is affected by a failure that radio
protection (RPS) cannot recover. The alarm is only reported if the RPS is provisioned.
Radio alarms (MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, MOD300, ODU300, 9558HC)
8-57
TAP-104
3EM23956AM
A Loss Of Signal alarm indicates that a loss of Ethernet signal is detected on the MPT ODU/MPT-HL
coupler port.
A PPP Fail alarm indicates that TMN over PPP fail.
A Remote Defect Indication in a received Radio Direction. Alarm is reported when an RDI is received
on a given radio direction from the remote end of radio link.
address.
STEP
PROCEDURE
Review the output. See Table 104-A for information about radio alarms.
Table 104-A. Radio alarms
Probable cause
Equipment type
Bandwidth over flow
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT ODU connected Step 3

to MPTACC
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT ODU connected

to Core-E
MPT ODU connected

to MSS/CORE
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#1
MPT ODU connected

to P8ETH
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
Radio/Dir#1.[5-6]/
MPT-HL connected to
Core-E
MPT-HL connected to
MSS/CORE
8-58
See
TAP-104
3EM23956AM

Probable cause
Equipment type
CLA
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1]

to MPTACC
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT ODU connected

to Core-E
MPT ODU connected

to MSS/CORE
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
MOD300
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1]

to MPTACC
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT ODU connected

to Core-E
MPT ODU connected

to MSS/CORE
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#1
MPT ODU connected

to P8ETH
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
Radio/Dir#1.[5-6]/
MPT-HL connected to
Core-E
MPT-HL connected to
MSS/CORE
MOD300
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1]

to MPTACC
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT ODU connected

to Core-E
MPT ODU connected

to MSS/CORE
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT ODU connected

to P8ETH
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
Radio/Dir#1.[5-6]/
MPT-HL connected to
Core-E
MPT-HL connected to
MSS/CORE
MOD300
Demodulator fail
Early warning indication
See
8-59
TAP-104
3EM23956AM

Probable cause
Equipment type
High BER
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1]

to MPTACC
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT ODU connected

to Core-E
MPT ODU connected

to MSS/CORE
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#1
MPT ODU connected

to P8ETH
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
Radio/Dir#1.[5-6]/
MPT-HL connected to
Core-E
MPT-HL connected to
MSS/CORE
MOD300
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1]

to MPTACC
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT ODU connected

to Core-E
MPT ODU connected

to MSS/CORE
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#1
MPT ODU connected

to P8ETH
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
Radio/Dir#1.[5-6]/
MPT-HL connected to
Core-E
MPT-HL connected to
MSS/CORE
MOD300
Incompatible frequency
8-60
See
TAP-104
3EM23956AM

Probable cause
Incompatible modulation Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/

Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1]
Incompatible protection
Incompatible shifter
Equipment type
See

to MPTACC
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT ODU connected

to Core-E
MPT ODU connected

to MSS/CORE
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#1
MPT ODU connected

to P8ETH
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
Radio/Dir#1.[5-6]/
MPT-HL connected to
Core-E
MPT-HL connected to
MSS/CORE
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1]

to MPTACC
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT ODU connected

to Core-E
MPT ODU connected

to MSS/CORE
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1]

to MPTACC
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT ODU connected

to Core-E
MPT ODU connected

to MSS/CORE
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#1
MPT ODU connected

to P8ETH
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
Radio/Dir#1.[5-6]/
MPT-HL connected to
Core-E
MPT-HL connected to
MSS/CORE
ODU300
8-61
TAP-104
3EM23956AM

Probable cause
Equipment type
Incompatible power
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT-HL connected to Step 94

P8ETH
Radio/Dir#1.[5-6]/
MPT-HL connected to
Core-E
MPT-HL connected to
MSS/CORE
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1]

to MPTACC
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT ODU connected

to Core-E
MPT ODU connected

to MSS/CORE
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#1
MPT ODU connected

to P8ETH
ODU300
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#1,
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]

to MPTACC
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#1,
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]
MPT ODU connected

to Core-E
CORE/Port#[1-6]/Ch#1,
CORE/Port#[1-6]
MPT ODU connected

to MSS/CORE
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#1
MPT ODU connected

to P8ETH
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#1,
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]
MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
Slot#1/Port#[5-6]
MPT-HL connected to
Core-E
CORE/Port#[5-6]
MPT-HL connected to
MSS/CORE
AirFrame/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#1,
AirFrame/Dir#[3-8]
MOD300
Incompatible TX power
Link identifier mismatch
8-62
See
TAP-104
3EM23956AM

Probable cause
Equipment type
See
Loss of protection
Radio/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#1
MOD300
Step 111
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#1
MPT ODU connected

to MPTACC
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
MPT ODU connected

to Core-E
MPT ODU connected

to MSS/CORE
Loss of signal
PPP fail
MAU/subrack[#3-8].[1-4]daughter#03 MPT ODU connected Step 119

to MPTACC
MAU/subrack[#3-8].[5-8] Port#n
MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
PPP-IP/RF#1[1-6]

to Core-E,
MSS/CORE
PPP-IP/RF#[3-8][1-4]
MPT ODU connected

to MPTACC
PPP-IP/RF#[3-8][5-8]
MPT ODU connected

to P8ETH
PPP-IP/RF#[3-8][5-8]
MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
PPP-IP/RF#1[5-6]
MPT-HL connected to
Core-E, MSS/CORE
PPP-IP/RF#[3-8]
MOD300
Remote defect indication Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/

Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1]
None of the above

to MPTACC
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT ODU connected

to Core-E
MPT ODU connected

to MSS/CORE
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#1
MPT ODU connected

to P8ETH
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
Radio/Dir#1.[5-6]/
MPT-HL connected to
Core-E
MPT-HL connected to
MSS/CORE
MOD300
IXL-101
8-63
TAP-104
3EM23956AM
Bandwidth over flow

3
NOTE: Total Bandwidth provisioned is validated at the add/drop nodes of the network
only. Pass-Through TDM2TDM and/or TDM2ETH flows supported by the NE are not
included in the total bandwidth validation and must be included in the network design
to determine the net bandwidth capacity of the radio profile required.
Verify the cross-connections for the radio with Bandwidth Over Flow alarm and delete
TDM2TDM and/or TDM2ETH cross-connections until the total bandwidth is equal to
or less than the net bandwidth capacity of the radio profile.
Retrieve the alarms Using the Alarm Monitor.
Did the Bandwidth Over Flow alarm clear?

CLA
7
Attempt to Clear CLA alarm using the manual switch command?

CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Performing Clear CLA command on

MPT ODU, MPT-HL, or ODU300 will cause a loss of traffic on ALL facilities
associated with the MPT ODU, MPT-HL, or ODU300 declaring CLA alarm IF the silent
failure still exist. The Clear CLA command Forces traffic onto the radio channel in
alarm and resets the CLA alarm. If the silent failure still exists, ALL traffic will be
dropped until the far end requests a HSB protection switch for the link. The traffic
outage duration will be from 30 to 60 seconds. Schedule appropriate maintenance
window per local practices and procedures.
Using the Craft Terminal, on the Protection Schemes tab for the local MPT ODU/
MPT-HL/ODU300, select HSB Protection for the channel declaring CLA alarm.
10
On the Commands tab, from the New Value drop down, choose Clear CLA.
11
Click on the Apply button. The Switch confirmation window appears.
12
Click on the OK button.
13
Are both receivers at the far end in alarm and traffic affected?
8-64
TAP-104
3EM23956AM
14
Wait two minutes for the CLA alarm to be declared against the MPT ODU, MPT-HL,
or ODU300.
15
16
Is the CLA alarm declared against the MPT ODU, MPT-HL, or ODU300?
17
Replace the MPT ODU, MPT-HL, or ODU300 CLA declared against.

See DLP-115 to replace MPT ODU.
See DLP-107 to replace MOD300.
18
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Performing Clear CLA command on

MPT ODU, MPT-HL, or ODU300 will cause a loss of traffic on ALL facilities
associated with the MPT ODU, MPT-HL, or ODU300 declaring CLA alarm IF the silent
failure still exist. The Clear CLA command Forces traffic onto the radio channel in
alarm and resets the CLA alarm. If the silent failure still exists, ALL traffic is dropped
until the far end requests a HSB protection switch for the link. The traffic outage
duration is 30 to 60 seconds. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local
19
Perform the Clear CLA command.
20
Are both receivers at the far end in alarm and traffic affected?
21
Wait two minutes for the CLA alarm to be declared against the MPT ODU, MPT-HL,
or ODU300.
22
23
Is the CLA alarm declared against the MPT ODU, MPT-HL, or ODU300?
Demodulator fail
24
Verify that there are no weather-related conditions.
8-65
TAP-104
3EM23956AM
25
Do weather-related conditions exist?

If yes, wait for the weather to clear and recheck alarms. Go to step 145.
26
Verify that the RF path is clear.
27
Is the RF path clear?

28
Verify that the RSL is above RX threshold.
29
Is the RSL above the RX threshold?

30
Check the upstream transmitter output power and troubleshoot accordingly.
31
32
Did the Demodulator Fail alarm clear?

33
Replace the MPT ODU, MPT-HL, or MOD300 Demodulator Fail declared against.
See DLP-115 to replace MPT ODU.
See DLP-107 to replace MOD300.
34
35
Did the Demodulator Fail alarm clear?

Early warning indication

36
No action is required at this time. Monitor the receive signal for increased degrading.
37
Go to step 145.
8-66
TAP-104
3EM23956AM
High BER
38
Verify that there are no weather-related conditions.
39
Do weather-related conditions exist?

If yes, wait for the weather to clear and recheck the alarms. Go to
step 145.
40
41

42
Verify that the RSL is above the RX threshold.
43

44
45
46
Did the High BER alarm clear?

47
Verify that the antenna is aligned.
48
Is the antenna aligned?

If no, align the antenna. See the 9500 MPR-A Turn-Up Manual
(PN 3EM23955AM) Antenna Polarization Verification (DLP-105)
Antenna Feedhorn Verification - XPD Procedure.
49
50
Did the High BER alarm clear?

8-67
TAP-104
3EM23956AM
Incompatible frequency
51
Using the Craft Terminal, retrieve the provisioned frequency value and supported
frequency of the MPT ODU, MPT-HL, or ODU300.
52
Verify the required frequency of the microwave link.
53
Is the required microwave link frequency supported by the MPT ODU, MPT-HL, or
ODU300?
54
Reprovision the frequency of the MPT ODU, MPT-HL, or ODU300 to the required
frequency of the microwave link.
55
56
Did the Incompatible Frequency alarm clear?

57
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing the MPT ODU, MPT-HL, or

ODU300 in an unprotected facility causes a loss of traffic on ALL facilities that are
associated with the MPT ODU, MPT-HL, or ODU300 being replaced. Schedule
appropriate maintenance window per local practices and procedures.
58
Replace the MPT ODU, MPT-HL, or ODU300 with the version that supports the
required frequency of the microwave link.
For MPT ODU replacement, see DLP-115.
For MPT-HL replacement, see DLP-108.
For ODU300 replacement, see DLP-109.
59
60
Did the Incompatible Frequency alarm clear?

Incompatible modulation
61
Using the Craft Terminal, retrieve the provisioned modulation value and supported
modulation of the MPT ODU/MPT-HL.
62
Verify the required modulation of the microwave link.
8-68
TAP-104
63
3EM23956AM
Is the required microwave link modulation supported by the MPT ODU/MPT-HL?

64
Reprovision the modulation of the MPT ODU/MPT-HL to the required modulation of

the microwave link.
65
66
Did the Incompatible Modulation alarm clear?

67
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing the MPT ODU/MPT-HL in an

the MPT ODU/MPT-HL being replaced. Schedule appropriate maintenance window
per local practices and procedures.
68
Replace the MPT ODU/MPT-HL with the version that supports the required
modulation of the microwave link.
69
70
Did the Incompatible Modulation alarm clear?

Incompatible protection
71
Visually inspect the main and spare MPT ODU for missing the RPS/XPIC module.
72
Is the RPS/XPIC module missing?

73
See DLP-122 to install the appropriate RPS/XPIC module.
74
8-69
TAP-104
3EM23956AM
75
Did the Incompatible Protection alarm clear?

76
Determine the required RPS/XPIC module type.
77
Are both MPT ODUs equipped with the correct RPS/XPIC module?
78
See DLP-122 to replace the incorrect RPS/XPIC module.
79
80

81
See DLP-122 to replace the RPS/XPIC module in alarm.
82
83

Incompatible shifter
84
Using the Craft Terminal, retrieve the provisioned shifter value and supported shifter
levels of the MPT ODU, MPT-HL, or ODU300.
85
Verify the required shifter value of the microwave link.
86
Is the required microwave link shifter level supported by the MPT ODU, MPT-HL, or
ODU300?
87
Reprovision the shifter value of the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300 to the required

shifter value of the microwave link.
88
8-70
TAP-104
89
3EM23956AM
Did the Incompatible Shifter alarm clear?

90
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing the

MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300 in an unprotected facility causes a loss of traffic on ALL
facilities that are associated with the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300 being replaced.
Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local practices and procedures.
91
Replace the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU30 with version that supports the required
shifter value of the microwave link.
92
93
Did the Incompatible Shifter alarm clear?

Incompatible power
Incompatible TX power
94
Using the Craft Terminal, retrieve the provisioned transmit power value and
supported transmit power level of the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300.
95
Verify the required transmit power level of the microwave link.
96
Is the required microwave link transmit power level supported by the

MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300?
97
Reprovision the transmit power level of the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300 to the

required transmit power level of the microwave link.
98
99
Did the Incompatible TX Power alarm clear?

8-71
TAP-104
3EM23956AM
100
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing the

MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300 in an unprotected facility causes a loss of traffic on ALL
facilities that are associated with the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300 being replaced.
101
Replace the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300 with the version that supports the required
transmit power level of the microwave link.
102
103
Did the Incompatible TX Power alarm clear?

Link identifier mismatch

104
NOTE: Link Identifier Mismatch alarm failure signatures are different for
MPT ODU/MPT-HL versus ODU300. For MPT ODU/MPT-HL Link Identifier
Mismatch alarm is declared and all link traffic is blocked. For ODU300 Link Identifier
Mismatch alarm is declared but all link traffic is passed downstream.
105
Using the Craft Terminal, retrieve the provisioned Link Identifier values for the near
end and far end of the hop for the alarmed MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300.
106
Verify the required Link Identifier value of the microwave hop.
107
Determine which Link Identifier values are incorrect.
108
Reprovision the Link Identifier values according to the results of step 107.
109
110
Did the Link Identifier Mismatch alarm clear?

Loss of protection
111
Retrieve the alarms for the local end of the radio direction using the Alarm Monitor.
112
Determine all of the radio alarms that are declared against the radio direction
declaring the Loss Of Protection and troubleshoot accordingly.
8-72
TAP-104
3EM23956AM
113
114
Did the Loss Of Protection alarm clear?

115
Retrieve the alarms for the far end of the radio direction using the Alarm Monitor.
116
declaring the Loss Of Protection and troubleshoot accordingly.
117
118
Did the Loss Of Protection alarm clear?

Loss of signal
119
Verify that the Core-E/MPTACC/P8ETH card Ethernet port is operating normally.
120
121

122
Verify the link cabling between the Core-E/MPTACC/P8ETH card Ethernet port and
the MPT ODU/MPT-HL.
123
124

PPP fail
125
Retrieve the alarms using the Alarm Monitor, verify that no other radio path alarms
(such as Demodulator Fail) exist, and troubleshoot accordingly.
8-73
TAP-104
3EM23956AM
126
Did other radio path alarms exist and were cleared?

127
128
Did the PPP Fail alarm clear?

129
Check the provisioning of the far end radio card that is associated with card in alarm,
and verify that the PPP RF is enabled.
130
Is the far end radio card PPP RF disabled?

131
Enable the PPP RF at far end radio card.
132
133

134
Verify that the Link Identifiers match at the local and far end radio cards.
135
Do the local and far end Link Identifiers match?

136
Determine which Link Identifier is correct.
137
Reprovision the incorrect Link Identifier.
138
139

8-74
TAP-104
3EM23956AM
Remote defect indication

140
Retrieve the alarms for the far end of the radio direction using the Alarm Monitor.
141
associated with the radio direction declaring the Remote Defect Indication (RDI) and
142
143
Did the RDI alarm clear?

144
145
8-75
3EM23956AM
8-76
TAP-104
TAP-105
3EM23956AM
TAP-105 Ethernet alarms (Core-E, MPTACC, P8ETH, MSS-1 Shelf Core)
TAP-105
Ethernet alarms (Core-E, MPTACC, P8ETH, MSS-1 Shelf Core)
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear Loss Of Signal on Ethernet ports on the
Core-E/MPTACC/P8ETH.
General
Loss Of Signal alarm indicates that a loss of Ethernet signal is detected on the port or a
communication problem with the remote peer; for example, a link down condition.
address.
STEP
PROCEDURE
Review the output. See Table 105-A for information about the Ethernet alarms.
Table 105-A. Ethernet alarms
Probable cause
Facility type
See
Loss of signal
ETHInterface#100
Core-E
Step 3
ETHInterfaceonCore#4
Core-E
Core-E
MAU/Slot#1/Port#[1-6]
MSS/CORE
MPTACC
P8ETH
RPS SFP on MPT

ODU connected to
Core-E, MSS/CORE
Bandwidth degrade for

protection switch
ERP[1-2]#1-2]
Core-E
Step 10
None of the above
IXL-101
Loss of signal
3
Verify that the link partner is operating normally.
8-77
TAP-105
3EM23956AM

Verify the link partner cabling between the Core-E/MPTACC/P8ETH card or MSS-1
shelf Core and the link partner.

Bandwidth degrade for protection switch

10
Retrieve the alarms for the radio direction on one node of the Ethernet Ring reporting
the Bandwidth degrade using the Alarm Monitor.
11
Determine all of the radio alarms that are declared against the radio direction and
12
13
Did the Bandwidth degrade for protection switch alarm clear?

14
Have all nodes in the Ethernet Ring been verified?

If no, repeat steps 10 to 13 for the other nodes in the Ethernet Ring.
15
16
8-78
TAP-106
3EM23956AM
TAP-106 License/software mismatch
TAP-106
License/software mismatch
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear License/Software Mismatch alarms (Provisioning
Mismatch or Version Mismatch, Standby Version mismatch) on the Core-E,
MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU), MPT-HL, ODU300, or MSS-1 Shelf Core.
General
A Provisioning Mismatch alarm is declared against a Core-E indicates that has an incorrect flash
card installed on the Core-E.
A Standby Version Mismatch alarm indicates that the software version on MPT ODU/MPT-HL does
not match the software version on the Core-E.
A Version Mismatch alarm declared against a Core-E indicates that an incorrect Core-E card is
installed in the MSS-4 or MSS-8 slot or the software license string is not loaded on the Core-E card.
A Version Mismatch alarm declared against the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300 indicates that
software version on the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300 does not match the software version on the
Core-E.
address.
STEP
PROCEDURE
Review the output. See Table 106-A for information about License/Software Mismatch
alarms.
Table 106-A. License/software mismatch alarms
Probable cause
Facility type
See
Provisioning mismatch
r01s1/board#[1-2]
Core-E
Step 3
r01s1/board#1
MSS/CORE
8-79
TAP-106
3EM23956AM
Table 106-A. License/software mismatch alarms (cont.)

Standby version
mismatch
Version mismatch
None of the above
r01/subrack#1[1-6]

to Core-E,
MSS/CORE
r01/subrack#[3-8][1-4]
MPT ODU connected

to MPTACC
r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8]
MPT ODU connected

to P8ETH
r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8]
MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
r01/subrack#1[5-6]
MPT-HL connected to
Core-E, MSS/CORE
r01s1/board#[1-2]
Core-E
r01/subrack#1[1-6]

to Core-E,
MSS/CORE
r01/subrack#[3-8][1-4]
MPT ODU connected

to MPTACC
r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8]
MPT ODU connected

to P8ETH
r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8]
MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
r01/subrack#1[5-6]
MPT-HL connected to
Core-E, MSS/CORE
r01/subrack#[3-8]
ODU300
Step 12
IXL-101
Provisioning mismatch
3
Replace the Core-E flash card with the correct flash card for the license. See DLP-104
to replace the Core-E flash card.
Did the Provisioning Mismatch alarm clear?

Standby version mismatch

6
8-80
TAP-106
3EM23956AM
Verify that the Firmware Download On Going is declared against the

MPT ODU/MPT-HL.
Is the Firmware Download On Going declared against the MPT ODU/MPT-HL?

A Firmware Download On Going alarm indicates that the MSS/Core-E is downloading

the correct software to the MPT ODU/MPT-HL. Wait at least 30 minutes for the
downloading process to complete.
10
11
Did the Standby Version Mismatch alarm clear?

Version mismatch
12
Verify the Core-E card type is installed in the slot declaring Version Mismatch alarm.
13
Is the Core-E card type Core-E?

14
Replace the Core-B card with the Core-E card. See DLP-103 to replace the Core-E
card.
15
16
Did the Version Mismatch alarm clear?

17
Verify the license string that is installed on the NE.
18
Is the license string correct?

19
Replace the Core-E card. See DLP-103 to replace the Core-E card.
20
8-81
TAP-106
3EM23956AM
21
Did the Version Mismatch alarm clear?

Version mismatch
22
23
Verify that a Firmware Download On Going alarm is declared against the

24
Is the Firmware Download On Going declared against the

MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300?
25
A Firmware Download On Going alarm indicates the MSS/Core-E is downloading the

correct software to the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300. Wait at least 30 minutes for the
downloading process to complete.
26
27
Did the Version Mismatch, Standby Version Mismatch alarm clear?

28
29
8-82
TAP-107
3EM23956AM
TAP-107 Internal loss of communications
TAP-107
Internal loss of communications
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear an Internal Communication Problem alarm on the
MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU), MPT-HL, or ODU300.
General
A Dialog Failure alarm indicates that temporary loss of communication between the MSS shelf and
MPT ODU/MPT-HL. A Dialog Failure alarm is declared until communications are reestablished or
a time-out period expires.
After the time-out period is reached, a Dialog Failure alarm is cleared and an Internal
Communication Problem alarm is declared.
The Dialog Failure time-out durations varies based on the system configuration. The time-out
durations are:
1+0: 20 minutes
1+1 HSB: 5 minutes
1+1 FD: 20 minutes
An Internal Communication Problem alarm indicates that a loss of communications with the
NOTE: After a radio configuration change, such as transition from 1+1 MPT ODU to MPT ODU with
XPIC, in a rare event, a stuck Dialog Failure alarm may occur. If this condition exists, to clear the
Dialog Failure alarm, the associated MPT Access card must be reseated.
address.
STEP
PROCEDURE
Review the output. See Table 107-A for information about internal communication
problem alarms.
8-83
TAP-107
3EM23956AM
Table 107-A. Internal communication problem alarms

Probable cause
Facility type
Dialog failure
r01/subrack#1[1-6]

to Core-E,
MSS/CORE
r01/subrack#[3-8][1-4]
MPT ODU connected

to MPTACC
r01/subrack#[3-8][[5-8]
MPT ODU connected

to P8ETH
r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8]
MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
r01/subrack#1[5-6]
MPT-HL connected to
Core-E, MSS/CORE
r01/subrack#1[1-6]

to Core-E,
MSS/CORE
r01/subrack#[3-8][1-4]
MPT ODU connected

to MPTACC
r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8]
MPT ODU connected

to P8ETH
r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8]
MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
r01/subrack#1[5-6]
MPT-HL connected to
Core-E, MSS/CORE
r01/subrack#[3-8]
ODU300
Internal communication
problem
None of the above
See
IXL-101
Dialog failure
3

Has the appropriate time-out period be reached?

If no, wait for the appropriate time-out period to expire before
proceeding to step 5.
8-84
TAP-107
6
3EM23956AM
Did the Dialog Failure alarm clear?

Is an Internal Communication Problem alarm declared?

If yes, go to step 88 to clear Internal Communication Problem.
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Physically reseating an MPTACC in an

the MPTACC being reseated. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local
Reseat the MPTACC card that is associated with the MPT ODU in alarm.
10
Wait for the status LED to turn steady green or amber.
11
12

13
Verify radio port provisioning against site documentation.
14
Is the radio port provisioned per site documentation?

15
Verify radio port fiber cabling per site documentation.
16
Is the radio port fiber cabling correct and connected to the correct MPT type?
17
Correct MPT fiber cable connections per site documentation.
18
19

8-85
TAP-107
3EM23956AM
20
Reprovision the radio port per site documentation.
21
22

23
24
Is a Replaceable Unit Problem alarm declared against the MPT ODU/MPT-HL in the
protection-pair?
If yes, see IXL-101 to clear the Replaceable Unit Problem.
25
Verify that power is properly supplied to the MPT ODU/MPT-HL in alarm. Correct if
required.
26
Was a power problem corrected?

27
28

29
Is the MPT ODU/MPT-HL in a protected system?

30
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Forced EPS and HSB switching traffic
31
Is the MPT ODU/MPT-HL in alarm the main or spare?

32
Perform a Forced EPS Switch using the Craft Terminal.
33
Perform a Forced HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal.
8-86
TAP-107
3EM23956AM
34
Perform a Forced Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal.
35
Go to step 39.
36
Perform a Lockout EPS Switch using the Craft Terminal.
37
Perform a Lockout HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal.
38
Perform a Lockout Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal.
39
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Unseating and reseating the

communication link between the MPT ODU/MPT-HL and the
Core-E/MPTACC/P8ETH card MSS-1 shelf in an unprotected facility causes a loss of
traffic on ALL facilities that are associated with the MPT ODU/MPT-HL. Schedule
40
Reseat the RJ45/SFP at the Core-E/MPTACC/P8ETH/MSS-1 shelf Core that is

associated with the MPT ODU/MPT-HL in alarm.
41
Reseat the SFP at the MPT-HL in alarm.
42
43

44
Which card type is declaring Dialog Failure?

If MPT ODU, go to step 45.
45
Is the MPT ODU in alarm supported by the Core-E/P8ETH card or MSS-1 shelf Core?
46
Is there a second radio channel supported by the MPTACC associated with the
MPT ODU in alarm?
47
Is the second radio channel error-free and alarm free?

8-87
TAP-107
3EM23956AM
48
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Physically removing power to an

MPT ODU in an unprotected facility causes a loss of traffic on ALL facilities that are
associated with the MPT ODU being replaced. Schedule appropriate maintenance
49
Power cycle the MPT ODU.

If powered using PFoE/QMA through the MPTACC or MSS-1 shelf Core, use the craft
terminal to disable power, and then reprovision power.
If MPT ODU is powered using PFoE through a Power Injector Card/Power Injector
Box/MPT Extended Power Unit, disconnect the DC+Data cable connection to the
MPT ODU at the power injector card/box. Wait 10 seconds and reconnect.
If MPT ODU is powered using coaxial cable with connection to MPT Power Unit/MPT
Extended Power Unit, disconnect the power cable connection to the MPT ODU at the
MPT Power Unit/MPT Extended Power Unit. Wait 10 seconds and reconnect.
If MPT ODU is powered with connection to direct office power, locate the fuse
protecting the MPT ODU and remove. Wait 10 seconds and reinstall the fuse.
50
51

52
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Physically replacing an MPT ODU in

an unprotected facility causes a loss of traffic on ALL facilities that are associated
with the MPT ODU being replaced. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per
local practices and procedures.
53
Replace the MPT ODU in alarm. See DLP-115 to replace MPT ODU.
54
55

56
8-88
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Physically removing an

MPTACC/P8ETH/Core-E in an unprotected facility causes a loss of traffic on ALL
facilities that are associated with the MPTACC being removed. Schedule
TAP-107
3EM23956AM
57
Reseat the MPTACC/P8ETH/Core-E card that is associated with the MPT ODU in
alarm.
58
59
60

61
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Physically replacing an

MPTACC/P8ETH/Core-E in an unprotected facility causes a loss of traffic on ALL
facilities that are associated with the MPTACC/P8ETH/Core-E being replaced.
62
Replace the MPTACC/P8ETH/Core-E that is associated with the MPT ODU in alarm.
See DLP-114 to replace the MPTACC.
63
64
65

66
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing an MPT ODU in an

the MPT ODU being replaced. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local
67
68
69

70
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. reseating an MPT-HL in an

the MPT-HL reseat. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local practices
and procedures.
8-89
TAP-107
3EM23956AM
71
Position the MPT-HL PA switch to the OFF 0 position.
72
Remove the fuse in the PDU that is suppling battery power to the MPT-HL.
73
Install the fuse in the PDU that is suppling battery power to the MPT-HL.
74
75
76
77

78
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing an MPT-HL in an

the MPT-HL being replaced. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local
79
Replace the card in alarm. See DLP-108 to replace the MPT-HL.
80
81
82

83
Is the MPT ODU/MPT-HL in a protected system?

84
85
86
87
Go to step 174.
8-90
TAP-107
3EM23956AM
Internal communication problem

88
Is traffic affected?
89
Has the Internal Communication Problem alarm been active for more than five
minutes?
If no, wait five minutes, then go to step 90.
90
91
Did the Internal Communication Problem alarm clear?

92
Verify radio port provisioning against site documentation.
93
Is the radio port provisioned per site documentation?

94
Verify radio port fiber cabling per site documentation.
95
Is the radio port fiber cabling correct and connected to the correct MPT type?
96
Correct MPT fiber cable connections per site documentation.
97
98

99
100
Reprovision the radio port per site documentation.

8-91
TAP-107
3EM23956AM
101

102
Is the radio facility protected?

103
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Forced switching traffic causes a

104
Is the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300 in alarm main or spare?

105
106
107
108
Go to step 112.
109
110
111
112
Which card is in alarm?

If ODU300, go to step 113.
113
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Physically removing an MOD300 in an

the MOD300 being removed. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local
114
Physically reseat the MOD300 that is associated with the ODU300 in alarm. Do not
remove the IF cable while reseating the MOD300 card.
115
8-92
TAP-107
116
3EM23956AM
Did Internal communication Problem alarm clear?

117
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Physically replacing an MOD300 in an

the MOD300 being replaced. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local
118
Replace the MOD300 that is associated with the ODU300. See DLP-107 to replace the
MOD300.
119
120
Did the Internal communication Problem alarm clear?

121
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Physically replacing an ODU in an

the ODU being replaced. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local
122
Replace the ODU300 in alarm. See DLP-109 to replace the ODU300.
123
124
Did the Internal communication Problem alarm clear?

125
Is MPT ODU in alarm supported by the Core-E/P8ETH card or MSS-1 shelf Core?
126
Is there a second radio channel supported by the MPTACC associated with the
MPT ODU in alarm?
8-93
TAP-107
3EM23956AM
127
Is the second radio channel error-free and alarm free?

128
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Physically removing power to an

MPT ODU in an unprotected facility causes a loss of traffic on ALL facilities that are
associated with the MPT ODU being replaced. Schedule appropriate maintenance
129

If powered through the MPTACC or MSS-1 shelf Core, use the craft terminal to disable
power, and then reprovision power.
If MPT ODU is powered using PFoE through a Power Injector Card/Power Injector
Box/MPT Extended Power Unit, disconnect the DC+Data cable connection to the
MPT ODU at the Power Injector Card/Power Injector Box/MPT Extended Power Unit.
Wait 10 seconds and reconnect.
If MPT ODU is powered using coaxial connection from MPT Power Unit/MPT
Extended Power Unit, disconnect the power cable connection to the MPT ODU at the
MPT Power Unit/MPT Extended Power Unit. Wait 10 seconds and reconnect.
130
131
Did Internal Communication Problem alarm clear?

132

133
134
135

8-94
TAP-107
3EM23956AM
136
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Physically reseating an MPTACC in an

the MPTACC reseat. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local practices
and procedures.
137
Reseat the MPTACC card that is associated with the MPT ODU in alarm.
138
139
140

141
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Physically replacing an MPTACC in an

the MPTACC being replaced. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local
142
Replace the MPTACC that is associated with MPT ODU in alarm. See DLP-114 to
replace the MPTACC.
143
144
145

146

147
148
149

8-95
TAP-107
3EM23956AM
150
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Unseating and reseating the

communication link between the MPT-HL and the P8ETH, Core-E card or MSS-1
shelf in an unprotected facility causes a loss of traffic on ALL facilities that are
associated with the MPT-HL. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local
151
Unseat and reseat the communication link between the MPT-HL and P8ETH, Core-E,
or MSS-1 Shelf.
152
153

154
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing the communication link

between the MPT-HL and the P8ETH, Core-E card or MSS-1 shelf in an unprotected
facility causes a loss of traffic on ALL facilities that are associated with the MPT-HL.
155
Replace the communication link between the MPT-HL and P8ETH, Core-E, or MSS-1
Shelf.
156
157

158
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. reseating an MPT-HL in an

the MPT-HL reseat. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local practices
and procedures.
159
Position the MPT-HL PA switch to the OFF 0 position.
160
Remove the fuse in the PDU suppling battery power to the MPT-HL.
161
Install the fuse in the PDU suppling battery power to the MPT-HL.
162
163

8-96
TAP-107
3EM23956AM
164
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing an MPT-HL in an

the MPT-HL being replaced. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local
165
Replace the MPT-HL in alarm. See DLP-108 to replace the MPT-HL.
166
167

168

169
170
171
172
Go to step 174.
173
174
8-97
3EM23956AM
8-98
TAP-107
TAP-108
3EM23956AM
TAP-108 Threshold crossing alarms (MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC, P32E1DS1, MSS-1 shelf P32E1DS1)
TAP-108
Threshold crossing alarms (MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP,
9558HC, P32E1DS1, MSS-1 shelf P32E1DS1)
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify Threshold Crossing Alarms (TCA) Threshold Crossed or
Unavailable Time on the MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU), MPT-HL, MOD300, or P32E1DS1
cards or MSS-1 shelf DS1.
General
TCA alarms are associated with Performance Monitoring (PM). TCA thresholds are default values
or values configured by the user. Depending on the configured TCA threshold values provisioned, the
severity of the TCA alarms are determined. Due to the nature and flexibility of TCA alarms, only
general recommendations can be provided as a course of action to clear TCA alarms. Follow local
practices and procedures in assessing the severity/importance of TCA alarms.
A TCA declared against a MPT ODU/MPT-HL/MOD300/P32E1DS1/DS1 on MSS-1 shelf indicates
that the alarm threshold has been exceeded; applies to the PM parameters with an accumulation
period of 15 minutes and/or 24 hours on the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/MOD300/P32E1DS1/DS1 on MSS-1
shelf.
Single level threshold crossing mechanism is utilized with 24 hour PM TCA alarms. TCA alarm is
raised when 24 hour threshold is exceeded. Implicit clearing of 24 hour TCA alarms occurs at the
beginning of each 24 hour period. No TCA alarm clear message is sent by the NE.
Dual level threshold crossing mechanism is utilized with 15 minute PM TCA alarms. A TCA alarm
is raised when the high threshold is exceeded. An explicit clearing of the TCA alarm occurs at the
end of a 15 minute period where the current data value does not exceed the low threshold, and the
monitoring period does not contain a suspect interval or an unavailable period. When this occurs, the
NE sends TCA alarm clear message.
An Unavailable Time alarm is declared against a MPT ODU/MPT-HL/MOD300/P32E1DS1/DS1 on
MSS-1 shelf which indicates that ten consecutive SES events have occurred; applies to the PM
parameters on the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/MOD300/P32E1DS1/DS1 on MSS-1 shelf.
address.
STEP
1
PROCEDURE
Threshold crossing alarms (MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC, P32E1DS1,
8-99
TAP-108
3EM23956AM
Review the output. See Table 108-A for information about TCA alarms.
Table 108-A. Threshold crossing alarms
Probable cause
Facility type
See
Threshold crossed
Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]-PM15min

Core-E
Step 3

MSS/CORE
Hop/Dir#[3-8][1-4]/Slot#[3-8]/

MPTACC
Hop/Dir#[3-8][1-4]/Slot#[3-8]/
Hop/Dir#[3-8][5-8]/Slot#[3-8]/

P8ETH
Hop/Dir#[3-8][5-8]/Slot#[3-8]/
Hop/Dir#[3-8][5-8]/Slot#[3-8]/
MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
Hop/Dir#[3-8][5-8]/Slot#[3-8]/
MPT-HL connected to
Core-E
MPT-HL connected to
MSS/CORE
8-100
TAP-108
3EM23956AM
Table 108-A. Threshold crossing alarms (cont.)

Probable cause
Facility type
See
Threshold crossed
continued
Hop/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#[0-1]-PM15min
MOD300
Step 3
Hop/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#[0-1]-PM1day
DS1-in/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-32]PM15min
DS1 on P32E1DS1
DS1-out/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-32]PM15min
DS1-out/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-32]PM1day
DS1-in/MSS/DS1/Port#[1-16]PM15min
DS1 on MSS-1 shelf
DS1-in/MSS/DS1/Port#[1-16]PM1day
DS1-out/MSS/DS1/Port#[1-16]PM15min
DS1-out/MSS/DS1/Port#[1-16]PM1day
Unavailable time

Core-E, MSS/CORE
Step 12

MSS/CORE
Hop/Dir#[3-8][1-4]/Slot#[3-8]/

MPTACC
Hop/Dir#[3-8][1-4]/Slot#[3-8]/
8-101
TAP-108
3EM23956AM
Table 108-A. Threshold crossing alarms (cont.)

Probable cause
Facility type
See
Unavailable time
continued
Hop/Dir#[3-8][5-8]/Slot#[3-8]/

P8ETH
Step 12
Hop/Dir#[3-8][5-8]/Slot#[3-8]/
Hop/Dir#[3-8][5-8]/Slot#[3-8]/
MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
Hop/Dir#[3-8][5-8]/Slot#[3-8]/
MPT-HL connected to
Core-E
MPT-HL connected to
MSS/CORE
Hop/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#[0-1]-PM15min
MOD300
Hop/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#[0-1]-PM1day
DS1-in/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-32]PM15min
DS1 on P32E1DS1
DS1-out/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-32]PM15min
DS1-out/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-32]PM1day
DS1-in/MSS/DS1/Port#[1-16]PM15min
DS1 on MSS-1 shelf
DS1-in/MSS/DS1/Port#[1-16]PM1day
DS1-out/MSS/DS1/Port#[1-16]PM15min
DS1-out/MSS/DS1/Port#[1-16]PM1day
None of the above
8-102
IXL-101
TAP-108
3EM23956AM
Threshold crossed
3
Verify the PM data using the Craft Terminal.
Verify the radio channel power levels.
Determine the local weather conditions that could affect radio performance.
Following local practices and procedures, determine whether corrective actions are
required.
Are corrective actions required?

Perform corrective actions per local practices and procedures.
10
11
Did the Threshold Crossed alarm clear?

Unavailable time
12
Verify the PM data using the Craft Terminal.
13
Verify the radio channel power levels.
14
15
Determine local weather conditions that could affect radio performance.
16
Following local practices and procedures, determine whether corrective actions are
required.
17
Are corrective actions required?

18
Perform corrective actions per local practices and procedures.
19
8-103
TAP-108
3EM23956AM
20
Did the Unavailable Time alarm clear?

21
22
8-104
TAP-109
3EM23956AM
TAP-109 Synchronization alarms (Core-E, MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, P32E1DS1, SDHACC, 9558HC)
TAP-109
Synchronization alarms (Core-E, MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL,
MPT-XP, P32E1DS1, SDHACC, 9558HC)
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear synchronization alarms on the Core-E, MOD300,
MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU), MPT-HL, P32E1DS1, and SDHACC.
General
A Degrade alarm indicates that the frequency of the sync source signal is degraded.
A Loss Ethernet Synchronization Message Channel (ESMC) alarm indicates a loss of communication
with the far end synchronization source or a provisioning mismatch with the far end Ethernet port
or radio channel. Loss ESMC is applicable to the Core-E Ethernet ports and Radio interfaces
(MOD300/MPT ODU/MPT-HL) configured with SSM support enabled and is assigned as a
synchronous clock source input.
A Loss Of Signal alarm indicates that no signal is present on the incoming Sync-in port.
A Synchronization Signal Fail alarm indicates that the received source signal is not applicable as a
Sync Source.
address.
STEP
PROCEDURE
Review the output. See Table 109-A for information about synchronization alarms.
Synchronization alarms (Core-E, MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, P32E1DS1,
8-105
TAP-109
3EM23956AM
Table 109-A. Sync alarms

Probable cause
Equipment type
See
Degrade
Sync-in/Port#1
Core-E
Step 3
MOD300
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
MPT ODU connected

to Core-E
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/MSS/CORE
/Port#[1-6]/Ch#1
MPT ODU connected

to MSS/CORE
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#1
MPT ODU connected

to MPTACC
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#1
MPT ODU connected

to P8ETH
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
Radio/Dir#1.[5-6]/
MPT-HL connected to
Core-E
MPT-HL connected to
MSS/CORE
RadioLAG#[1-14]
MPT ODU connected

to P8ETH, MPT-HL
P32E1DS1
OC-3
Loss Ethernet
synchronization
messaging channel
8-106
Core-E
MOD300
RadioLAG#[1-14]
MPT ODU, MPT-HL
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT ODU connected

to Core-E
MPT ODU connected

to MSS/CORE
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT ODU connected

to MPTACC
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#1
MPT ODU connected

to P8ETH
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
Radio/Dir#1.[5-6]/
MPT-HL connected to
Core-E
MPT-HL connected to
MSS/CORE
Step 29
TAP-109
3EM23956AM
Table 109-A. Sync alarms

Probable cause
Equipment type
See
Loss of signal
Sync-in/Port#1
Core-E
Step 38
Synchronization signal
fail
Sync-in/Port#1
Core-E
Step 62
MOD300
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
MPT ODU connected

to Core-E
MPT ODU connected

to MSS/CORE
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#1
MPT ODU connected

to MPTACC
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#1
MPT ODU connected

to P8ETH
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#1
MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
MPT-HL connected to
Core-E
MPT ODU connected

to MSS/CORE
RadioLAG#[1-14]
MPT ODU, MPT-HL
P32E1DS1
OC-3
None of the above
IXL-101
Degrade
3
What is the sync source?

If Sync-In, go to step 4.
If Radio port, go to step 9.
If DS1 or OC-3 port, go to step 14.
Sync-In
Verify that the Sync reference source (GPS or other sync source) is functioning
correctly.
Verify the Sync-In cabling and connections to the sync-in port on the Core-E card
(main and spare, if equipped).
Verify the Sync cabling and connections to the sync-out port on sync source.
8-107
TAP-109
3EM23956AM
Did the Degrade Defect alarm clear?

Radio port
10
Verify that no other radio path alarms, such as Demodulator Fail. If radio path alarms
exist, troubleshoot accordingly.
11
Did the other radio path alarms exist and were they cleared?
12
13

DS1 or OC-3 port
14
15
Verify that no LOS alarm exists on the sync reference DS1 or OC-3 port. If a LOS
alarm exists, troubleshoot accordingly.
16
Did the an LOS alarm exist on the sync reference DS1 or OC-3 port and was it cleared?
17
18

19
8-108
Verify that the sync reference DS1 or OC-3 port frequency is correct. If the sync
reference frequency is not correct, troubleshoot accordingly.
TAP-109
20
3EM23956AM
Was a sync reference DS1 port frequency problem identified and was it corrected?
21
22

23
Verify the sync source provisioning at both the sync source and the alarming card is
correct.
24
25

26
Which card is the Degrade Defect alarm declared against?

If Core-E, replace the Core-E. See DLP-103 to replace Core-E.
If MOD300, replace the MOD300. See DLP-107 to replace MOD300.
If MPT ODU replace the MPT ODU. See DLP-115 to replace MPT ODU.
If MPT-HL, replace the MPT-HL. See DLP-108 to replace MPT-HL.
If P32E1DS1, replace the P32E1DS1. See DLP-111 to replace
P32E1DS1.
If SDHACC, replace the SDHACC. See DLP-126 to replace SDHACC.
27
28

Loss Ethernet synchronization messaging channel

29
30
Verify no radio or Ethernet alarms are declared against the radio direction declaring
Loss ESMC.
8-109
TAP-109
3EM23956AM
31
Are radio or Ethernet alarms declared against the radio direction or Ethernet port?
If yes, see IXL-101 to clear radio or Ethernet alarms declared against
the radio direction or Ethernet port.
32
Using Craft Terminal retrieve the provisioned Synchronization SSM values for both
near end and far end of the hop for the alarmed Core-E/MOD300/MPT ODU/MPT-HL.
33
Verify the desired Synchronization SSM value of the microwave hop.
34
Determine which Synchronization SSM value is correct.
35
Reprovision the Synchronization SSM value according to the results of step 34.
36
37
Did the Loss ESMC alarm clear?

Loss of signal
38
Verify Sync reference source (GPS or other sync source) is functioning properly.
39
Verify Sync-In cabling and connections to sync-in port on Core-E card (Main and Spare
if equipped).
40
41

42
Verify sync source provisioning at both the sync source and the alarming card.
43
44

8-110
TAP-109
45
3EM23956AM
46
Is Core-E in a protected system?

47
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Forced EPS switching Core-E will

cause a hit to traffic.
48
Is Core-E card in alarm main or spare?

49
Perform Forced EPS Switch using Craft Terminal.
50
Go to step 52.
51
Perform Lockout EPS Switch using Craft Terminal.
52
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Reseating an unprotected Core-E card

will cause a hit to traffic.
53
Reseat the Core-E card declaring Loss Of Signal.
54
55

56
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing an unprotected Core-E card

will cause a hit to traffic.
57
Replace the Core-E card declaring Loss Of Signal. See DLP-103 to replace Core-E.
58
59

8-111
TAP-109
3EM23956AM
60
Is Core-E in a protected system?

61
Release Forced/Lockout EPS Switch using Craft Terminal.
Synchronization signal fail

62
63
Verify Degrade, Loss ESMC, or Loss of Signal are not also declared against Sync
source declaring Synchronization Signal Fail.
64
Are Degrade, Loss ESMC, or Loss of Signal also declared against synch source?
If yes, See TAP-109 Table 109-A and clear other Sync alarms before
proceeding to step 65.
65
66
Did the Synchronization Signal Fail alarm clear?

67
What is the sync source?

If Sync-in, go to step 68.
If Radio port, go to step 73.
If DS1 or OC-3 port, go to step 80.
Sync-in
68
Verify Sync reference source (GPS or other sync source) is functioning properly.
69
Verify Sync-In cabling and connections to sync-in port on Core-E card (Main and Spare
if equipped).
70
Verify Sync cabling and connections to sync-out port on sync source.
71
8-112
TAP-109
72
3EM23956AM

Radio port
73
74
Verify no radio alarms are declared against the radio direction declaring
Synchronization Signal Fail.
75
Are radio alarms declared against the radio direction?

If yes, see IXL-101 to clear radio alarms declared against the radio
direction.
76
Verify no other radio path alarms (Demodulator Fail, etc.) exist. If radio path alarms
exist, troubleshoot accordingly.
77
Did the other radio path alarms exist and were they cleared?
78
79

DS1 or OC-3 port
80
81
Verify no LOS alarm exists on sync reference DS1 or OC-3 port. If LOS alarm exists,
82
Did the an LOS alarm exist on sync reference DS1 or OC-3 port and was it cleared?
83
8-113
TAP-109
3EM23956AM
84

85
Verify sync reference DS1 or OC-3 port frequency is correct. If sync reference
frequency is not correct, troubleshoot accordingly.
86
Was a sync reference DS1 or OC-3 port frequency problem identified and was it
corrected?
87
88

89
Verify sync source provisioning at both the sync source and the alarming card.
90
91

92
Which card is Synchronization Signal Fail alarm declared against?

If Core-E, replace the Core-E. See DLP-103 to replace the Core-E.
If MOD300, replace the MOD300. See DLP-107 to replace the MOD300.
If MPT ODU replace the MPT ODU. See DLP-115 to replace the
MPT ODU.
If MPT-HL, replace the MPT-HL. See DLP-108 to replace the MPT-HL.
If P32E1DS1, replace the P32E1DS1. See DLP-111 to replace the
P32E1DS1.
If SDHACC, replace the SDHACC. See DLP-126 to replace SDHACC.
93
94

8-114
TAP-109
3EM23956AM
95
96
8-115
3EM23956AM
8-116
TAP-109
TAP-110
3EM23956AM
TAP-110 ATPC loop conditions (MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC)
TAP-110
ATPC loop conditions (MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP,
9558HC)
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear ATPC Loop conditions (ATPC Loop Problem and
Loop Problem) on MOD300, MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU), and MPT-HL.
General
An ATPC Loop Problem alarm indicates that the local transmitter was operating continuously at full
power for 5-minutes, and the transmitter power was reduced to its minimum power setting.
A Loop Problem alarm indicates that loss of ATPC command path between the far end transmitter
and local receiver.
address.
STEP
PROCEDURE
Using the Alarm Monitor, retrieve all alarm.
Review the output. See Table 110-A for information about ATPC Loop conditions.
ATPC loop conditions (MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC)
8-117
TAP-110
3EM23956AM
Table 110-A. ATPC loop conditions

Probable cause
Equipment type
ATPC loop problem
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]

to Core-E
MPT ODU connected

to MSS/CORE
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT ODU connected

to MPTACC
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#1
MPT ODU connected

to P8ETH
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
Radio/Dir#1.[5-6]/
MPT-HL connected to
Core-E
MPT-HL connected to
MSS/CORE
MOD300
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]

to Core-E
MPT ODU connected

to MSS/CORE
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT ODU connected

to MPTACC
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#1
MPT ODU connected

to P8ETH
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
Radio/Dir#1.[5-6]/
MPT-HL connected to
Core-E
MPT-HL connected to
MSS/CORE
Loop problem
None of the above
See
IXL-101
ATPC loop problem

3
Using the Craft Terminal, determine whether the local transmit power is at minimum
power setting.
Is the local transmit power at its minimum power setting?

8-118
TAP-110
3EM23956AM
Troubleshoot the RF path from the near end transmitter to the far end receiver.
Did the ATPC Loop Problem alarm clear?

Loop problem
8
Is the system configured with protection?

10

11
Perform a Forced EPS Switch at the near end transmitter using the Craft Terminal.
12
Perform a Forced HSB Switch at the near end transmitter using Craft Terminal.
13
Perform a Forced Rx Radio Switch at the near end transmitter using Craft Terminal.
14
Go to step 18.
15
Perform a Lockout EPS Switch at the near end transmitter using the Craft Terminal.
16
Perform a Lockout HSB Switch at the near end transmitter using the Craft Terminal.
17
Perform a Lockout Rx Radio Switch at the near end transmitter using the Craft
Terminal.
18
19
Did the Loop Problem alarm clear?

8-119
TAP-110
3EM23956AM
20

procedures.
21
Replace the MPT ODU or MPT-HL in alarm at the near end.

Refer to DLP-115 to replace MPT ODU.
Refer to DLP-108 to replace MPT-HL Transceiver.
22

23

24
Release the Forced EPS Switch at the near end transmitter using the Craft Terminal.
25
Release the Forced HSB Switch at the near end transmitter using the Craft Terminal.
26
Release the Forced Rx Radio Switch at the near end transmitter using the Craft
Terminal.
27
Go to step 31.
28
Release the Lockout EPS Switch at the near end transmitter using the Craft
Terminal.
29
Release the Lockout HSB Switch at the near end transmitter using the Craft
Terminal.
30
Release the Lockout Rx Radio Switch at the near end transmitter using the Craft
Terminal.
31
32
Did the Loop Problem alarm return?

8-120
TAP-110
33
3EM23956AM

34

35

36
Perform a Forced EPS Switch at the far end transmitter using the Craft Terminal.
37
Perform a Forced HSB Switch at the far end transmitter using the Craft Terminal.
38
Perform a Forced Rx Radio Switch at the far end transmitter using the Craft
Terminal.
39
Go to step 43.
40
Perform a Lockout EPS Switch at the far end transmitter using the Craft Terminal.
41
Perform a Lockout HSB Switch at the far end transmitter using the Craft Terminal.
42
Perform a Lockout Rx Radio Switch at the far end transmitter using the Craft
Terminal.
43
44
Did the Loop Problem alarm clear?

45

procedures.
46
Replace the MPT ODU or MPT-HL at the far end.

Refer to DLP-115 to replace MPT ODU.
Refer to DLP-108 to replace MPT-HL Transceiver.
8-121
TAP-110
3EM23956AM
47

48

49
Release the Forced EPS Switch at the far end transmitter using the Craft Terminal.
50
Release the Forced HSB Switch at the far end transmitter using the Craft Terminal.
51
Release the Forced Rx Radio Switch at the far end transmitter using the Craft
Terminal.
52
Go to step 56.
53
Release the Lockout EPS Switch at the far end transmitter using the Craft Terminal.
54
Release the Lockout HSB Switch at the far end transmitter using the Craft Terminal.
55
Release the Lockout Rx Radio Switch at the far end transmitter using the Craft
Terminal.
56
57
Did the Loop Problem alarm return?

58
59
8-122
TAP-111
3EM23956AM
TAP-111 Cable LOS
TAP-111
Cable LOS
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear radio alarms on the MOD300.
General
A Cable LOS alarm indicates that a bad cable or cable connection at the IF in/out connector on the
MOD300.
The DemXPIC LOS condition indicates that a bad or missing cable or cable connection at the XPIC
connector on the MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU).
address.
STEP
PROCEDURE
Review the output. See Table 111-A for information about clear radio alarms.
Table 111-A. Clear radio alarms
Probable cause
Equipment type
See
Cable LOS
r01s1/board#[3-8]
MOD300
Step 3
DemXPIC LOS
r01s1/b1[1-6]/daughter#04

to Core-E,
MSS/CORE
r01s1/b[3-8][1-4]/daughter#04
MPT ODU connected

to MPTACC
r01s[3-8][5-8]b1/daughter#04
MPT ODU connected

to P8ETH
None of the above
IXL-101
Cable LOS
3
Cable LOS
Inspect the indoor IF cable is properly terminated, securely connected, and the run is
not damaged.
8-123
TAP-111
3EM23956AM
Was the indoor IF cable not properly terminated, connected, or the run was damaged?
Repair or replace the indoor IF cable.
Did the Cable LOS alarm clear?


9
10
Verify that the MOD300 card in alarm status is Standby.

Is the MOD300 card in alarm status Standby?
11

12
Is the MOD300 card in alarm main or spare?

13
14
15
16
Go to step 21.
17
18
19
8-124
Cable LOS
TAP-111
3EM23956AM
20
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Physically reseating the MOD300 in an

unprotected radio hop causes a loss of traffic on ALL facilities that are associated
with the MOD300 reseat. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local
21
Physically reseat the MOD300 card in alarm and wait for the status LED to turn
steady green or amber.
22
23

24
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing the MOD300 in an

with the MOD300 being replaced. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per
25
Replace the MOD300. See DLP-107 to replace MOD300.
26
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Manually switching traffic causes a

27
28

29
Inspect the outdoor IF cable is properly terminated, securely connected, and the run
is not damaged.
30
Was the outdoor IF cable not properly terminated, connected, or the run was
damaged?
31
Repair or replace the outdoor IF cable.
32
Cable LOS
8-125
TAP-111
3EM23956AM
33

34

35
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Releasing Forced/Lockout switching

may cause a disruption to traffic.
36
Was the MOD300 declaring Cable LOS alarm the main or spare?
37
Release the Forced EPS Switch using the Craft Terminal.
38
Release the Forced HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal.
39
Release the Forced Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal.
40
Go to step 75.
41
Release the Lockout EPS Switch using the Craft Terminal.
42
Release the Lockout HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal.
43
Release the Lockout Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal.
44
Go to step 75.
DemXPIC LOS
45
Inspect the XPIC cable is properly terminated, securely connected, and the cable is not
damaged.
46
Is the XPIC cable not properly terminated, connected, or the cable is damaged?
47
Repair or replace the XPIC cable.
48
8-126
Cable LOS
TAP-111
49
3EM23956AM
Did the DemXPIC LOS alarm clear?

50
Reseat the XPIC cable on the horizontal and vertical MPT ODU.
51
52

53
Replace the XPIC cable between the horizontal and vertical MPT ODU.
54
55

56
Reseat the XPIC module on horizontal MPT ODU. See DLP-122 to reseat the XPIC
module.
57
58

59
Reseat the XPIC module on the vertical MPT ODU. See DLP-122 to reseat the XPIC
module.
60
61

62
Replace the XPIC module on the horizontal MPT ODU. See DLP-122 to replace the
XPIC module.
63
Cable LOS
8-127
TAP-111
3EM23956AM
64

65
Replace the XPIC module on vertical MPT ODU. See DLP-122 to replace the XPIC
module.
66
67

68
Replace the horizontal MPT ODU. See DLP-115 to replace the MPT ODU.
69
70

71
Replace the vertical MPT ODU. See DLP-115 to replace the MPT ODU.
72
73

74
75
8-128
Cable LOS
TAP-112
3EM23956AM
TAP-112 Loss of alignment (MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC)
TAP-112
Loss of alignment (MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC)
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear Loss Of Alignment alarm on the MOD300,
MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU), and MPT-HL.
General
A Loss Of Alignment alarm indicates that a delay/loss of alignment between the main and protect
RF paths is detected.
address.
STEP
PROCEDURE
Review the output. See Table 112-A for information about Loss of Alignment alarms.
Table 112-A. Loss of alignment alarms
Probable cause
Equipment type
Loss of alignment

to MPTACC
Hitless/Dir#1.[1-6]
MPT ODU connected

to Core-E,
MSS/CORE
MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
Hitless/Dir#[3-8]
MOD300
None of the above
See
IXL-101
Loss of alignment
3
Verify that the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300 in alarm status is Standby.
8-129
TAP-112
3EM23956AM
Is the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300 in alarm status Standby?


Is the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300 in alarm main or spare?

10
Go to step 14.
11
12
13
14

If MPT ODU go to step 15.
If MOD300, go to step 41.
MPT ODU
15
Remove power to the MPT ODU. If powered through the MPTACC or MSS-1 shelf
MSS/CORE, use the Craft Terminal to disable power, and then reprovision power. If
externally powered, disconnect power to the MPT ODU in alarm and then reconnect
power.
16
17
Did the Loss Of Alignment alarm clear?

8-130
TAP-112
3EM23956AM
18

traffic on ALL facilities supported by the Core-E, MPTACC card or MSS-1 shelf,
associated with the facility in alarm. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per
19
Reseat the Core-E, MPTACC card, or MSS-1 shelf MSS/CORE that is associated with
MPT ODU in alarm.
For the MSS-1 shelf, locate the fuses protecting the A and B battery feeds to the MSS-1
shelf and remove. Wait ten seconds. Then install the fuses protecting the A and B
battery feeds.
20
Wait for the status LED to turn steady amber.
21
22

23
Which card reported the Loss Of Alignment alarm?

If MPTACC, see DLP-114 to replace MPTACC card.
If Core-E, see DLP-103 to replace Core-E card.
If MSS-1 shelf MSS/CORE, see DLP-128 to replace MSS-1 shelf.
24
25
26

27
28
29

MPT-HL
30
Position the MPT-HL Transceiver PA switch to the OFF 0 position.
8-131
TAP-112
3EM23956AM
31
Remove the fuse in the PDU that supplies battery power to the MPT-HL transceiver.
32
Install the fuse in the PDU that supplies battery power to the MPT-HL transceiver.
33
Position the MPT-HL Transceiver PA switch to the ON 1 position.
34
35
36

37
Replace the MPT-HL in alarm. See DLP-108 to replace the MPT-HL.
38
39
40

MOD300
41
Physically reseat the MOD300 card in alarm.
42
43
44

45
Replace the MOD300 card in alarm. See DLP-107 to replace the MOD300.
46
47
8-132
TAP-112
48
3EM23956AM

49
Replace the ODU300 that is associated with MOD300 in alarm. See DLP-109 to
replace the ODU300.
50
51

52
53
54
55
Go to step 57.
56
57
8-133
3EM23956AM
8-134
TAP-112
TAP-113
3EM23956AM
TAP-113 Loss of frame (MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC)
TAP-113
Loss of frame (MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC)
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear Loss of Frame radio alarms on the MOD300,
MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU), and MPT-HL.
General
A Loss Of Frame alarm indicates the BER has increased to the point that frames are being lost.
Probable causes include far end transmitter problems, RF path problems, or local card failures.
address.
STEP
PROCEDURE
Review the output. See Table 113-A for information about Loss of Frame radio alarms.
Table 113-A. Loss of frame radio alarms
Probable cause
Equipment type
Loss of frame
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]

to Core-E
MPT ODU connected

to MSS/CORE
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT ODU connected

to MPTACC
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#1
MPT ODU connected

to P8ETH
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
Radio/Dir#1.[5-6]/
MPT-HL connected to
Core-E
MPT-HL connected to
MSS/CORE
MOD300
None of the above
See
IXL-101
8-135
TAP-113
3EM23956AM
Loss of frame
3
Verify that there are no weather-related problems.
Do weather-related problems exist?

If yes, wait for the weather to clear and recheck alarms. Go to step 140.


10
11

12

Unprotected radio configuration
13

8-136
TAP-113
14
3EM23956AM

MPT ODU
15
Is the MPT ODU in alarm supported by the Core-E or P8ETH card or MSS-1 Shelf
MSS/Core?
16
Is there a second radio channel, at the local and/or at the far end, supported by the
MPTACC associated with the MPT ODU in alarm?
17
Is the second radio channel, at the local or at the far end, error-free and alarm free?
18
Reseat the local MPTACC that is associated with the MPT ODU in alarm.
19
20
21

22
Reseat the far end MPTACC that is associated with the MPT ODU in alarm.
23
24
25

8-137
TAP-113
3EM23956AM
26
Replace the local MPTACC that is associated with the MPT ODU in alarm. See
DLP-114 to replace the MPTACC.
27
28
29

30
Replace the far end MPTACC that is associated with the MPT ODU in alarm. See
31
32
33

34
Replace the local MPT ODU in alarm. See DLP-115 to replace the MPT ODU.
35
36

37
Replace the far end MPT ODU in alarm. See DLP-115 to replace the MPT ODU.
38
39

MOD300
40
8-138
Reseat the local MOD300 card.
TAP-113
41
3EM23956AM

42
Reseat the far end MOD300 card.
43

44
Replace the local MOD300. See DLP-107 to replace the MOD300.
45

46
Replace the far end MOD300. See DLP-107 to replace the MOD300.
47

48
Replace the local ODU300. See DLP-109 to replace the ODU300.
49

50
Replace the far end ODU300. See DLP-109 to replace the ODU300.
51

MPT-HL
52
Position the local MPT-HL Transceiver PA switch to the OFF 0 position.
53
Remove fuse in PDU suppling battery power to local MPT-HL Transceiver.
54
Install fuse in PDU suppling battery power to local MPT-HL Transceiver.
8-139
TAP-113
3EM23956AM
55
Position the local MPT-HL Transceiver PA switch to the ON 1 position.
56

57
Position the far end MPT-HL Transceiver PA switch to the OFF 0 position.
58
Remove fuse in PDU suppling battery power to far end MPT-HL Transceiver.
59
Install fuse in PDU suppling battery power to far end MPT-HL Transceiver.
60
Position the far end MPT-HL Transceiver PA switch to the ON 1 position.
61

62
Replace the local MPT-HL. See DLP-108 to replace the MPT-HL Transceiver.
63

64
Replace the far end MPT-HL. See DLP-108 to replace the MPT-HL Transceiver.
65

Protected radio configuration
66
Determine the status of the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/MOD300 declaring the Loss Of

Frame alarm.
If Active, go to step 67.
If Standby, go to step 68.
67

8-140
TAP-113
68
3EM23956AM
Is the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/MOD300 declaring the Loss Of Frame alarm the main or
spare?
69
Perform a Forced Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal on the local
MPT ODU/MPT-HL/MOD300.
70
Perform a Forced Equipment Switch using the Craft Terminal on the local
71
Perform a Forced HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal on the far end
72
Perform a Forced Equipment Switch using the Craft Terminal on the far end
73
Go to step 78.
74
Perform a Lockout Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal on the local
75
Perform a Lockout Equipment Switch using the Craft Terminal on the local
76
Perform Lockout HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal on the far end
77
Perform a Lockout Equipment Switch using the Craft Terminal on the far end
78

MOD300
79
Reseat the local MOD300 card that is declaring the Loss Of Frame alarm.
80

81
reseat far end MOD300 card.
8-141
TAP-113
3EM23956AM
82

83
Replace the local MOD300 that is declaring the Loss Of Frame alarm. See DLP-107 to
replace the MOD300.
84

85
Replace the far end MOD300 associated with the MOD300 that is declaring the Loss
Of Frame alarm. See DLP-107 to replace the MOD300.
86

87
Replace the local ODU300 associated with the MOD300 that is declaring Loss Of
Frame alarm. See DLP-109 to replace the ODU300.
88

89
Replace the far end ODU300 associated with the MOD300 that is declaring the Loss
Of Frame alarm. See DLP-109 to replace the ODU300.
90

MPT ODU
91
Is the MPT ODU in alarm supported by the Core-E or P8ETH card or MSS-1 Shelf
MSS/Core?
8-142
TAP-113
92
3EM23956AM
Is there a second radio channel, at the local and/or at the far end, supported by the
MPTACC that is associated with the MPT ODU in alarm?
93
Is the second radio channel, at the local or at the far end, error-free and alarm free?
94
Reseat the local MPTACC that is associated with the MPT ODU in alarm.
95
96
97

98
Reseat the far end MPTACC that is associated with MPT ODU in alarm.
99
100
101

102
Replace the local MPTACC that is associated with MPT ODU in alarm. See DLP-114
to replace the MPTACC.
103
104
105

106
Replace the far end MPTACC that is associated with MPT ODU in alarm. See
8-143
TAP-113
3EM23956AM
107
108
109

110
Replace the local MPT ODU in alarm. See DLP-115 to replace the MPT ODU.
111
112

113
Replace the far end MPT ODU in alarm. See DLP-115 to replace the MPT ODU.
114
115

MPT-HL
116
Position the local MPT-HL Transceiver PA switch to the OFF 0 position.
117
Remove the fuse in the PDU that is suppling battery power to the local MPT-HL
transceiver.
118
Install the fuse in the PDU that is suppling battery power to the local MPT-HL
transceiver.
119
Position the local MPT-HL Transceiver PA switch to the ON 1 position.
120

121
Position the far end MPT-HL Transceiver PA switch to the OFF 0 position.
122
Remove the fuse in the PDU that is suppling battery power to the far end MPT-HL
transceiver.
8-144
TAP-113
3EM23956AM
123
Install the fuse in the PDU that is suppling battery power to the far end MPT-HL
transceiver.
124
Position the far end MPT-HL Transceiver PA switch to the ON 1 position.
125

126
Replace the local MPT-HL. See DLP-108 to replace the MPT-HL Transceiver.
127

128
Replace the far end MPT-HL. See DLP-108 to replace the MPT-HL Transceiver.
129

130
Verify antenna is aligned.
131
Is the antenna aligned?

If no, align the antenna. See 9500 MPR-A Turn-Up manual
132
133

134
Release the Forced/Lockout Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal on the local
135
Release the Forced/Lockout Equipment Switch using the Craft Terminal on the local
136
Release the Forced/Lockout HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal on the far end
8-145
TAP-113
3EM23956AM
137
Release the Forced/Lockout Equipment Switch using the Craft Terminal on the far
end MPT ODU/MPT-HL/MOD300.
138
Go to step 140.
139
140
8-146
TAP-114
3EM23956AM
TAP-114 RPS path fail (MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC)
TAP-114
RPS path fail (MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC)
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear an RPS Path Fail alarm on the
MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU) and MPT-HL.
General
An RPS Path Fail alarm that is declared against the MPT-HL indicates that a failure is detected on
the RPS coupler port between the MPT-HL protection pair.
An RPS Path Fail alarm against the MPT ODU indicates that a communication failure is detected
between the MPT ODUs; only reported for MPT ODUs working in 1+1 configuration with Virtual
Protection.
address.
STEP
PROCEDURE
Review the output. See Table 114-A for RPS Path Fail alarms.
Table 114-A. RPS path fail alarms
Probable cause
Equipment type
RPS path fail

to MPTACC
RadioProt/Dir#1[1-6]
MPT ODU connected

to Core-E,
MSS/CORE
MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
None of the above
See
IXL-101
RPS path fail

3
Using the Craft Terminal, determine which MPT ODU/MPT-HL status is Standby.
8-147
TAP-114
3EM23956AM

MPT ODU
Retrieve the alarms for the local end of the radio direction using the Alarm Monitor.
Determine all radio alarms that are declared against the radio direction declaring RPS
Path Fail and troubleshoot accordingly.
Did RPS Path Fail alarm clear?

Retrieve the alarms for the far end of the radio direction using Alarm Monitor.
10
Determine all radio alarms declared against the radio direction declaring RPS Path
Fail and troubleshoot accordingly.
11
12
Did the RPS Path Fail alarm clear?

MPT-HL
13
Is the MPT-HL card in alarm main or spare?

14
15
16
17
Go to step 21.
18
8-148
TAP-114
3EM23956AM
19
20
21
On the MPT-HL with status of Standby, position the PA switch to the OFF 0 position.
22
Remove the fuse in the PDU that is suppling battery power to the MPT-HL with a
status of Standby.
23
Install the fuse in the PDU that is suppling battery power to MPT-HL with a status of
Standby.
24
On the MPT-HL with status of Standby, position the PA switch to the ON 1 position.
25
26
27

28
Replace the MPT-HL with status of Standby. See DLP-108 to replace MPT-HL.
29
30
31

32

33
Is the MPT-HL card in alarm main or spare?

34
35
36
8-149
TAP-114
3EM23956AM
37
Go to step 41.
38
39
40
41
On the MPT-HL with status of Standby, position the PA switch to the OFF 0 position.
42
Remove the fuse in the PDU that is suppling the battery power to the MPT-HL with a
status of Standby.
43
Install the use in the PDU that is suppling battery power to the MPT-HL with a status
of Standby.
44
On the MPT-HL with status of Standby, position the PA switch to the ON 1 position.
45
46
47

48
Replace MPT-HL with status of Standby. See DLP-108 to replace the MPT-HL.
49
50
51

52

53
54
55
8-150
TAP-114
3EM23956AM
56
Go to step 58.
57
58
8-151
3EM23956AM
8-152
TAP-114
TAP-115
3EM23956AM
TAP-115 Rx fail (MOD300)
TAP-115
Rx fail (MOD300)
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear Rx Fail alarms on MOD300.
General
An Rx Fail alarm indicates that a failure is detected in the receive direction of the MOD300 RF
receiver and includes no input signal.
address.
STEP
PROCEDURE
Review the output. See Table 115-A for information about Rx Fail alarms.
Table 115-A. Rx fail alarms
Probable cause
Equipment type
See
Rx fail
MOD300
Step 3
None of the above
IXL-101
Rx fail
3
Verify there are no weather-related problems existing.
Do weather-related problems exist?

If yes, wait for weather to clear and recheck alarms. Go to step 72.

Rx fail (MOD300)
8-153
TAP-115
3EM23956AM
Is RSL above RX threshold?

10
11
Did the Rx Fail alarm clear?

12

13

14
Is the MOD300 in alarm the main or spare?

15
Perform a Forced EPS Switch using the Craft Terminal on the local MOD300.
16
Perform a Forced HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal on the local MOD300.
17
Perform a Forced Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal on the local MOD300.
18
Go to step 24.
19
Perform Lockout EPS Switch using the Craft Terminal on the local MOD300.
20
Perform Lockout HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal on the local MOD300.
21
Perform Lockout Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal on the local MOD300.
22
Go to step 24.
8-154
Rx fail (MOD300)
TAP-115
3EM23956AM
23
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Reseat the MOD300 in an unprotected

radio hop causes a loss of traffic on ALL facilities that are associated with the
MOD300 reseat. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local practices and
procedures.
24
Reseat the MOD300 card in alarm. Physically remove the card and reinsert.
25
26

27

28

29
Is the MOD300 in alarm main or spare?

30
Perform a Forced EPS Switch using the Craft Terminal on the far end MOD300.
31
Perform a Forced HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal on the far end MOD300.
32
Perform a Forced Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal on the far end MOD300.
33
Go to step 38.
34
Perform Lockout EPS Switch using the Craft Terminal on the far end MOD300.
35
Perform Lockout HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal on the far end MOD300.
36
Perform Lockout Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal on the far end MOD300.
37
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. reseating the MOD300 in an

with the MOD300 reseat. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local
38
Reseat the far end MOD300 card associated with the card in alarm. Physically remove
Rx fail (MOD300)
8-155
TAP-115
3EM23956AM
39
40

41

42
Replace the near end MOD300. See DLP-107 to replace the MOD300.
43
44

45

46
Replace the far end MOD300. See DLP-107 to replace the MOD300.
47
48

49
Replace the near end ODU300. See DLP-109 to replace the ODU300.
50
51
Did Rx Fail alarm clear?

52
Replace the far end ODU300. See DLP-109 to replace the ODU300.
53
8-156
Rx fail (MOD300)
TAP-115
54
3EM23956AM
Did Loss Of Frame alarm clear?

55
Verify antenna is aligned.
56
Is antenna aligned?
If no, align the antenna. See the 9500 MPR-A Turn-Up Manual
57
58

59

60

61
Release the Forced/Lockout EPS Switch using the Craft Terminal on the far end
MOD300.
62
Release the Forced/Lockout HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal on the far end
MOD300.
63
Release the Forced/Lockout Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal on the far end
MOD300.
64
Go to step 66.
65

66

Rx fail (MOD300)
8-157
3EM23956AM
TAP-115
67
Release the Forced/Lockout EPS Switch using the Craft Terminal on the local
MOD300.
68
Release the Forced/Lockout HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal on the local
MOD300.
69
Release the Forced/Lockout Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal on the local
MOD300.
70
Go to step 72.
71
72
8-158
Rx fail (MOD300)
TAP-116
3EM23956AM
TAP-116 Housekeeping alarms
TAP-116
Housekeeping alarms
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear Housekeeping alarms (External Point Input) on
AUX card.
General
Housekeeping Alarm inputs are external alarms that are monitored by the NE. Housekeeping
alarms are provisionable for alarm state active low or high.
Housekeeping Alarm Input [1-6] indicates that the external alarm point is active, improperly
configured, or improperly provisioned.
address.
STEP
PROCEDURE
Review the output. See Table 116-A for information about Housekeeping alarms.
Table 116-A. Housekeeping alarms
Operation
Name
Equipment type
See
Housekeeping alarm
ExtPt/Input#[1-6]
AUX
Step 3
ExtPt/Input#[11-14]
Fan
ExtPt/Input#[11-14]
MSS-1
None of the above
IXL-101
Housekeeping alarm
3
Verify the equipment that is associated with housekeeping alarm input which is in the
alarm state.
Housekeeping alarms
8-159
TAP-116
3EM23956AM
Is the equipment that is associated with housekeeping alarm input [1-6] in the alarm
state?
Resolve the problem with external equipment generating the housekeeping alarm.
Did the Housekeeping Alarm Input [1-6] clear?

Verify the Housekeeping Alarm Input provisioning for housekeeping alarm input in
alarm.
Correct the provisioning as required.
10

11
Verify the Housekeeping Alarm Input configuration for housekeeping alarm input in
alarm.
12
Correct the configuration as required.
13
14

15
16
8-160
Housekeeping alarms
TAP-117
3EM23956AM
TAP-117 LAG alarms (Core-E, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, ODU300, 9558HC, MSS-1 shelf Core)
TAP-117
LAG alarms (Core-E, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, ODU300, 9558HC,
MSS-1 shelf Core)
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear LAG alarms on the Core-E,
MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU), MPT-HL, ODU300, and MSS-1 shelf Core.
General
A Degrade alarm indicates that a member of an Ethernet or Radio LAG group has no activity. A
Degrade is declared when the number of active ports in the LAG are greater than zero and less than
the LAG size.
A Loss of Signal alarm indicates that ALL members of an Ethernet or Radio LAG have no activity.
A Loss of Signal is declared when the number of active ports in the LAG equals zero.
address.
STEP
PROCEDURE
Using the Alarm Monitor, retrieve ALL alarms.
Review the output. See Table 117-A for information about LAG alarms.
Table 117-A. LAG alarms
Probable cause
Equipment type
See
Degrade
EthLAG#[1-14]
Core-E, MSS/CORE
Step 3
RadioLAG#[1-14]
MPT ODU, MPT-HL,

ODU300
EthLAG#[1-14]
Core-E, MSS/CORE
RadioLAG#[1-14]
MPT ODU, MPT-HL,

ODU300
Loss of signal
None of the above
Step 8
IXL-101
Degrade
3
LAG alarms (Core-E, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, ODU300, 9558HC, MSS-1 shelf Core)
8-161
TAP-117
3EM23956AM
Identify the alarms that are declared against members of the LAG group. If alarms
exists, see IXL-101 and troubleshoot accordingly.
Did the alarms exist on the LAG group members and were they cleared?
Did the Degrade alarm clear?

Loss of signal
8
Identify the alarms that are declared against members of the LAG group. If alarms
exists, see IXL-101 and troubleshoot accordingly.
10
Did the alarms exist on the LAG members and were they cleared?
11
12
Did the Loss of Signal alarm clear?

13
14
8-162
LAG alarms (Core-E, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, ODU300, 9558HC, MSS-1 shelf Core)
TAP-118
3EM23956AM
TAP-118 Ethernet connectivity fault management alarms
TAP-118
Ethernet connectivity fault management alarms
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management
(ECFM) alarms.
General
An Eth OAM Loss of Continuity alarm indicates that a MEP received no CCM frames from a peer
MEP during an interval equal to 3.5 times the CCM transmission interval configured at the MEP.
This is caused by a failure in the network located between the local and far end of the MEP.
An Eth OAM MisMerge Condition alarm indicates that a MEP received a CCM frame with expected
MD Level but unexpected MA ID. The MA ID is the MD Name appended with the MA Format.
An Eth OAM Remote Defect Indication alarm indicates that a MEP received a CCM frame with the
RDI field set.
An Eth OAM Unexpected Level alarm indicates that a MEP received a CCM frame with the incorrect
MD Level. The MEP expects to receive a MD level [0-7] either equal to or higher than the provisioned
MD Level.
An Eth OAM UnexpectedMEPID alarm indicates that received MEPID value is different than the
expected MEPID [1-8191]. The MEP expects to receive the provisioned MEPID.
Eth OAM Unexpected Period alarm indicates that received MEP Transmission Interval value is
different than the expected MEP Transmission Interval [300-hundred-hertz, ten-ms, hundred-ms,
one-sec, ten-sec, one-min, ten-min]. The MEP expects to receive the same value inside the CCM frame
as the provisioned Transmission Interval.
address.
See the 9500 MPR-A Operation and Administration (PN 3EM23954AM) WT CLI Tool Reference
Guide for information about how to execute the commands that are described in this procedure.
STEP
PROCEDURE
Review the output. See Table 118-A for information about ECFM alarms.
8-163
TAP-118
3EM23956AM
Table 118-A. ECFM alarms

Probable cause
Equipment type
See
Eth OAM loss of

continuity
[1-512]#MEPID[1-8191]
Core-E, MSS/CORE
Step 3
Eth OAM MisMerge

condition
[1-512]#MEPID[1-8191]
Core-E, MSS/CORE
Step 7
Eth OAM remote defect

indication
[1-512]#MEPID[1-8191]
Core-E, MSS/CORE
Step 12
Eth OAM unexpected

level
[1-512]#MEPID[1-8191]
Core-E, MSS/CORE
Step 17
Eth OAM
unexpectedMEPID
[1-512]#MEPID[1-8191]
Core-E, MSS/CORE
Step 22
Eth OAM unexpected

period
[1-512]#MEPID[1-8191]
Core-E, MSS/CORE
Step 27
None of the above
IXL-101
Eth OAM loss of continuity

3
Locate the failure in the network.

If MIPs were created on the MEP, use the Link Trace command using WT CLI Tool.
See WT CLI Tool Reference Guide for more information.
Otherwise, Retrieve the alarms using the Alarm Monitor and locate alarms associated
with the path between the local and far end of the MEP.
Were the alarms identified and cleared between the local and far end of the MEP?
Did the Eth OAM Loss of Continuity Condition alarm clear?

Eth OAM MisMerge condition

7
Retrieve MA ID for both ends of the MEP using WT CLI Tool. See WT CLI Tool
Reference Guide for more information.
Determine which MA ID value(s) are incorrect.
8-164
TAP-118
9
3EM23956AM
Reprovision the MA ID value(s) according to the results of step 8.
10
11
Did the Eth OAM MisMerge Condition alarm clear?

Eth OAM remote defect indication

12
Retrieve the alarms on the far end of the MEP using Alarm Monitor.
13
Check the far end for the one or more of the above RDI set conditions and troubleshoot
accordingly.
14
Were the RDI set condition cleared at the far end of the MEP?
15
16
Did the Eth OAM Remote Defect Indication Level alarm clear?
Eth OAM unexpected level

17
Retrieve the MD Level for both ends of the MEP using WT CLI Tool. See WT CLI Tool
18
Determine which MD Level values are incorrect.
19
Reprovision the MD Level values according to the results of step 18.
20
21
Did the Eth OAM Unexpected Level alarm clear?

Eth OAM unexpectedMEPID

22
Retrieve MEPID for both ends of the MEP using WT CLI Tool. See WT CLI Tool
8-165
TAP-118
3EM23956AM
23
Determine which MEPID value(s) are incorrect.
24
Reprovision the MEPID value(s) according to the results of step 23.
25
26
Did the Eth OAM UnexpectedMEPID alarm clear?

Eth OAM unexpected period

27
Retrieve the MEP Transmission Interval for both ends using WT CLI Tool. See WT
CLI Tool Reference Guide for more information.
28
Determine which MEP Transmission Interval values are incorrect.
29
Reprovision the MEP Transmission Interval according to the results of step 28.
NOTE: Eth OAM Unexpected Period alarm requires 3.5 times the MEP Transmission
Interval to clear the alarm. For MEP Transmission Interval provisioned one-sec, the
alarm requires 3.5 seconds to clear. For MEP Transmission Interval provisioned 10min, the alarm requires 35 minutes to clear.
30
31
Did the Eth OAM Unexpected Period alarm clear?

32
33
8-166
TAP-119
3EM23956AM
TAP-119 Clock failure (MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC)
TAP-119
Clock failure (MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC)
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear Clock Failure alarm on the
MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU) and MPT-HL.
General
A Clock Failure alarm indicates that the MPT ODU or MPT-HL is unable to lock the air Tx symbol
rate to the NE clock.
address.
STEP
PROCEDURE
Review the output. See Table 119-A for information about Clock Failure alarms.
Table 119-A. Clock failure alarm
Probable cause
Equipment type
Clock failure
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#[0-1]

to Core-E
MPT ODU connected

to MSS/CORE
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT ODU connected

to MPTACC
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#1
MPT ODU connected

to P8ETH
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
Radio/Dir#1.[5-6]/
MPT-HL connected to
Core-E
MPT-HL connected to
MSS/CORE
None of the above
See
IXL-101
8-167
TAP-119
3EM23956AM
Clock failure
3

Unprotected Radio Configuration
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Power Cycling an in-service MPT ODU

or MPT-HL in an unprotected link causes a loss of traffic on ALL facilities that are
associated with the MPT ODU or MPT-HL in alarm. Schedule appropriate
maintenance window per local practices and procedures.
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing the MPT ODU or MPT-HL in

an unprotected link causes a loss of traffic on ALL facilities that are associated with
the MPT ODU or MPT-HL in alarm. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per

Verify that it is appropriate to proceed with clear Clock Failure procedure or

appropriate maintenance window is scheduled per local practices and procedures.
Is it appropriate to proceed with clear Clock Failure procedure?


10
Is the MPT ODU in alarm associated with the Core-E/P8ETH card or MSS-1 shelf
Core?
MPT ODU connected to Core-E/P8ETH card or MSS-1 shelf Core
11
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Power Cycling the MPT ODU in an

the MPT ODU in alarm. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local
8-168
TAP-119
12
3EM23956AM

If MPT ODU is powered through MSS-1 shelf Core PFoE port, power cycle the
MPT ODU. From the MPT Main View, Power Source tab, Settings tab, disable power
source. Wait 10 seconds and then reapply power source.
If MPT ODU is powered through a power injector card/power injector box, disconnect
the Ethernet+Data cable connection to the MPT ODU at the power injector card/box.
Wait 10 seconds and reconnect.
If MPT ODU is powered with connection to MPT Power Unit/MPT Extended Power
Unit, disconnect the power cable connection to the MPT ODU at the MPT Power
Unit/MPT Extended Power Unit. Wait 10 seconds and reconnect.
13
Dialog Failure is declared against the MPT ODU. Wait for Dialog Failure condition to
clear before proceeding.
14
15
Did the Clock Failure alarm clear?

16
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing the MPT ODU in an

unprotected link causes a loss of traffic on ALL facilities that are associated with
17
18
19

MPT ODU connected to MPTACC card
20
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Power Cycling the MPT ODU in an

8-169
TAP-119
3EM23956AM
21
Power cycle the MPT ODU. From the MPT Main View, Power Source tab, Settings tab,
disable power source. Wait 10 seconds and then reapply power source.
22
23
24

25

26
27
28

MPT-HL
29
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Power Cycling the MPT-HL in an

the MPT-HL in alarm. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local practices
and procedures.
30
31
Remove the fuse in the PDU that is suppling battery power to the MPT-HL
transceiver.
32
Install the fuse in PDU that is suppling battery power to the MPT-HL transceiver.
33
34
8-170
TAP-119
35
3EM23956AM

36
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing the MPT-HL in an

the MPT-HL in alarm. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local practices
and procedures.
37
Replace the local MPT-HL. See DLP-108 to replace the MPT-HL transceiver.
38

Protected radio configuration
39

40
Determine the status of MPT ODU/MPT-HL declaring Clock Failure alarm.

If Active, go to step 41.
If Standby, go to step 42.
41

42

43
Is the MPT ODU/MPT-HL declaring Clock Failure alarm the main or spare?
44
45
Perform a Forced Equipment Switch using the Craft Terminal.
46
47
Go to step 51.
8-171
TAP-119
3EM23956AM
48
49
Perform a Lockout Equipment Switch using the Craft Terminal.
50
51

MPT ODU
52

If MPT ODU is powered through MPTACC card or MSS-1 shelf Core PFoE port, power
cycle the MPT ODU. From the MPT Main View, Power Source tab, Settings tab,
disable power source. Wait 10 seconds and then reapply power source.
If MPT ODU is powered through a Power Injector Card/Power Injector Box/MPT
Extended Power Unit, disconnect the Ethernet+Data cable connection to the
MPT ODU at the power injector card/box. Wait 10 seconds and reconnect.
If MPT ODU is powered with connection to MPT Power Unit/MPT Extended Power
Unit, disconnect the power cable connection to the MPT ODU at the MPT Power
Unit/MPT Extended Power Unit. Wait 10 seconds and reconnect.
53
54
55

56
Replace the MPT ODU in alarm. See DLP-115 to replace the MPT ODU.
57
8-172
TAP-119
58
3EM23956AM

MPT-HL
59
60
Remove the fuse in the PDU that is suppling battery power to the MPT-HL
transceiver.
61
Install the fuse in the PDU that is suppling battery power to the MPT-HL transceiver.
62
63
64

65
Replace the MPT-HL. See DLP-108 to replace MPT-HL Transceiver.
66
67

68
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Releasing Forced/Lockout

EPS/HSB/RX Radio switch causes a disruption to traffic.
69
70
Release the Forced/Lockout Equipment Switch using the Craft Terminal.
71
72
Go to step 74.
73
74
8-173
3EM23956AM
8-174
TAP-119
TAP-120
3EM23956AM
TAP-120 Duplicate Address Detected alarms
TAP-120
Duplicate Address Detected alarms
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear Duplicate Address Detected alarms.
General
Duplicate address detected alarm is raised when a duplicate IPv6 address is detected on a TMN LAN
interface. The following TMN LAN interfaces are checked for a duplicate address:
IPv6 Global Unicast address assigned to:
TMN Local Ethernet interface
TMN User Ethernet Port 4 interface
TMN In-Band port #1/2 interface
TMN-RF Point-to-Point interface
NOTE: If access to the NE with the incorrect IPv6 address is through the TMN port in alarm,
communication with the NE will be lost when the address is changed. The TMN address must be
changed locally or a different TMN interface must be established to communicate with the NE.
NOTE: When a different TMN interface is not available o communicate with the NE with the incorrect
IPv6 address, it is required to correct the IPv6 address on-site.
address.
STEP
PROCEDURE
Review the output. See Table 120-A for information about Duplicate address detected
alarms.
8-175
TAP-120
3EM23956AM
Table 120-A. Duplicate address detected alarms

Probable cause
Equipment type
See
Duplicate address
detected
TMNEthernet/MngtPort
Core-E/TMN MGMT
Port
Step 3
TMNEthernet/Port#4
Core-E/TMN Port#4
Step 25
TMNInBand#[1-2]
Core-E/TMN In-Band
Port [1-2]
Step 47
PPP-IP/RF#[3-8]
MOD300
Step 63
PPP-IP/RF#1[1-6]
MPT ODU connected

to Core-E,
MSS/CORE
PPP-IP/RF#[3-8][1-4]
MPT ODU connected

to MPTACC
PPP-IP/RF#[3-8][5-8]
MPT ODU connected

to P8ETH
PPP-IP/RF#[3-8][5-8]
MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
PPP-IP/RF#1[5-6]
MPT-HL connected to
Core-E, MSS/CORE
PPP-IP/RF/LAG#[1-14]
MPT ODU, MPT-HL,

ODU
Duplicate address
detected
None of the above
IXL-101
Duplicate address detected

TMN Ethernet MGMT Port
3
Using the Craft Terminal, retrieve the provisioned IPv6 TMN Ethernet Configuration
value for the NE declaring duplicate address detected alarm.
Verify the desired IPv6 TMN Ethernet Configuration value for the NE according to
site engineering documentation.
Is the provisioned IPv6 TMN Ethernet value correct?

CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. If access to the NE with the incorrect IPv6
address is through the TMN port in alarm, communication with the NE will be lost when the
address is changed. The TMN address must be changed locally or a different TMN
interface must be established to communicate with the NE.
8-176
TAP-120
3EM23956AM
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. When a different TMN interface is not

available to communicate with the NE with the incorrect IPv6 address, it is required to
correct the IPv6 address on-site. If the IPv6 address is corrected remotely, communication
with the NE will be lost.
Reprovision IPv6 TMN Ethernet Configuration value for the NE according to site
engineering documentation.
Was the IPv6 address changed on-site?

10
Disconnect the TMN Ethernet interface and reconnect.
11
Go to step 14
12
Disable TMN Ethernet Configuration port in alarm.
13
Enable TMN Ethernet Configuration port in alarm.
14
15
Did the duplicate address detected alarm clear?

16
Verify the desired IPv6 TMN Ethernet Configuration value for the far end NE
according to site engineering documentation.
17
Reprovision the far end NE with the correct IPv6 address.
18
Was the IPv6 address changed on-site at the near end or far end NE?
19
20
Go to step 23
21
Disable TMN Ethernet Configuration port in alarm.
22
Enable TMN Ethernet Configuration port in alarm.
23
8-177
TAP-120
3EM23956AM
24

Port #4 TMN Ethernet

25
Using the Craft Terminal, retrieve the provisioned IPv6 Port #4 TMN Ethernet
Configuration value for the NE declaring duplicate address detected alarm.
26
Verify the desired IPv6 Port #4 TMN Ethernet Configuration value for the NE
27
Is the provisioned IPv6 Port #4 TMN Ethernet value correct?

28
address is through the Port #4 TMN port in alarm, communication with the NE will be lost
when the address is changed. The TMN address must be changed locally or a different
TMN interface must be established to communicate with the NE.
29

30
Reprovision IPv6 Port #4 TMN Ethernet Configuration value for the NE according to
site engineering documentation.
31
Was the IPv6 address changed on-site?

32
Disconnect the Port #4 TMN Ethernet interface and reconnect.
33
Go to step 36
34
Disable Port #4 TMN Ethernet Configuration port in alarm.
35
Enable Port #4 TMN Ethernet Configuration port in alarm.
36
8-178
TAP-120
37
3EM23956AM

38
Verify the desired IPv6 Port #4 TMN Ethernet Configuration value for the far end NE
39
40
Was the IPv6 address changed on-site at the near end or far end NE?
41
42
Go to step 45
43
Disable Port #4 TMN Ethernet Configuration port.
44
Enable Port #4 TMN Ethernet Configuration port.
45
46

TMN In-Band Port #1/2

47
Using the Craft Terminal, retrieve the provisioned IPv6 TMN In-Band Port #1/2 value
for the NE declaring duplicate address detected alarm.
48
Verify the desired IPv6 TMN In-Band Port #1/2 value for the NE according to site
49
Is the provisioned IPv6 TMN In-Band Port #1/2 value correct?

50
address is through the TMN In-Band Port #1/2 in alarm, communication with the NE will be
lost when the address is changed. The TMN In-Band Port #1/2 address must be changed
locally or a different TMN interface must be established to communicate with the NE.
8-179
TAP-120
3EM23956AM
51

52
Reprovision IPv6 TMN In-Band Port #1/2 value for the NE according to site
53
Disable TMN In-Band Port #1/2.
54
Enable TMN In-Band Port #1/2.
55
56

57
Verify the desired IPv6 TMN In-Band Port #1/2 Ethernet Configuration value for the
far end NE according to site engineering documentation.
58
59
Disable TMN In-Band Port #1/2.
60
Enable TMN In-Band Port #1/2.
61
62

Duplicate address detected

PPP IP/RF Port
63
Using the Craft Terminal, retrieve the provisioned Local IPv6 Address value for the
NE declaring duplicate address detected alarm.
64
Verify the desired Local IPv6 Address value for the NE according to site engineering
documentation.
8-180
TAP-120
65
3EM23956AM
Is the provisioned Local IPv6 Address value correct?

66
Reprovision Local IPv6 Address value for the NE according to site engineering
documentation.
67
68

69
Verify the desired Local IPv6 Address value for the far end NE according to site
70
Reprovision the far end NE Local IPv6 Address value with the correct IPv6 address.
71

NOTE: After the far end Local IPv6 Address is corrected, a PPP Fail condition will be
raised and clear the duplicate address detected alarm at the site declaring duplicate
address detected.
72

73
Verify the near end PPP-RF port provisioning.
74
Was the near end PPP-RF port provisioned correctly?

75
Reprovision near end PPP-RF port provisioning.
76
Disable near end PPP RF port.
77
Enable near end PPP RF port.
78
8-181
TAP-120
3EM23956AM
79

80
Verify the far end PPP-RF port provisioning.
81
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. If the far end PPP-RF port provisioning is
corrected/disabled remotely, communication with the far end NE will be lost and on-site
provisioning will be required to re-establish communications.
82
Was the far end PPP-RF port provisioned correctly?

83
Reprovision far end PPP-RF port provisioning.
84
Disable far end PPP RF port.
85
Enable far end PPP RF port.
86
87

88
89
8-182
DLP-100
3EM23956AM
Detailed Level Procedures (DLPs)

DLP-100 Mechanical card removal and installation
DLP-100
Purpose
This procedure describes how to remove and install cards mechanically in the 9500 MPR-A.
General
This procedure addresses only mechanical card removal and installation.
See the 9500 MPR-A Product Information (PN 3EM23952AM) to determine card location and type.
STEP
PROCEDURE
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Modules can be installed or removed with

bay power on. Hazardous electrical potentials are present; use extreme care when
installing or removing cards with power on.

unprotected link causes loss of traffic. Removing an Active card in a protected link
requires switching the traffic onto the Standby card. Do applicable trouble clearing
and logical replacement procedures before proceeding with this procedure.
WARNING: Possibility of equipment damage. Modules contain static-sensitive

devices. These devices can be damaged by static discharge. See introduction
for special handling instructions.
Which procedure to perform?

If card removal, go to step 5.
If card installation, go to step 9.
Card removal
5
Loosen the screws on the front of the card to be replaced.
Unlock the extraction tabs on the front of the card to be replaced.
Remove the card from the slot.
Go to step 16.
9-1
DLP-100
3EM23956AM
Card installation
9
Install the new card in the slot.
10
Lock the extraction tabs on the front of the new card.
11
Align the retaining screws.
12
Start both screws before tightening
13
WARNING: Possibility of equipment damage. Failure to start both screws

prior to tightening may cause screws to be cross threaded and possibly
resulting in broken retaining screws.
14
Tighten the screws on the front of the new card.
15
Return to the point in the DLP that referenced this procedure.
16
9-2
DLP-101
3EM23956AM
DLP-101 MPT-HL transceiver air filter replacement
DLP-101
Purpose
This procedure describes how to check and replace a dust filter on the MPT-HL Transceiver.
General
STEP
PROCEDURE
WARNING: Possibility of equipment damage. Possibility of damage to

equipment. Modules contain static-sensitive devices. These devices can be
damaged by static discharge. See the introduction for special handling
instructions.
Loosen the screws securing the dust filter and cover to the front of the MPT-HL
Transceiver.
Remove the filter from the MPT-HL Transceiver.
Is the dust filter dirty?

If the dust filter is dirty, go to step 5.
If the dust filter is clean, go to step 6.
Replace filter with a clean filter.
Install the filter and cover on to the MPT-HL transceiver.
Tighten the screws securing the dust filter and cover to the MPT-HL transceiver.
9-3
3EM23956AM
9-4
DLP-101
DLP-102
3EM23956AM
DLP-102 SFP replacement
DLP-102
SFP replacement
Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace an SFP on a Core-E, MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC
(MPT ODU), MPT-HL, P8ETH, SDHACC cards or MSS-1 shelf.
General
address.
STEP
PROCEDURE
WARNING: Possibility of equipment damage. Modules contain static-sensitive

devices. These devices can be damaged by static discharge. See the
introduction for special handling instructions.
Ensure that the extractor for the SFP, PN 3AL 81424 AAAA, is available.
Is the equipment protected?

Is the SFP port to be replaced in the Standby state?


Is the SFP port to be replaced the main or spare?

Go to step 11.
SFP replacement
9-5
DLP-102
3EM23956AM
10
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing SFP in an unprotected

system causes a loss of traffic on ALL facilities that are associated with the SFP
procedures.
11
Remove the fibers from the SFP to be replaced.
12
Insert the extractor into the SFP to be replaced. The extractor locks into place when it
is secure.
13
Push the lever in on the left side of the extractor to unlock the SFP from the socket.
14
Gently pull the SFP out of the slot and remove it from the card.
15
Place the new SFP into the appropriate SFP slot.
16
Reconnect the fibers to the new SFP.
17
Ensure that there are no alarms declared against the SFP or its associated equipment.
If there are alarms, see IXL-101.
If there are no alarms, go to step 18.
18
Ensure that traffic is running.

If traffic is running, go to step 19.
If traffic is not running, go to step 23.
19
Is equipment protected?
20

21
22
Go to step 24.
23
24
9-6
SFP replacement
DLP-103
3EM23956AM
DLP-103 Core switching module (Core-E) replacement
DLP-103
Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace a Core Switching Module (Core-E) in an MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf.
Perquisites
Although this procedure is typically used to replace a failed (inactive) component, always verify the
component state before removal.
General
On the Core-E flash card(s) the NE configuration and license key data is stored.
When replacing the Core-E card on an NE in the protected core configuration, and the active Core-E
card is operating properly, the flash card on the replacement Core-E card will synchronize to the NE
database stored on the active Core-E card. In this configuration a flash card from another shelf type
or Core position could be used on the replacement Core-E card if necessary.
When replacing the Core-E card on an NE in the unprotected core configuration, it is mandatory to
transfer the flash card from the replaced Core-E card to the replacement Core-E card. Failure to
transfer the flash card will result in a loss of the NE database and a system that may not boot up
properly. At a minimum ALL NE configuration will be lost and the NE configuration previously
stored on the flash card will be applied to the NE.
In this procedure, the MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf main Core-E is resident in slot 1. The protect Core-E is
resident in slot 2 if equipped.
All MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf plug-ins can be removed and installed with power applied.
STEP
PROCEDURE
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Circuit packs can be installed or removed

with the bay power on. Hazardous electrical potentials are present; use extreme
care when installing or removing circuit packs with the power on.
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. All slots must be filled with a

peripheral plug-in card or a blank panel. Failure to do so compromises the EMC
integrity and cooling air from the fan.
9-7
DLP-103
3EM23956AM

requires switching the traffic onto the Standby card.
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. If the Main Core-E in slot 1 fails,

traffic/services protection and control platform protection switches to the protected
(spare) Core-E in slot 2. Loopbacks and all other manual operations, such as
Forced/Lockout switch and Tx Mute, is lost (deactivated). Alarms previously active
are newly detected and reported using notification, with a new time stamp.
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. If the main Core-E fails, traffic and
platform data will switch to the protected Core-E automatically. Do not remove the
power from the NE during the removal and replacement of the failed main Core-E.
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Do not swap the main Core-E flash
card with the protect Core-E flash card which results in a system that cannot
properly boot-up.
WARNING: Possibility of equipment damage. Circuit packs contain

static-sensitive devices. These devices can be damaged by static discharge. See
the introduction for special handling instructions.
WARNING: Possibility of equipment damage. When installing a plug-in,

ensure its backplane connector is correctly engaged before applying sufficient
pressure to bring the plug-in panel flush with the front panel. Improper
alignment can result in damaged pins on the backplane connector and/or
damage to the plug-in connector.
WARNING: Possibility of equipment damage. Plug-ins must be withdrawn

and inserted using their finger-grip fastener pulls. Never withdraw or insert
using attached cables. Pulling on the cables may damage the cable, plug-in
connector, and/or plug-in card connector attachment.
10

11
Is the Core-E that is to be replaced in a protected system?

9-8
DLP-103
3EM23956AM
Protected Core-E replacement procedures

12
Is the power still applied to the MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf where the Core-E is to be replaced
is equipped?
Shelf power still applied to MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf

13
Verify the status of the other Core-E card (the Core-E card not being replaced) is
normal and communicates properly.
14
Is the status of the other Core-E card normal and communicates properly?
15
Is the Core-E to be replaced the main or spare?

16
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Forced EPS switch may cause a hit to
traffic.
17
On the Protection Schemes tab, perform a Forced EPS Switch Main Core-E.
18
Go to step 20.
19
On the Protection Schemes tab, perform a Lockout of Spare Core-E.
20
Verify that the Core-E to be replaced status is Standby.
21
Remove the Core-E to be replaced. See DLP-100 for information about how to remove
the card.
22
Remove the flash card from the Core-E card removed in step 21 and install into the
replacement Core-E card.
23

24
Install the replacement Core-E into shelf. See DLP-100 for information about how to
install the card.
25
9-9
DLP-103
3EM23956AM
26
Verify the communication with the replacement Core-E using the Craft Terminal.
27
Verify the replacement Core-E status using the Craft Terminal.
28
Does the replacement Core-E communicate properly and is the status is normal?
29
Is replaced Core-E the main or spare?

30
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Releasing Forced EPS switch may

31
On the Protection Schemes tab, release the Forced Switch Main Core-E.
32
Go to step 67.
33
On the Protection Schemes tab, release Lockout of Spare Core-E.
34
Go to step 67.
Shelf power has been turned off

35
the card.
36
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Do not swap the active Core-E flash
card (i,e, the Core-E card which is not being replaced) with a flash card from another
Core-E card.
37
38
Turn on shelf power and wait for the installed Core-E status LED to turn steady green.
39

40
install the card.
41
9-10
DLP-103
3EM23956AM
42
43
44
Does replacement Core-E communicate properly and is the status is normal?

Unprotected Core-E replacement procedure

45
Is power still applied to MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf where the Core-E to be replaced is

equipped?
Shelf power still applied to MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf

46

unprotected system causes loss of traffic.
47
Remove Core-E to be replaced. See DLP-100 for information about how to remove the
card.
48
card with a flash card from a different Core-E card.
49
50

51
install the card.
52
Wait for the status LED to turn steady green.
53
54
55
Does the replacement Core-E communicate properly and is the status is normal?
9-11
DLP-103
3EM23956AM

56
the card.
57
card with the a flash card from a different Core-E card.
58
59

60
install the card.
61
Turn on the shelf power.
62
Wait for the replaced Core-E status LED to turn steady green.
63
64
65
Does the replacement Core-E communicate properly and is the status normal?
66
67
9-12
DLP-104
3EM23956AM
DLP-104 Core switching module (Core-E) flash card replacement
DLP-104
Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace a Flash Card located on the Core Switching Module
(Core-E).
Prerequisites
Although this procedure is typically used to replace a failed (inactive) component, always verify
General
In this procedure, the main Core-E is resident in slot 1. The protect Core-E is resident in slot 2 if
equipped.
For a Non Protected system, reboot for the Main Flash Card which can take up to three minutes.
Replacement Flash Card must be pre-loaded with the MAC Address and the RMU Serial Number
associated with the NE.
Record the MAC Address and the RMU Serial Number using the Craft Terminal. Use this
information to obtain a replacement Flash Card.
MAC Address (located on the Systems Setting screen and in the configuration file,
see Bridge Address)
RMU Serial number (located on the SW License screen)
NOTE: If the MAC Address and RMU Serial Number information is not accessible using the Craft
Terminal, it is also located on the label adhered to the flash card.
Verify that the RMU Serial Number loaded on the replacement flash card meets the following
compatibility rules:
Main flash card (Core-E slot 1) and spare flash card (Core-E slot 2) must be loaded
with the same RMU Serial number.
License capacity must be the same across a hop
MAC Address of the replacement Flash Card must match the MAC Address of the
Flash Card to be replaced
Do not swap the main Core-E flash card with the protect Core-E flash card which results in a system
that cannot properly boot-up.
All plug-ins can be removed and installed with power applied.
9-13
3EM23956AM
DLP-104
STEP
PROCEDURE

with bay power on. Hazardous electrical potentials are present; use extreme care
when installing or removing circuit packs with power on.

CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Removing an In-Service card in an

CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. If the Main Core-E in slot 1 fails,

traffic/services protection and control platform protection switches to the protected
(spare) Core-E in slot 2. Loopbacks and all other manual operations, such as
Forced/Lockout switch and Tx Mute and tx mute, are lost (deactivated). Alarms
previously active are newly detected and reported using notification, with a new
time stamp.
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. If the main Core-E fails, traffic and
platform data switches to the protected Core-E automatically. Do not remove power
from the NE during the removal and replacement of the failed main Core-E.
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. In a Protected system, reboot for both

Main and Spare Flash Cards can take up to 15 minutes. The flashing status green
LED indicates that a reboot is in progress. Status LED turns solid green at
completion of reboot.
properly boot-up.
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing the Flash Card with one
which is not correctly programmed with the correct MAC Address and RMU serial
number may result in a loss of traffic. STOP this procedure immediately. Perform
this procedure in its entirety after an appropriate replacement Flash Card is
available.
9-14
DLP-104
3EM23956AM

10

11

12

13
Verify that the replacement Flash Card and the Flash Card to be replaced are loaded
with the correct MAC Address and RMU Serial number:
MAC Address (located on the Systems Setting screen and in the configuration
file, see Bridge Address)
RMU Serial number (located on the SW License screen)
NOTE: If this information is not available using the Craft Terminal, it is also located
on the label adhered to the flash card itself.
14
Does the MAC Address and RMU Serial numbers match?

15
Record the MAC Address and RMU Serial numbers. Use this information to obtain an
appropriate replacement Flash Card.
16
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing the Flash Card with one
which is not programmed with the correct MAC Address and RMU Serial number
results in a loss of traffic. Perform the following activities:
a.
STOP this procedure immediately.
b.
Procure a replacement Flash Card loaded with the correct MAC Address and RMU Serial
number.
c.
Perform this procedure in its entirety after an appropriate replacement Flash Card is
available.
9-15
DLP-104
3EM23956AM
17
Is the flash card on the Core-E to be replaced in a protected system?

Flash card replacement on protected Core-E configuration

18
Is the power still applied to MSS-4/8 shelf where flash card on the Core-E to be
replaced is equipped?
Shelf power still applied to MSS-4/8 shelf

19
Verify that the status of the other Core-E card (the Core-E card on which the flash card
is not being replaced) is normal and communicates properly.
20
Is status of the other Core-E card normal and communicates properly?

21
Is the Core-E equipped with flash card to be replaced the main or spare?
If Main, go to step 22.
If Spare, go to step 25.
22
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Forced EPS switch may cause a

23
On the Protection Schemes tab, perform a Forced EPS Switch Main Core-E.
24
Go to step 26.
25
On the Protection Schemes tab, perform a Lockout EPS of Spare Core-E.
26
Verify the Core-E that is equipped with flash card to be replaced status is Standby.
27
Remove the Core-E that is equipped with flash card to be replaced. See DLP-100 for
information about how to remove the card.
28
Remove the flash card from the Core-E.
29
properly boot-up.
9-16
DLP-104
3EM23956AM
30
Install the replacement flash card onto the Core-E.
31

32
Install the Core-E into shelf. See DLP-100 for information about how to install the
card.
33
34
Verify the communication with the Core-E with replacement flash card using the
Craft Terminal.
35
Verify the Core-E with replacement flash card status using the Craft Terminal.
36
Does the Core-E with replacement flash card communicate properly and status
normal?
37
Is replaced Core-E the main or spare?

38
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Releasing Forced EPS switch may

39
On the Protection Schemes tab, release the Forced EPS Switch Main Core-E.
40
Go to step 77.
41
On the Protection Schemes tab, release Lockout EPS of Spare Core-E.
42
Go to step 77.

43
Remove the Core-E equipped with flash card to be replaced. See DLP-100 for
information about how to remove the card.
44
45
card with the protect Core-E flash card. This will result in a system that will not
properly boot-up.
9-17
DLP-104
3EM23956AM
46
Install replacement flash card onto the Core-E.
47
Turn on shelf power and wait for installed Core-E status LED to turn steady green
48

prior to tightening may cause screw(s) to be cross threaded and possibly
49
Install Core-E into shelf. See DLP-100 for information about how to remove the card.
50
51
Verify communication with the Core-E with replacement flash card using the Craft
Terminal.
52
Verify Core-E with replacement flash card status using the Craft Terminal.
53
Does Core-E with replacement flash card communicate properly and status normal?
Unprotected Core-E replacement procedure

54
Is power still applied to MSS-4/8 shelf where flash card on Core-E to be replaced is
equipped?
Shelf power still applied to MSS-8 shelf

55

unprotected link will cause loss of traffic.
56
Remove Core-E equipped with flash card to be replaced. See DLP-100 for detailed
steps to remove card.
57
58
card with the protect Core-E flash card. This will result in a system that will not
properly boot-up.
59
Install replacement flash card onto the Core-E.
9-18
DLP-104
3EM23956AM
60

prior to tightening may cause screw(s) to be cross threaded and possibly
61
Install Core-E into shelf. See DLP-100 for information about how to remove the card.
62
63
Verify communication with the Core-E with replacement flash card using the Craft
Terminal.
64
65
Does Core-E with replacement flash card communicate properly and status normal?

66
Remove Core-E equipped with flash card to be replaced. See DLP-100 for information
about how to remove the card.
67
68
properly boot-up.
69
Install the replacement flash card onto the Core-E.
70

71
Install the Core-E into shelf. See DLP-100 for information about how to remove the
card.
72
Turn on the shelf power and wait for the status LED to turn steady green.
73
Verify the communication with the Core-E with replacement flash card using the
Craft Terminal.
74
9-19
DLP-104
3EM23956AM
75
Does the Core-E with replacement flash card communicate properly and status
normal?
76
77
9-20
DLP-105
3EM23956AM
DLP-105 Ethernet access switch (P8ETH) replacement
DLP-105
Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace an Ethernet Access Switch (P8ETH) circuit pack.
Prerequisites
General
In this procedure, the main P8ETH is resident in slots 3, 5, or 7. The spare P8ETH is resident in slots
4, 6, or 8 if equipped.
STEP
PROCEDURE

CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. All slots must be filled with either a

CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Only MPT-HL transceiver Ethernet

traffic may be protected within the 9500 MPR-A. All other Ethernet traffic is
unprotected within the 9500 MPR-A. Ethernet traffic switching is
controlled/performed outside the 9500 MPR-A if available. If no protection is
available, Ethernet traffic is lost after a failure or removal of the P8ETH.
9-21
DLP-105
3EM23956AM
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. All MPT ODU traffic is unprotected

within the 9500 MPR-A. All Ethernet traffic supported by an MPT ODU is lost after a
failure or removal of the P8ETH.
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. In protected MPT-HL transceiver

Ethernet configurations, MPT-HL transceiver Ethernet traffic switching is controlled
by the 9500 MPR-A. Working and protect MPT-HL transceiver Ethernet signals are
provisioned on a per channel basis. If the P8ETH card in slot 3, 5, or 7 fails, working
MPT-HL transceiver Ethernet traffic switches to the protect P8ETH SFP port in slot
4, 6, or 8. If the P8ETH card in slot 4, 6, or 8 fails, working MPT-HL transceiver
Ethernet traffic switches to the protect P8ETH SFP port in slot 3, 5, or 7.
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. In unprotected Ethernet

configurations, Ethernet traffic switching is controlled/performed outside the
9500 MPR-A if available. If no protection is available, Ethernet traffic is lost after a
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. In protected P8ETH configurations

configured with 1+1 revertive operation, inserting the main P8ETH card, may cause
a disruption to the protected traffic. To prevent an impact to protect traffic, always
perform a Forced EPS, HSB, and RX Radio to spare before inserting the main P8ETH
card.

10

11

12

13
Is the P8ETH to be replaced in a protected system?

9-22
DLP-105
3EM23956AM
Protected P8ETH replacement procedures

14
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Only MPT-HL transceiver Ethernet

traffic is protected within the 9500 MPR-A. All other P8ETH Ethernet traffic is
unprotected within the 9500 MPR-A. Ethernet traffic switching is
available, Ethernet traffic will be lost upon a failure or removal of the P8ETH.
15

16
What is the role of P8ETH card being replaced the main or spare?
17
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Forced EPS switching traffic will

cause a hit to traffic.
18

card.
19
Perform a Forced EPS Switch Main, MPT-HL transceiver port to Spare MPT-HL
transceiver port.
20
Perform a Forced HSB Switch Main, MPT-HL transceiver port to Spare MPT-HL
transceiver port.
21
Perform a Forced RX Radio Switch Main, MPT-HL transceiver port to Spare MPT-HL
transceiver port.
22
Repeat steps 19 to 21 until all of the MPT-HL Transceiver ports are Forced Switch to
Spare, then go to step 27.
23
Perform a Lockout EPS of Spare MPT-HL transceiver port.
24
Perform a Lockout HSB of Spare MPT-HL transceiver port.
25
Perform a Lockout Rx Radio of Spare MPT-HL transceiver port.
26
Repeat steps 23 to 25 until all MPT-HL Transceiver ports are Lockout of Spare, then
go to step 27.
9-23
DLP-105
3EM23956AM
27
Verify that all MPT-HL transceiver ports status is Standby.
28
Verify that all cable connections to the P8ETH card to be replaced are properly
labeled.
29
Disconnect all cables that are connected to the front of the P8ETH.
30
Remove P8ETH to be replaced. See DLP-100 for information about how to remove
card.
31
Remove the SFPs from the P8ETH.
32
Install the SFPs into the replacement P8ETH.
33

card.
34

35
Install the replacement P8ETH into the shelf. See DLP-100 for information about how
to install the card.
36
37
Connect all cables to the front of the P8ETH that were disconnected in step 29.
38
Verify the communication with the replacement P8ETH using the Craft Terminal.
39
Verify that the status is normal for the replacement P8ETH.
40
Verify that the Links are up for all Ethernet ports that are associated with the
replacement P8ETH.
41
Does the replacement P8ETH communicate properly? Is the status normal? Are all
Ethernet port Links up?
42
9-24
Verify the replacement P8ETH alarms and capable of carrying Ethernet traffic using
DLP-105
43
3EM23956AM
Is the replacement P8ETH status normal and is it capable of carrying Ethernet traffic?
44
Is the replaced P8ETH Main or Spare?

If Main, go to step 45.
If Spare, go to step 49.
45
Release the Forced EPS Switch Main, MPT-HL transceiver port to Spare MPT-HL
transceiver port.
46
Release the Forced HSB Switch Main, MPT-HL transceiver port to Spare MPT-HL
transceiver port.
47
Release the Forced Rx Radio Switch Main, MPT-HL transceiver port to Spare
MPT-HL transceiver port.
48
Repeat steps 45 to 47 until all MPT-HL Transceiver ports are released Forced Switch
Main, then go to step 72.
49
Release the Lockout EPS Spare MPT-HL transceiver port.
50
Release the Lockout HSB Spare MPT-HL transceiver port.
51
Release the Lockout Rx Radio Spare MPT-HL transceiver port.
52
Repeat steps 49 to 51 until all MPT-HL Transceiver ports are released Lockout of
Spare, then go to step 72.
Unprotected P8ETH replacement procedure

53
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. In unprotected P8ETH configurations,

ALL Ethernet traffic is lost upon removal of the SFP connection to the P8ETH.
54
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. All other P8ETH Ethernet traffic is

unprotected within the 9500 MPR-A. All other Ethernet traffic switching is
available, Ethernet traffic is lost after removal of the Ethernet cabling.
55

56
Verify that all cable connections to the P8ETH card to be replaced are properly
labeled.
9-25
DLP-105
3EM23956AM
57
Disconnect the Ethernet cables, one at a time.
58
Remove the P8ETH to be replaced. See DLP-100 for information about how to remove
card.
59
Remove the SFPs from P8ETH to be replaced.
60
Install the SFPs into the replacement P8ETH.
61

62
Install the replacement P8ETH into the shelf. See DLP-100 for information about how
to install the card.
63
64
Connect all cables to the front of the P8ETH that you disconnected in step 57.
65
Verify the communication with the replacement P8ETH using the Craft Terminal.
66
Verify the status is normal for the replacement P8ETH.
67
Verify the Link is up for all Ethernet ports associated with the replacement P8ETH.
68
Does the replacement P8ETH communicate properly? Is the status normal? Are all
Ethernet port Links up?
69
Verify the replacement P8ETH alarms and capable of carrying Ethernet traffic using
70
Is the replacement P8ETH status normal, and capable of carrying Ethernet traffic?
71
72
9-26
DLP-106
3EM23956AM
DLP-106 MSS-4/8 shelf FAN replacement
DLP-106
Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace a MSS-4/8 shelf FAN card.
Prerequisites
A replacement FAN card must be available on-site before starting this procedure.
General
STEP
PROCEDURE



Confirm the replacement MSS-4/8 FAN card is available and of the same type
installed in the MSS-4/8 shelf.
Disconnect the housekeeping alarm and Control cable if present.
Remove the FAN card. See DLP-100 for information about how to remove the card.

Install the replacement FAN card. See DLP-100 for information about how to install
the card.
9-27
DLP-106
3EM23956AM
Connect housekeeping alarm and Control cable if removed in step 5.
10
Verify that the FAN card is operating properly.
11
Verify the communication with the replacement FAN card.
12
Does the FAN card operate properly, communicate properly, and the status is normal?
13
14
9-28
DLP-107
3EM23956AM
DLP-107 MOD300 (radio modem) replacement
DLP-107
Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace a MOD300.
Prerequisites
General
The Radio (MOD300) cards can be installed in any of the universal slots (3 to 8).
The MSS-8 can be configured with a maximum of six optional MOD300 cards; three protected cards,
six non-protected cards, or a combination of protected and non-protected cards.
In protected radios, the main MOD300 is resident in slots 3, 5, and/or 7. The protect MOD300 is
resident in slots 4, 6, and/or 8. The main and protected cards must be plugged in side-by-side.
In an unprotected radio, performing the MOD300 removal and replacement procedure causes loss of
traffic. In a protected system, the procedure is an in-service but not a hitless procedure.
Disconnecting the MOD300 from the MSS-8 backplane removes power to the ODU300, and can cause
a disruption on traffic.
STEP
PROCEDURE

9-29
DLP-107
3EM23956AM

CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. In protected radio configurations, the

Main MOD300 cards reside in slots 3, 5, and/or 7. The spare MOD300 cards reside in
slots 4, 6, and/or 8.


equipment. Circuit packs contain static-sensitive devices. These devices can
be damaged by static discharge. See the Introduction for special handling
instructions.


MOD300 replacement procedures

9
Is the MOD300 to be replaced in a protected system?

10

11
Is MOD300 to be replaced the main or spare?

12
13
14
9-30
DLP-107
3EM23956AM
15
Go to step 19.
16
17
18
19
Verify that the MOD300 to be replaced status is Standby.
20

21
Remove the MOD300 to be replaced.
22
Disconnect the IF in/out cable.
23
Install the replacement MOD300 into shelf but do not seat the card at this time.
24
Connect the IF in/out cable.
25
Seat the replacement MOD300 into shelf and wait for the status LED to turn steady
green or amber.
26
Verify the replacement MOD300 is free of alarms using the Alarm Monitor.
27
Is the replacement MOD300 status LED to turn steady green or amber and free of
alarms?
28
Is the replacement MOD300 in a protected system?

29
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Releasing Forced EPS switch causes

a disruption to traffic.
30
Release the Forced/Lockout EPS Switch using Craft the Terminal.
31
32
33
Go to step 35.
9-31
DLP-107
3EM23956AM
34
35
9-32
DLP-108
3EM23956AM
DLP-108 MPT-HL transceiver replacement
DLP-108
Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace a Microwave Packet Transport (MPT-HL) transceiver.
Prerequisites
General
The MPT-HL transceiver card can be installed in either MPT-HL shelf slots 1 or 2.
The MPT-HL shelf can be configured with a maximum of two MPT-HL Transceiver cards; one
protected pair, or two unprotected MPT-HL transceiver cards.
In protected radios, the main MPT-HL transceiver is resident in slot 1. The spare MPT-HL
Transceiver is resident in slot 2.
In an unprotected radio, performing a MPT-HL transceiver removal and replacement procedure
causes loss of traffic. In a protected system, the procedure is an in-service but not a hitless procedure.
STEP
PROCEDURE

CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Removing an in-service MPT-HL

transceiver in an unprotected link causes loss of traffic. Removing an in-service
card in a protected MPT-HL transceiver requires switching the traffic onto the spare
channel.
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. In protected MPT-HL Transceiver

configurations, the Main MPT-HL transceiver reside in slot 1. The spare MPT-HL
transceiver reside in slot 2.
9-33
DLP-108
3EM23956AM
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. This is an out of service procedure for

unprotected configurations. To avoid disruption of traffic on protected
configurations, switch traffic to Standby MPT-HL transceiver.

the Introduction for special handling instructions.



MPT-HL transceiver replacement procedures

9
Is the MPT-HL transceiver to be replaced in a protected system?

10
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Forced EPS and HSB switching traffic
11
Is the MPT-HL transceiver to be replaced the main or spare?

12
13
14
15
Go to step 19.
16
9-34
DLP-108
3EM23956AM
17
18
19
Verify that the MPT-HL Transceiver to be replaced status is Standby.
20
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Removing power to an in-service card

in an unprotected link causes loss of traffic.
21
Position the MPT-HL transceiver PA switch to the OFF 0 position.
22
Remove the fuse in PDU that is suppling battery power to the MPT-HL transceiver.
23
Disconnect the power cable.
24
Disconnect the GigE cable (optical or Molex) from the SFP port on the MPT-HL
transceiver.
25
Remove SFP from MPT-HL transceiver, if required.
26
Loosen the screws securing the MPT-HL transceiver to the MPT-HL shelf. See
DLP-100 for information about how to remove the card.
27
Pull out on the MPT-HL transceiver to disconnect from the shelf backplane
connectors.
28
Remove the MPT-HL transceiver from the shelf.
29
Slowly push replacement MPT-HL transceiver into shelf until contact is made with
alignment pins/backplane connectors. See DLP-100 for information about how to
install the card.
30
Apply steady pressure and push in on replacement MPT-HL transceiver until

MPT-HL transceiver is seated in backplane connectors.
31

32
Tighten the screws securing MPT-HL Transceiver to MPT-HL shelf.
33
Verify that the RF cables on shelf backplane connectors on rear of shelf have not been
loosened by installation of the MPT-HL Transceiver. Tighten cables to no more than
19 in lbs, if required.
34
Install the SFP into SFP receptacle (if required).
9-35
DLP-108
3EM23956AM
35
Connect the GigE cable (optical or Molex) into the SFP port on MPT-HL transceiver.
36
Connect the power cable.
37
Verify that the MPT-HL transceiver PA switch is in the OFF 0 position.
38
Install the fuse in the PDU that is suppling battery power to MPT-HL transceiver.
39
Position the MPT-HL transceiver PA switch to the ON 1 position.
40
Ensure that the MPT-HL transceiver PA (Power Amplifier) switch is in the On (1)
position.
41
Wait for the MPT-HL transceiver to finish booting.
42
Verify that the replacement MPT-HL transceiver status LED turns steady green or
amber.
43
Verify that the replacement MPT-HL transceiver is alarm free using the Alarm
Monitor.
44
Is replacement MPT-HL transceiver status LED turns steady green or amber, and
alarm free?
45
Is the replacement MPT-HL transceiver in a protected system?

46
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Releasing Forced EPS and HSB switch
47
48
49
50
Go to step 52.
51
52
9-36
DLP-109
3EM23956AM
DLP-109 ODU300 replacement
DLP-109
ODU300 replacement
Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace a Outdoor Unit (ODU300).
Prerequisites
Before starting, verify that the replacement ODU300 matches the failed ODU300 using the following
procedure.
1.
Obtain part number of failed ODU300 on inventory screen.
2.
Verify part number of replacement ODU300, located on identification label,

matches part number of failed ODU300.
General
In protected radios, the associated main MOD300 is resident in slots 3, 5, and/or 7. The associated
protect MOD300 is resident in slots 4, 6, and/or 8. The main and protected cards must be plugged in
side-by-side.
Disconnecting the MOD300 from the MSS-8 backplane removes power to the ODU300, and can cause
a disruption on traffic.
In an unprotected radio, removing MOD300 causes loss of traffic. In a protected radio, removing
MOD300 can cause a disruption on traffic.
See the 9500 MPR-A Installation Practices (PN 3EM23953AM) Charts 10 and 11 for information
about how to physically remove and install the ODU300 to be replaced in this procedure.
STEP
1
PROCEDURE
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Exposure to energy radiated at microwave
frequencies can cause eye injury and eventual blindness. Do not look directly into
any unterminated waveguide port.
ODU300 replacement
9-37
DLP-109
3EM23956AM

CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. In an unprotected radio, performing the

ODU300 removal and replacement procedure will cause loss of traffic. In a protected
system the procedure is an in-service but not a hitless procedure. Disconnecting the
MOD300 from the MSS-8 backplane to remove power to the ODU300 can cause a
disruption on traffic.
WARNING: Possibility of equipment damage. Failure to disconnect power to

the ODU300 by disconnecting the associated MOD300 card from the MSS-8
backplane can result in damage to the MOD300 card and can cause damage
to the ODU300.

instructions.
Is the ODU300 to be replaced in a protected system?

Is the MOD300 associated with the ODU300 to be replaced the main or spare?
Go to step 11.
10
Perform Lockout EPS Switch using Craft Terminal.
11
Verify that the MOD300 card, associated with the failed ODU300 status is Standby.
12
On the MSS-8, pull out on the MOD300 card, associated with the failed ODU300, to
disconnect the MOD300 card from the MSS-8 backplane.
13
Disconnect the IF in/out cable.

NOTE: The procedure to Remove an ODU300 is dependent on the ODU300 mounting and
how the ODU300 is configured. The procedure to remove an ODU300 is the reverse of
ODU300 installation. See Installation Practices manual (PN 3EM23953AM) Charts 10 and 11
for information about how to physically install an ODU300.
9-38
ODU300 replacement
DLP-109
3EM23956AM
14
Disconnect and remove the failed ODU300. See the Installation Practices manual for
more information.
15
Install the replacement ODU300. See the Installation Practices manual for more
information.
16
Connect the IF in/out cable.
17
Reinstall the MOD300 card to restore power to the MOD300 and replacement
ODU300.
18
On the MOD300 card front panel, verify that there are no alarms.
19
Open the WebEML Measurements screens for the MOD300 card that is connected to
the replaced ODU300.
20
On the Measurements window, enter 15 minutes Measurement Interval.
21
On the Measurements window, select 2 sec Sample Time.
22
On the Measurements window, click on the Start button to start measurements. The
Graphics window appears.
23
On Measurement graphics window, check the Details box. The Tx and Rx dBm Power
Levels Details table appears.
24
On Tx and Rx dBmPower Levels Details table, verify the Tx Local End and Rx
Far End power levels.
25
Is the replacement ODU300 status normal and capable of carrying traffic?

26
Is the replacement ODU300 in a protected system?

27

28
29
30
ODU300 replacement
9-39
3EM23956AM
9-40
DLP-109
ODU300 replacement
DLP-110
3EM23956AM
DLP-110 P2E3DS3 (2-Port DS3) replacement
DLP-110
Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace a P2E3DS3 card.
Prerequisites
General
The DS3 P2E3DS3 card can be installed in any of the universal MSS-8 slots (3 through 8).
The MSS-8 can be configured with a maximum of six optional P2E3DS3 cards; three protected pairs,
six unprotected cards, or a combination of protected pairs and unprotected cards.
In protected DS3 configurations, the main P2E3DS3 is resident in slots 3, 5, and/or 7. The spare
P2E3DS3 is resident in slots 4, 6, and/or 8 respectively. The main and spare cards must be plugged
in side-by-side.
In unprotected DS3 configurations, performing the P2E3DS3 removal and replacement procedure
causes loss of traffic. In a protected system the procedure is an in-service but not a disruptionless
procedure.
STEP
PROCEDURE

CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. In protected DS3 configurations, the

Main P2E3DS3 cards reside in slots 3, 5, and/or 7. The Spare P2E3DS3 cards reside
in slots 4, 6, and/or 8.
9-41
DLP-110
3EM23956AM





P2E3DS3 replacement procedures

9
Is the P2E3DS3 to be replaced in a protected system?

10

11
Is the P2E3DS3 to be replaced the main or spare?

12
13
Go to step 15.
14
15
Verify that the P2E3DS3 to be replaced status is Standby.
16

unprotected configuration causes a loss of traffic.
9-42
DLP-110
3EM23956AM
17
Verify that all cable connections to the P2E3DS3 card to be replaced are properly
labeled.
18
Remove the P2E3DS3 to be replaced. See DLP-100 for information about how to
remove the card.
19
Disconnect the DS3 input and output cables.
20
Install the replacement P2E3DS3 into the shelf, but do not seat the card at this time.
See DLP-100 for information about how to install card.
21
Connect the DS3 input and output cables.
22

23
Install the replacement P2E3DS3 into the shelf.
24
25
Verify the replacement P2E3DS3 alarms, that the status is normal, and capable of
carrying traffic using the Alarm Monitor and Craft Terminal.
26
Is the replacement P2E3DS3 status normal and capable of carrying traffic?

27
Is the replacement P2E3DS3 in a protected system?

28

29
30
Go to step 32.
31
32
9-43
3EM23956AM
9-44
DLP-110
DLP-111
3EM23956AM
DLP-111 P32E1DS1 (32-Port DS1) replacement
DLP-111
Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace a P32E1DS1 card.
Prerequisites
General
The DS1 P32E1DS1 card can be installed in any of the universal MSS-8 slots (3 to 8).
The MSS-8 can be configured with a maximum of six optional P32E1DS1 cards; three protected
cards, six unprotected cards, or a combination of protected and unprotected cards.
In protected DS1 configurations, the main P32E1DS1 is resident in slots 3, 5, and/or 7. The spare
P32E1DS1 is resident in slots 4, 6, and/or 8 respectively. The main and spare cards must be plugged
in side-by-side.
In unprotected DS1 configurations, performing the P32E1DS1 removal and replacement procedure
causes loss of traffic. In a protected system the procedure is an in-service but not a hitless procedure.
STEP
PROCEDURE

peripheral plug-in card or a blank panel. Failure to do so will compromise EMC
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. In protected DS1 configurations, the

Main P32E1DS1 cards reside in slots 3, 5, and/or 7. The spare P32E1DS1 cards
reside in slots 4, 6, and/or 8.
9-45
DLP-111
3EM23956AM





P32E1DS1 replacement procedures

9
Is the P32E1DS1 to be replaced in a protected system?

10

11
Is the P2E3DS3 to be replaced main or spare?

12
13
Go to step 15.
14
15
Verify that the P32E1DS1 to be replaced status is Standby.
16

9-46
DLP-111
3EM23956AM
17
Verify that all cable connections to the P32E1DS1 card to be replaced are properly
labeled.
18
Remove the P32E1DS1 to be replaced. See DLP-100 for information about how to
remove card.
19
Disconnect DS1 cables.
20
Install the replacement P32E1DS1 into shelf but do not seat the card at this time. See
DLP-100 for information about how to remove card.
21
Connect the DS1 input and output cables.
22

23
Seat the replacement P32E1DS1 into the shelf.
24
25
Verify the replacement P32E1DS1 alarms, that the status is normal, and capable of
26
Is the replacement P32E1DS1 status normal, and capable of carrying traffic?

27
Is the replacement P32E1DS1 in a protected system?

28

29
30
Go to step 32.
31
32
9-47
3EM23956AM
9-48
DLP-111
DLP-112
3EM23956AM
DLP-112 Clean fiber-optic connectors
DLP-112
Purpose
This procedure describes the recommended instructions to clean fiber-optic connectors found in
Alcatel-Lucent equipment.
Prerequisites
Anyone who performs this procedure must be familiar with cleaning fiber-optic connectors and with
the specific system on which the procedure is to be performed.
This procedure must not be performed on traffic-carrying equipment. If a system is in service, traffic
must be removed from equipment to be cleaned.
Recommended Tools
The following tools must be available for this procedure:
Optical power meter with standard accessories
Inspection microscope, 200X to 400XAerotech World Trade Ltd. AWT200

or AWT300
Anti-static lint-free swabTexwipe PN TX757E
CLETOP1 fiber-optic cleaner, Aerotech World Trade Ltd. PN 14100500 for all
fiber-optic connectors except bulkhead type
CLETOP 2.5mm Stick-Type cleaner- Aerotech World Trade Ltd. PN 14100400,

box of 200
CLETOP 1.25mm Stick-Type cleaner - Aerotech World Trade Ltd. PN 14100401

box of 200
Optical removal and cleaning toolAlcatel-Lucent PN 3EM07060AAAA
Penlight (pocket-style flashlight)
Laser safety glasses
General
If the cleaning method described in this procedure does not produce acceptable results, the connector
may need to be replaced.
1. CLETOP is a registered trademark of NTT International.
9-49
3EM23956AM
DLP-112
STEP
PROCEDURE
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. DO NOT LOOK INTO FIBER-OPTIC

CONNECTOR. Laser infrared radiation is present when fiber-optic connector is
open and optical interface is installed. Laser infrared radiation is not visible to
naked eye or with laser safety glasses.
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Ensure no optical power is connected to

fiber being tested. An optical power meter must be used to ensure all optical power
has been removed.
WARNING: Possibility of equipment damage. Do not disassemble cards to

clean fibers. Disassembling card could cause damage to optical splice and
could void warranty.
WARNING: Possibility of equipment damage. To preserve integrity of

fiber-optic connectors, observe the following precautions:
-Do not use cleaning swabs more than once.
-Do not use alcohol or any type of liquid to clean fiber-optic connectors.
-Do not use canned air to clean fiber-optic connectors. Canned air propellant
leaves residue that clouds fiber-optic connectors.
-Do not touch polished optical surface of fiber-optic connector. Oil from skin
can degrade performance of fiber-optic connector and attract dust particles.
-Always use protective covers to protect disconnected fiber-optic connectors.
When protective covers are not in use, store them in a clean container. Do not
store protective covers in clothes pocket.
9-50
DLP-112
3EM23956AM
Figure 112-1. Fiber-optic connector inspection
PARTICLES
OIL FILM AND PARTICLES

ON CLADDING AND IN
CORE AREA
FIBER CONTAMINATED
WITH SOLID PARTICLES
FIBER
CLADDING
FIBER CONTAMINATED
WITH OIL (FINGERPRINT)
CORE
FERRULE
(SHAPE CAN VARY
BY CONNECTOR TYPE)
CLEAN FIBER
129-1280-1
021607
Use an optical power meter to determine if light is coming out of fiber-optic connector.
Does the optical power meter detect light coming out of fiber-optic connector?
Find a laser transmission source and disable it.
Remove the fiber-optic connector from receptacle, if necessary.
Use an inspection microscope to inspect fiber-optic connector. See Figure 112-1 for
examples of clean and contaminated fibers. Use the following criteria to determine
clean fiber:
a.
Fiber core must have no contaminants or defects.
9-51
DLP-112
3EM23956AM
10
b.
Fiber cladding must have no contaminants. Minor defects (pits and scratches) are
acceptable.
c.
Fiber ferrule may not have contaminants or defects that interfere with fiber-optic
connector mating.
Is the fiber-optic connector clean?

11
Select the type of connector to clean. See Figures 112-2 and 112-3 for connector types.
If FC, SC, MU, LC, or ST/STII fiber-optic connector, go to step 12.
If bulkhead connectors, go to step 16.
Figure 112-2. Fiber-optic connector types, illustrations
FC CONNECTOR
MU FIBER CONNECTOR
SC CONNECTOR
ST CONNECTOR
LC FIBER CONNECTOR
950-0151-1
092109
9-52
DLP-112
3EM23956AM
Figure 112-3. Fiber-optic connector types, photographs
FC CONNECTOR
SC CONNECTOR
ST/STII CONNECTOR
950-0150-1
092109
FC, SC, MU, LC, or ST/STII fiber-optic connector

12
Holding the CLETOP fiber-optic cleaner with one hand, use metal lever to open metal
slide and expose the cleaning surface. Do not release the lever.
13
Place the fiber ferrule firmly against the CLETOP fiber-optic cleaner cleaning surface,
rotate the ferrule 90 degrees, then gently wipe the ferrule along cleaning surface one
time in one direction only.
14
Release the metal lever.
15
Go to step 19.
Bulkhead connectors
16
Select the appropriate CLETOP Stick-Type to clean bulkhead connector for fiber optic
connection.
a.
For FC, SC, and ST bulkhead connectors use the CLETOP 2.5mm Stick-Type
cleaner.
b.
For LC and MU bulkhead connectors use the CLETOP 1.25mm Stick-Type

cleaner.
9-53
DLP-112
3EM23956AM
17
Insert the CLETOP swab into the optical bulkhead adapter and gently twist/wipe to
clean fiber-optic interface. Discard the swab after each use.
18
Are there more fiber optic bulkheads to clean?

Inspect connector
19
20
Use an inspection microscope to inspect fiber-optic connector. See Figure 112-1 for
examples of clean and contaminated fibers. Use the following criteria to determine
clean fiber:
a.
Fiber core must have no contaminants or defects.
b.
Fiber cladding must have no contaminants. Minor defects (pits and scratches) are
acceptable.
c.
Fiber ferrule may not have contaminants or defects that interfere with fiber-optic
connector mating.

21
Clean and inspect the fiber-optic connector up to five more times.
22

If no, contact the next level of support.
23
Remove the permanent plastic cap retainer, if applicable. Follow customer practices.
24
Are there more fiber-optic connectors to clean?

25
9-54
DLP-113
3EM23956AM
DLP-113 System power down and power up
DLP-113
Purpose
This procedure describes how to power down and power up a 9500 MPR-A system.
General
When powering down the system, you must shut down the transmitters first, remove power from the
MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU)s, MPT-HL transceivers, and MOD300s before you remove
power from the MSS-1/4/8 shelf.
When powering up the system, you must power up the MSS-1/4/8 shelf first, power up the MPT
ODUs, MPT-HL transceivers, and MOD300s, before bringing up the transmitters.
All cards can be removed and installed with power applied.
STEP
PROCEDURE




9-55
DLP-113
3EM23956AM
Select an action?
If the system power is down, go to step 6.
If the system power is up, go to step 13.
System power down procedure

6
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Removing power on a traffic barring

system causes a loss of traffic.
Remove all MOD300 cards from the system.
Position all MPT-HL transceiver PA switches to the OFF 0 position.
Remove fuses in the PDU that are suppling battery power to all MPT-HL transceivers
in the system.
10
Remove power to the MPT ODU. Depending upon the configuration, perform one of
the following for each MPT ODU:
If power is provided by the MPTACC card, use the Craft Terminal and disable
power source.
If power is provided by the MSS-1 shelf Core, use the Craft Terminal and disable
power source.
If MPT ODU is powered through a power injector card/power injector box,

disconnect the Ethernet+Data cable connection to the MPT ODU at the power
injector card/box.
If MPT ODU is powered with connection to MPT Extended Power Unit, DC+ODU
Data connection, disconnect the Ethernet+Data cable connection to the
MPT ODU at the MPT Extended Power Unit.
If MPT ODU is powered with connection to MPT Power Unit or MPT Extended
Power Unit DC (Type N) connection, disconnect the power cable connection to the
MPT ODU at the MPT Power Unit/MPT Extended Power Unit.
protecting the MPT ODU and remove.
If power is provided by an external source, disconnect power appropriately.
11
Remove the fuses in PDU that are suppling battery power to the MSS-1/4/8 shelf.
12
Go to step 20.
9-56
DLP-113
3EM23956AM
System power up procedure

13
Install the fuses in PDU that are suppling battery power to the MSS-1/4/8 shelf.
14
Install all MOD300 cards into the system.
15
Install the fuses in PDU that are suppling battery power to all MPT-HL transceivers
in the system.
16
Position all MPT-HL transceiver PA switches to the ON 1 position.
17
Apply power to all MPT ODUs. Depending upon the configuration.
18
19
Verify that there are no unexpected alarms and conditions on the system.
20
9-57
3EM23956AM
9-58
DLP-113
DLP-114
3EM23956AM
DLP-114 MPTACC (MPT Access) replacement
DLP-114
Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace an MPTACC.
Prerequisites
General
The MPTACC is supported in MSS-8 slots 3 to 8 and MSS-4 slots 3 and 4.
In unprotected radio configurations the main MPTACC card is supported in any of the transport
MSS-4/8 slots, two radio channels per MPTACC card for a maximum of twelve MPTACC
MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU) radio channels per MSS-8 shelf and four radio channels per
MSS-4 shelf.
In protected radio configurations, two arrangements are available. The first arrangement utilizes
one interface on a MPTACC card configured as main and the second interface as spare for a single
protected radio channel. This arrangement is supported in MSS-8 slots 3 to 8 and MSS-4 slots 3 and
4.
The second arrangement utilizes a main MPTACC card and a spare MPTACC card. The main
MPTACCs are equipped in slots 3, 5, and/or 7 and the protect (spare) MPTACCs are equipped in the
slots directly across from the main (slots 4, 6, and/or 8).
Disconnecting the MPTACC from the MSS backplane may remove power to the MPT ODU, and may
See the 9500 MPR-A Operation and Administration (PN 3EM23954AM) for detailed procedures to
execute the commands included in this procedure.
STEP
1
PROCEDURE
9-59
DLP-114
3EM23956AM
peripheral plug-in card or a blank panel. Failure to do so will compromise EMC


configurations, the Main MPTACC cards resides in slots 3, 5, and/or 7. The spare
MPTACC cards resides in slots 4, 6, and/or 8.


instructions.

pressure to bring the plug-in pane flush with the front panel. Improper

MPTACC replacement procedures

9
9-60
Determine MPTACC configuration.

a.
b.
c.
d.
Is the power to the radio channels provided by the MPTACC card?
DLP-114
3EM23956AM
10
Verify that radio protection is available for all traffic supported by the MPTACC to be
replaced or appropriate maintenance window is scheduled per local practices and
procedures.
11
Is it appropriate to proceed with MPTACC replacement procedure?

12

13

configurations, the Main MPTACC cards resides in slots 3, 5, and/or 7. The spare
MPTACC cards resides in slots 4, 6, and/or 8.
14

15
Are any radio channels supported by the MPTACC in a protected system?

If yes, perform steps 16 through 24 for each protected radio channel
supported by the MPTACC to be replaced.
16

17
Is the MPTACC to be replaced main or spare?

18
19
20
21
Go to step 25.
22
23
9-61
DLP-114
3EM23956AM
24
25
Verify that the MPTACC to be replaced status is Standby.
26

27
Verify that all cable connections to the MPTACC to be replaced are properly labeled.
28
Disconnect all cables connected to the front of the MPTACC.
29
Remove the MPTACC to be replaced. See DLP-100 for information about how to
remove the card.
30

31
Install the replacement MPTACC into the shelf. See DLP-100 for information about
how install the card.
32
Connect all cables to the front of the MPTACC that you disconnected in step 28.
33
34
Verify that the replacement MPTACC is free of alarms using the Alarm Monitor.
35
Verify that the radio channels that are supported by the MPTACC are error free.
36
Is the replacement MPTACC status LED steady green or amber, error free, and free
of alarms?
37
Is the replacement MPTACC in a protected system?

If yes, perform steps 38 through 41 for each radio channel supported by
the MPTACC to be replaced.
38
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Releasing Forced/Lockout

EPS/HSB/RX Radio switch causes a disruption to traffic.
39
40
9-62
DLP-114
3EM23956AM
41
42
Go to step 44.
43
44
9-63
3EM23956AM
9-64
DLP-114
DLP-115
3EM23956AM
DLP-115 MPT ODU replacement (MPT-HC, MPT-XP, 9558HC)
DLP-115
Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace an Outdoor Unit, MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU).
Prerequisites
Before starting, verify that the replacement MPT ODU matches the failed MPT ODU using the
following procedure.
1.
Obtain part number of failed MPT ODU on inventory screen.
2.
Verify part number of replacement MPT ODU, located on identification label,

matches part number of failed MPT ODU.
General
The MPT ODU is supported in numerous configurations, protected and unprotected radio
configurations. The MPT ODU may be associated with an MSS shelf or stand-alone. Connectivity to
the MSS-4/8 shelf may be achieved through an MPTACC, P8ETH, or Core-E card. Connectivity to
the MSS-1 shelf may be achieved through the MSS/CORE Ethernet ports.
Office power may be provided by the MPTACC card (coaxial or through PFoE) and by the MSS-1
shelf MSS/CORE ports 1 and 2 (through PFoE). For P8ETH, Core-E cards and MSS-1 shelf
MSS/CORE ports 3 through 6, office power is provided by connectivity to Power Injector Card, Power
Injector Box, MPT Power Unit, MPT Extended Power Unit, or through direct connection to office
power. For ALL MPT-XP configurations, office power MUST be provided by MPT Extended Power
Unit. Fully understand the MPT ODU configuration prior to starting MPT ODU replacement
procedure.
In unprotected radio configurations, the associated radio port is supported in the following:
main Core-E card in MSS-4/8 slot 1
main MPTACC card in any of the transport MSS-8 slots 3 through 8 and MSS-4
slots 3 and 4
main P8ETH card in any of the transport MSS-8 slots 3 through 8 and MSS-4 slots
3 and 4
MSS-1 shelf MSS/CORE Ethernet ports 1 through 6
In protected radio configurations, the associated radio port is supported in the following:
9-65
DLP-115
3EM23956AM
one interface on a MPTACC card configured as main and the second interface as
spare for a single protected radio channel. This arrangement is supported in
MSS-8 slots 3 through 8 and MSS-4 slots 3 and 4.
the main interface on main MPTACC card and the spare interface on spare
MPTACC card. The main MPTACCs are equipped in slots 3, 5, and/or 7 and the
protect (spare) MPTACCs are equipped in the slots directly across from the main,
slots 4, 6, and/or 8.
the main and spare interfaces are connected to MSS-4/8 Core-E and MSS-1 shelf
MSS/CORE radio ports. Protected radio configurations are configured with the
main MPT ODU connected to Core-E and MSS/CORE ports 1, 3, and/or 5 and the
protect (spare) is connected to Core-E and MSS/CORE ports 2, 4, and/or 6,
respectively.

See the 9500 MPR-A Installation Practices (PN 3EM23953AM) Charts 10 for information about how
to physically remove and install the MPT ODU to be replaced in this procedure.
STEP
PROCEDURE

frequencies can cause eye injury and eventual blindness. Do not look directly into
any unterminated waveguide port.

CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. In an unprotected radio, performing the

MPT ODU removal and replacement procedure causes loss of traffic. In a protected
system the procedure is an in-service but not a hitless procedure. Disconnecting the
MPTACC from the MSS-8 backplane to remove power to the MPT ODU can cause a
disruption on traffic.

instructions.
9-66
DLP-115
5
3EM23956AM
Is the radio channel associated with the MPT ODU to be replaced in a protected
system?

Is the radio channel associated with the MPT ODU to be replaced the main or spare?
10
11
Go to step 15.
12
13
14
15
Mute the radio channel associated with the MPT ODU to be replaced.
16
Remove power to the MPT ODU. Depending upon the configuration, perform one of
the following for each MPT ODU:
If power is provided by the MPTACC card, use the Craft Terminal and disable
power source.
If power is provided by the MSS-1 shelf MSS/CORE ports 1 and 2, use the Craft
Terminal and disable power source.
If MPT ODU is powered with connection to Power Injector Card/Power Injector

Box, disconnect the Ethernet+Data cable connection to the MPT ODU at the
Power Injector Card/Box.
If MPT ODU is powered with connection to MPT Extended Power Unit, DC+ODU
Data connection, disconnect the DC+ODU cable connection to the MPT ODU at
the MPT Extended Power Unit.
9-67
DLP-115
3EM23956AM
If MPT ODU is powered with connection to MPT Power Unit or MPT Extended
Power Unit DC (Type N) connection, disconnect the power cable connection to the
MPT ODU at the MPT Power Unit/MPT Extended Power Unit.
protecting the MPT ODU and remove.
If power is provided by an external source, disconnect power appropriately.
17
Verify that all cable connections to the MPT ODU to be replaced are properly labeled.
18
Disconnect all cables that are connected to the MPT ODU.

NOTE: The procedure to Remove an MPT ODU is dependent on the MPT ODU mounting,
power configuration, and how the MPT ODU is configured. The procedure to remove an
MPT ODU is the reverse of MPT ODU installation. See Installation Practices manual (PN
3EM23953AM) Charts 10 for information about how to physically install an MPT ODU.
19
Remove the failed MPT ODU. See the Installation Practices manual for more
information.
20
Install replacement MPT ODU. See the Installation Practices manual for more
information.
21
Connect all cables to the MPT ODU that you disconnected in step 18.
22
Apply power to the MPT ODU that was removed in step 16.
23
Unmute the radio channel associated with the replaced MPT ODU.
24
Using the Craft Terminal, verify that there are no alarms associated with the
replacement MPT ODU.
25
Open WebEML Measurements windows for the radio channel that is associated with
the replaced MPT ODU.
26
On Measurements window, enter 15 minutes Measurement Interval.
27
On Measurements window, select 2 sec Sample Time.
28
On Measurements window, click on the Start button to start the measurements. The
29
On Measurement graphics window, check the Details box. Tx and Rx dBm Power
Levels Details table appears.
30
On Tx and Rx dBm Power Levels Details table, verify the Local and Far End Tx and
Rx power levels.
9-68
DLP-115
31
3EM23956AM
Is the replacement MPT ODU status normal and capable of carrying traffic?
32
Is the replacement MPT ODU in a protected system?

33

34
35
36
37
38
9-69
3EM23956AM
9-70
DLP-115
DLP-116
3EM23956AM
DLP-116 Auxiliary (AUX) replacement
DLP-116
Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace an AUX card.
Prerequisites
General
The AUX card can be installed in MSS-8 slot 8 and MSS-4 slot 4.
STEP
PROCEDURE



9-71
DLP-116
3EM23956AM


AUX replacement procedures

7
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Removing an AUX card may isolate a

portion of the network being supervised on a service channel supported by the AUX
card.
Verify that all cable connections to the AUX card to be replaced are properly labeled.
Disconnect the cables that are connected to the front of the AUX card.
10
Remove the AUX to be replaced. See DLP-100 for information about how to remove the
card.
11

12
Install replacement AUX into shelf. See DLP-100 for detailed steps to install AUX
card.
13
Connect all cables to the front of the AUX card that you disconnected in step 9.
14
15
Verify the replacement AUX alarms, that the status is normal using the Alarm
Monitor and Craft Terminal.
16
Is the replacement AUX status normal and functioning properly?

17
18
9-72
DLP-117
3EM23956AM
DLP-117 Protection upgrade and downgrade procedures
DLP-117
Purpose
These procedures describes how to upgrade and downgrade protection configuration on the
9500 MPR-A system.
General
The protection upgrade and downgrade procedures provide the general steps and sequence required
to change protection scheme. The number of possible configuration scenarios prevents covering all
upgrade and downgrade possibilities.
PDH protection
PDH protection upgrade applies when converting from 1+0 not protected to 1+1 EPS protection
configuration.
PDH protection downgrade applies when converting from 1+1 EPS protection to 1+0 not protected
configuration.
Radio protection
Radio protection upgrade applies when converting from 1+0 not protected to 1+1 HSB, HSB SD, or
FD radio protection configuration.
Radio protection downgrade applies when converting from 1+1 HSB, HSB SD, or FD protection to
1+0 not protected radio configuration. Radio protection downgrade requires a power cycle of the NE.
There are no steps are included to account for the required changes to the MPT-HL shelf diplexer
configuration or outside plant configuration, such as ODU/antenna configuration, RF coupler, DC
Extractor, waveguide, and grounding.
Modulation scheme
The modulation scheme conversion applies when converting from static to adaptive radio profile and
the reverse.
To change modulation scheme, ATPC must be disabled, radio configuration must be 1+0 not
protected, and license key must support adaptive modulation.
Converting from static to adaptive radio profile, all existing TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH
cross-connections must be supported by the lowest adaptive modulation profile (4 QAM). When all
existing TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections are supported by the lowest adaptive
modulation profile (4 QAM), all the existing TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections are kept
and the residual bandwidth for new TDM2TDM and TEM2ETH cross-connections will be
9-73
DLP-117
3EM23956AM
recomputed. When all the existing TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections can not be
supported by the lowest adaptive modulation profile (4 QAM), the request to change modulation
scheme is rejected. Some existing TDM2TDM and/or TEM2ETH cross-connections must be deleted
to achieve a bandwidth which is supported by the lowest adaptive modulation profile.
Converting from adaptive to static radio profile, the new static radio profile is the one that
corresponds to the largest supported radio profile configured (16 QAM or 64 QAM). all existing
TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections are preserved and the residual bandwidth for new
TDM2TDM or TEM2ETH cross-connections are recalculated.
all cards can be removed and installed with power applied.
STEP
PROCEDURE




Select an action?
To Upgrade PDH 1+0 to 1+1 EPS protection configuration, go to step 6.
To Downgrade PDH 1+1 EPS to 1+0 not protected configuration, go to
step 13.
To Upgrade 1+0 to 1+1 protected radio configuration, go to step 20.
To Downgrade 1+1 to 1+0 not protected radio configuration, go to
step 31.
To Upgrade fixed modulation to adaptive modulation configuration, go
9-74
DLP-117
3EM23956AM
to step 43.
To Downgrade adaptive modulation to fixed modulation configuration,
go to step 60.
Upgrade PDH 1+0 to 1+1 EPS protection configuration
6
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. This is an In-Service but not a hitless

procedure.
Install spare P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 card in spare slot 4, 6, or 8 associated with main

P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 card. An Unconfigured Equipment Present alarm displays.
Connect the DS1 or DS3 cables to spare the P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 card that you
installed in step 7.
On CT settings window, enable the spare P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 card that you installed
in step 7.
10
On CT settings window, configure the P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 cards for 1+1 EPS

protection type.
NOTE: To complete the upgrade to 1+1 EPS protection, all TDM2ETH and TDM2TDM
cross-connections MAC address affected by this system upgrade, must be changed from
unicast to multicast at the remote NEs.
11
Reprovision all of the TDM2ETH and TDM2TDM cross-connections MAC address

from unicast to multicast at the remote NEs. For more information about how to
configure cross-connections, see the 9500 MPR-A Operation and Administration
Manual.
12
Go to step 75.
Downgrade PDH 1+1 EPS to 1+0 not protected configuration

13
14
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Downgrading from 1+1 EPS to 1+0 Not
protected configuration is an In-Service procedure. all traffic including sync source
must be Active on the main PDH card before starting this procedure.
On CT settings window, set the P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 cards protection type to No
Protection.
15
On CT settings window, set the spare P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 card equipment type to

Empty.
16
Disconnect the DS1 or DS3 cables from spare the P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 card.
17
Remove the spare P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 card in spare slot 4, 6, or 8.
9-75
3EM23956AM
DLP-117
NOTE: To complete the downgrade to 1+0 Not Protected configuration, all TDM2ETH and
TDM2TDM cross-connections MAC address affected by this system downgrade, must be
changed from multicast to unicast at the remote NEs.
18
Reprovision all of the affected TDM2ETH and TDM2TDM cross-connections MAC

address from multicast to unicast at the remote NEs. For more information about
how to configure cross-connections, see the 9500 MPR-A Operation and
Administration Manual.
19
Go to step 75.
Upgrade 1+0 to 1+1 protected radio configuration

20
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. This is an In-Service but not a hitless

procedure.
21
NOTE: To achieve expected radio operation the upgrade from 1+0 not protected to 1+1
protected radio configuration must be performed at both ends of the radio hop.
22
For a radio that is equipped with a MOD300 card, install the MOD300 card in slot 4,
6, or 8 but do not seat the card at this time. Connect IF coax cable to MOD300 card.
23
Install the appropriate radio spare card in spare slot 4, 6, or 8 that is associated with
main radio channel. An Unconfigured Equipment Present alarm appears.
For a radio that equipped with the MOD300 card, seat the card into slot 4, 6, or 8.
For a radio that equipped with a MPT-HL transceiver, the spare P8ETH card must be
installed in slot 4 if not already equipped. Install the MPT-HL transceiver in slot 2 of
the MPT-HL shelf.
For a radio that is equipped with a MPTACC card, the spare radio directions are
supported on port 2 of the same MPTACC card or from an MPTACC card installed in
adjacent slot to the main MPTACC card, slots 4, 6, or 8. Install the MPTACC as
required, as described in the site documentation.
24
On the CT settings window, enable the cards/MPT-HL transceiver that you installed
in step 23.
25
On the CT settings window, configure the radio channel protection type as 1+1 HSB(SD)
or 1+1 FD. Local station and remote station observes 2 second sync loss.
26
Connect the new radio direction cables to the spare radio card that you installed in
step 23, as described in the site documentation.
9-76
DLP-117
3EM23956AM
For a radio that is equipped with MPT-HL transceiver, install the SFP into the
appropriate P8ETH SFP port. Connect the fiber optic cable between the SFP port and
MPT-HL transceiver. Connect the MPT-HL transceiver power cable, as described in
the site documentation.
For a radio that is equipped with a MPTACC card, connect the radio cables, as
described in the site documentation (optical Ethernet and power coaxial cable,
electrical Ethernet and power coaxial cable, or electrical Ethernet W/PFoE
connectivity).
27
If radio protection is configured as 1+1 FD, configure the spare radio direction.
NOTE: If unexpected radio alarms are present on the radio channel associated with
protection upgrade, a system restart is required to clear the alarms.
28
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Performing a system restart to clear

unexpected radio alarms causes disruption to traffic.
NOTE: To complete the upgrade to 1+1 radio protection, all TDM2ETH and TDM2TDM
cross-connections MAC address affected by this system upgrade, must be changed from
unicast to multicast at the remote NEs.
29

address from unicast to multicast at the remote NEs. For more information about
how to configure cross-connections, see the 9500 MPR-A Operation and
Administration Manual.
30
Go to step 75.
Downgrade 1+1 to 1+0 not protected radio configuration

31
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Downgrading from 1+1 HSB, HSB SD,
or FD to 1+0 configuration is an Out-Of-Service procedure. All traffic including sync
source must be Active on the main channel before starting this procedure.
32
or FD to 1+0 configuration is an Out-Of-Service procedure. To complete the
downgrade procedure, the NE must be power cycled off and back on again. The
power cycle takes approximately 15 minutes complete.
33
NOTE: To achieve expected radio operation the downgrade from 1+1 protected to 1+0 not
protected radio configuration must be performed at both ends of the radio hop.
34
On CT settings window for radio channel, enable the Local Tx Mute for channel #1 and
#0.
35
On CT settings window, set the radio channel protection type to No Protection.
9-77
DLP-117
3EM23956AM
36
On CT settings window for radio channel, disable the Local Tx Mute for channel #1
only.
37
Disconnect the channel#0 radio direction cables to the spare radio cards.
For a radio that is equipped with a MOD300 card, unseat the MOD300 card from the
shelf, then disconnect the IF coax cable from the MOD300 card.
For a radio that is equipped with a MPT-HL transceiver, disconnect the fiber optic
cable between the SFP port and MPT-HL transceiver, as described in the site
documentation.
For a radio that is equipped with a MPTACC card, disconnect the radio cables, as
described in the site documentation (optical Ethernet and power coaxial cable,
electrical Ethernet and power coaxial cable, or electrical Ethernet W/PFoE
connectivity).
NOTE: In the case of 1+1 FD configuration, local AIS will remain active throughout remainder
of the procedure.
38
On CT settings window, set the radio channel equipment type to Empty.
39
Remove the appropriate radio spare card from the spare MSS slot 4, 6, or 8.
For a radio that is equipped with a MOD300 card, remove from slot 4, 6, or 8.
For a radio that is equipped with an MPT-HL transceiver, remove the P8ETH card
from slot 4 only if described in the site documentation. Remove the SFP from the
P8ETH SFP port. Remove the MPT-HL transceiver in slot 2 of the MPT-HL shelf.
For a radio that is equipped with an MPTACC card, spare radio directions are
supported on port 2 of the same MPTACC card or from an MPTACC card installed in
adjacent slot to the main MPTACC card, slots 4, 6, or 8. Remove the MPTACC only if
described in the site documentation.
40
or FD to 1+0 configuration is an Out-Of-Service procedure. To complete the
downgrade procedure the NE must be power cycled off and back on again. The
power cycle takes approximately 15 minutes complete.
41
Power down and then power up the NE. See DLP-113 for information about the power
cycles of the NE.
NOTE: To complete the downgrade to 1+0 radio configuration, all TDM2ETH and TDM2TDM
cross-connections MAC address affected by this system downgrade, must be changed from
multicast to unicast at the remote NEs.
9-78
DLP-117
42
3EM23956AM

address from multicast to unicast at the remote NEs. For more information about
how configure cross-connections, see the 9500 MPR-A Operation and Administration
Manual, DLP-112.
Upgrade fixed modulation to adaptive modulation configuration

43
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. This is an Out-of-Service procedure.

44
Verify that the system license key supports adaptive modulation. For more
information about how to display and update the system license key, see the
9500 MPR-A Operation and Administration Manual, DLP-120.
45
Open the radio channel view. Take a screen capture to save all radio channel
provisioning information.
46
Which type of radio direction configuration?

If 1+0 Not protected, go to step 49.
If 1+1 protected, go to step 47.
47
Mute the spare radio channel (channel #0).
48
Set the radio direction Protection Type to No Protection.
49
Is the ATPC enabled?

50
Disable the ATPC (unchecked) and click on the Apply button.
51
From the radio direction Mode drop-down menu, choose Adaptive Modulation and click
on the Apply button.
52
NOTE: If the sum of all TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections exceed the supported
capacity for the reference channel at 4 QAM, the request to change modulation mode is
rejected.
53

54
Set the radio direction Protection Type to 1+1 HSB(SD) or 1+1 FD.
55
Unmute the spare radio channel (channel #0).
9-79
DLP-117
3EM23956AM
56
NOTE: To complete the upgrade from fixed modulation to adaptive modulation both ends of
the radio hop must be upgraded.
57
Verify that the radio direction is alarm free.
58
Verify that the radio direction is error free and operating as expected.
59
Go to step 75.
Downgrade adaptive modulation to fixed modulation configuration

60

61
62

63
Mute the spare radio channel (channel #0).
64
Set the radio direction Protection Type to No Protection.
65
From the radio direction Mode drop-down menu, choose Presetting and click on the
Apply button.
66

67
Set the radio direction Protection Type to 1+1 HSB(SD) or 1+1 FD.
68
Unmute the spare radio channel (channel #0).
69
Provision the ATPC?

70
Enable the ATPC (checked) and click on the Apply button.
71
Configure the local ATPC Tx range, remote ATPC Rx threshold, and click on the Apply
button.
9-80
DLP-117
3EM23956AM
72
NOTE: To complete the upgrade from adaptive modulation to fixed modulation both ends of
the radio hop must be downgraded.
73
74
Verify that they radio direction is error free and operating as expected.
75
9-81
3EM23956AM
9-82
DLP-117
DLP-118
3EM23956AM
DLP-118 Upgrade and downgrade radio profile
DLP-118
Purpose
These procedures describes how to upgrade and downgrade radio profile on the 9500 MPR-A system.
General
The radio profile upgrade and downgrade procedures provide the general steps and sequence
required to change protection scheme. The number of possible radio profile scenarios prevents
covering all upgrade and downgrade possibilities.
Radio profile
Radio profile upgrade applies when the new radio profile has a capacity which is larger than the
existing profile. In this case all the existing TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH cross-connections are kept and
the residual bandwidth for new TDM2TDM or TEM2ETH cross-connections are calculated.
Radio profile downgrade applies when the new radio profile has a capacity which is smaller than the
existing profile. When all the existing TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections are supported
by the new profile, all the existing TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections are kept and the
residual bandwidth for new TDM2TDM and TEM2ETH cross-connections will be recomputed. When
all the existing TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections can not be supported by the new
profile, the request to change radio profile are rejected. Some existing TDM2TDM and/or TEM2ETH
cross-connections must be deleted to achieve a bandwidth which is supported by the new radio
profile.
STEP
1
PROCEDURE
Select an action?
To Upgrade radio profile, go to step 2.
To Downgrade radio profile, go to step 12.
Upgrade radio profile

2

9-83
DLP-118
3EM23956AM
Verify that the system license key supports the new radio profile. For information
about how to display and upgrade the system license key, see the 9500 MPR-A
Operation and Administration Manual, DLP-120.
From the radio direction Reference Channel Spacing drop-down menu, select new
channel bandwidth.
From the radio direction Modulation drop-down menu, select the new modulation
value.
Click on the Apply button.
Verify the Tx power provisioning and adjust, as described in the site documentation.
NOTE: To complete an upgrade of a radio profile, both ends of the radio hop must be
upgraded.
10
11
Go to step 22.
Downgrade radio profile

12

13
14
From the radio direction Reference Channel Spacing drop-down menu, select the new
channel bandwidth.
15
From the radio direction Modulation drop-down menu, select the new modulation
value.
16
17
NOTE: If the sum of all TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections exceed the supported
capacity for the new radio channel, the request to change radio profile will be rejected.
18
Verify the Tx power provisioning and adjust, as described in the site documentation.
19
NOTE: To complete downgrade of radio profile both ends of the radio hop must be
downgraded.
20
9-84
DLP-118
3EM23956AM
21
22
9-85
3EM23956AM
9-86
DLP-118
DLP-119
3EM23956AM
DLP-119 Upgrade unlicensed MPT-HL radio to lower 6 GHz radio
DLP-119
Purpose
This procedure describes how to upgrade a MPT-HL unlicensed radio hop to a lower 6 GHz radio hop
on the 9500 MPR-A system.
General
This upgrade procedure provides general steps and the sequence required to upgrade a MPT-HL
unlicensed radio hop to a lower 6 GHz radio hop. The number of possible radio configurations
precludes covering all possible radio configurations.
A site survey and site documentation must be provided to ensure that facilities that are not
associated with the upgrade radio direction are not impacted by this upgrade procedure.
This procedure describes the steps required for a protected radio direction. For not protected radio
directions, disregard the references to the spare radio channel.
Before starting this procedure, read and fully understand this procedure and all referenced
procedures in their entirety.
STEP
PROCEDURE


The radio direction being upgraded must be taken Out-of Service to complete this
procedure. All remaining facilities that are not associated with the radio direction
scheduled for upgrade, should not be impacted by this upgrade procedure.

9-87
3EM23956AM
DLP-119



Verify that the system license key supports the new radio profile. For information
about how to display and update the system license key, see the 9500 MPR-A
Operation and Administration Manual, DLP-120.
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Removing power to an In-Service

MPT-HL Transceiver in an unprotected link causes loss of traffic.
Position the local MPT-HL transceiver PA switch to the OFF 0 position for the main
and spare channel.
10
Position the far end MPT-HL transceiver PA switch to the OFF 0 position for the
main and spare channel.
11
Remove the fuse in PDU that is supplying battery power to the main and spare
MPT-HL transceiver.
12
Loosen the screws that are securing the MPT-HL transceivers to MPT-HL shelf. See
DLP-100 for information about how to remove the MPT-HL transceiver.
13
Unseat the MPT-HL transceivers to disconnect from shelf backplane connectors. Do

not remove the MPT-HL transceivers from the shelf.
14
Verify that all of the cable connections on the rear of the MPT-HL shelf to the MPT-HL
filter are properly labeled per site documentation.
15
Disconnect all of the cables that are connected to the MPT-HL Filter end only.
16
Remove the MPT-HL filter.
17
Install the new MPT-HL filter.
9-88
DLP-119
3EM23956AM
18
Connect all of the cables to the MPT-HL Filter that you disconnected in step 15.
Tighten the connectors to 7.1 in-lbs.
19
Verify that the cable ends are properly secured to the MPT-HL shelf and Tx switch.
Tighten the connectors to 7.1 in-lbs.
20
Seat the MPT-HL transceivers into the shelf.
21
Verify that the MPT-HL transceiver PA switch is in the OFF 0 position for the main
and spare channel.
22
Install the fuse in the PDU that is suppling battery power to the main and spare
MPT-HL transceiver.
23
Using the Craft Terminal, provision the new radio profile as described in the site
documentation. For information about how to configure the radio profile, see the
9500 MPR-A Operation and Administration Manual, DLP-109.
NOTE: If one or more of the radio parameters is determined to be out of range, it must
be provisioned first before provisioning continues on the radio direction.
a.
Set the new Channel #1 Shifter (MHz) shifter value.
b.
Enter the TX Frequency within the allowed range. The Rx Freq (KHz) displays the
Rx RF Frequency.
c.
d.
Configure the new Reference Channel Spacing.
e.
Configure the new Modulation scheme.
f.
Configure the new gain configuration.
g.
h.
Which Tx Power management is configured?

If ATPC, go to step i.
If RTPC, go to step m.
i.
Configure the new Minimum and Maximum transmit power values.
j.
Configure the new remote ATPC Rx Threshold.
k.
l.
Go to step 24.
m. Configure the new RTPC Tx Power.
9-89
DLP-119
3EM23956AM
24
NOTE: To complete the upgrade of the radio profile, both ends of the radio hop must be
upgraded.
25
Position the local MPT-HL transceiver PA switch to the ON 1 position for the main
and spare channel.
26
Position the far end MPT-HL transceiver PA switch to the ON 1 position for the main
and spare channel.
27
28
29
9-90
DLP-120
3EM23956AM
DLP-120 +24/-48 volt converter replacement
DLP-120
Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace a +24/-48 volt Converter.
Prerequisites
General
The +24/-48 volt Converter is supported in the MSS-8 slots 4, 6, or 8 and MSS-4 slot 4.
In unprotected power configurations, one +24/-48 volt Converter is equipped in the left converter
chassis location.
In protected power configurations, the main +24/-48 volt Converter is equipped in the left converter
chassis location. The spare +24/-48 volt Converter is equipped in the right converter chassis location.
Removing the +24/-48 volt Converter from the MSS shelf does not remove power to the +24/-48 volt
Converter. Power from the PDU or battery must be turned off before removing the converter from
the chassis.
The +24/-48 volt Converter can not be removed and installed with power applied.
STEP
PROCEDURE
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. The +24/-48 Volt Converter must NOT be
installed or removed with bay power on. Hazardous electrical potentials are present.
Do NOT install or remove the +24/-48 Volt Converter card from the chassis with
power applied to the converter.
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Removing an in-service +24/-48 Volt

Converter in an unprotected MSS-4/8 shelf causes loss of traffic.
9-91
DLP-120
3EM23956AM
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. In redundant power configurations,

the Main +24/-48 Volt Converter resides in left chassis location. The spare +24/-48
Volt Converter resides in right chassis location.

instructions.

+24/-48 Volt converter replacement procedure

7
Verify the status of the MSS-4/8 shelf.

a.
b.
Is the shelf configured with unprotected or redundant power arrangement?
c.
Is the appropriate maintenance window schedule per local practices and

procedures?
Is it appropriate to proceed with the +24/-48 Volt Converter replacement procedure?

9-92
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Removing an In-Service +24/-48 Volt

Converter in an unprotected MSS-4/8 shelf causes loss of traffic.
DLP-120
3EM23956AM
Figure 120-1. +24/-48 Volt converter cabling diagram

Cable Assemblies:
3DB18766AA
Main
(A-Side)
Power
Protect
(B-Side)
Power
Main Power
Converter
Cable Assemblies:
3DB18271AA
Protect Power
Converter
950-0152-1
101910
10
Remove the PDU/battery fuse supplying power to the converter to be replaced.
11
Verify that the two cables connected to the front of the converter are clearly identified.
12
Disconnect the two cables that are connected to the front of the converter.
13
Remove the converter to be replaced from the chassis. See DLP-100 for information
about how to remove the converter.
14

15
Install the replacement converter into the chassis. See DLP-100 for information about
how to install the converter.
16
Connect the two cables to the front of the converter that you disconnected in step 12.
17
Install the PDU/battery fuse that you removed in step 10.
18
Verify that there are no power-related alarms using the Alarm Monitor.
19
Is the replacement +24/-48 Volt Converter status normal and capable of carrying
traffic?
9-93
DLP-120
3EM23956AM
20
21
9-94
DLP-121
3EM23956AM
DLP-121 Power injector replacement
DLP-121
Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace a Power Injector card and Power Injector box.
Perquisites
General
The Power Injector Box/Card supports up to two 1+0 MPT ODU based radio channels. The
MPT ODU radio channels may be connected to MSS-4/8 Core-E or P8ETH cards, or MSS-1 shelf
Core.
The Power Injector card is supported in MSS-8 slots 3 to 8 and MSS-4 slots 3 and 4.
The Power Injector box is a stand-alone unit.
Power Injector replacement affects traffic on both radio channels that are associated with the Power
Injector Box/Card. Fully understand the ramifications to both radio channels before beginning the
Power Injector Replacement Procedure. Verify that radio protection is available for all traffic that is
supported by the Power Injector to be replaced or appropriate maintenance window is scheduled per
The Power Injector card can be removed and installed with power applied to the MSS-4 and MSS-8
shelf.
The Power Injector box must be powered down during the replacement procedure.
STEP
PROCEDURE


9-95
DLP-121
3EM23956AM
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing an in-service Power Injector

causes loss of traffic on both radio channels that are associated with the Power
Injector.

instructions.
WARNING: Possibility of equipment damage. When installing a Power

Injector card, ensure its backplane connector is correctly engaged before
applying sufficient pressure to bring the plug-in pane flush with the front
panel. Improper alignment can result in damaged pins on the backplane
connector and/or damage to the plug-in connector.

Power injector replacement procedure

7
Determine the Power Injector box/card configuration.

a.
Does the Power Injector support one or two radio channels?
b.
Is traffic supported on one or both radio channels?
Verify that the appropriate maintenance window is scheduled per local practices and
procedures.
Is it appropriate to proceed with Power Injector replacement procedure?

10
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing an in-service Power Injector

causes loss of traffic on both radio channels associated with the Power Injector.
11
Verify that all cable connections to the Power Injector to be replaced are properly
labeled.
12
Which Power Injector is to be replaced?

If Power Injector box, go to step 13.
If Power Injector card, go to step 20.
9-96
DLP-121
3EM23956AM
13
Locate the fuses protecting the A and B battery feeds to the Power Injector box and
remove.
14
Disconnect all of the cables that re connected to the front of the Power Injector box.
15
Remove the Power Injector box to be replaced from the bracket.
16
Install the Power Injector box onto the bracket.
17
Connect all of the cables to the front of the Power Injector box that you disconnected
in step 14.
18
Install the fuses protecting the A and B battery feeds removed in step 13.
19
Go to step 25.
20
Remove the Power Injector card to be replaced. See DLP-100 for information about
how to remove the card.
21
Disconnect all of the cables that are connected to the front of the Power Injector card.
22

23
Install the replacement Power Injector card into shelf. See DLP-100 for information
about how to install the card.
24
Connect all of the cables to the front of the Power Injector card that you disconnected
in step 21.
25
Retrieve the alarms using the Alarm Monitor. A Dialog Failure is declared against the
MPT ODUs. Wait for Dialog Failure condition to clear before proceeding.
26
Verify the MPT ODUs that are associated with the replacement Power Injector are
free of alarms using Alarm Monitor.
27
Verify the radio channels that are supported by the Power Injector are error free.
28
Are the MPT ODUs that are associated with the replacement Power Injector error free
and free of alarms?
9-97
3EM23956AM
29
30
9-98
DLP-121
DLP-122
3EM23956AM
DLP-122 RPS/XPIC module replacement
DLP-122
Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace a RPS and XPIC module on the MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC
(MPT ODU).
Prerequisites
Before starting, verify that the replacement RPS or XPIC module type matches the failed RPS or
XPIC using the following procedure.
1.
Obtain the part number of the failed RPS or XPIC on the remote inventory screen.
2.
Verify the part number of the replacement RPS or XPIC, located on the
identification label, matches the part number of the failed RPS or XPIC.
General
The RPS/XPIC module is installed on the MPT ODU.
Appropriate personnel are required to replace the RPS/XPIC module.
You can replace the MPT ODU with the replacement RPS/XPIC module already installed per local
practices and procedures. If the MPT ODU replacement is preferred, see DLP-115.
Table 122-A. MPT ODU 1+1 module details
ITEM DESCRIPTION
Part Number
XPIC Module
3DB20116BA/BB
RPS Module
3DB20117BA
See the 9500 MPR-A Installation Practices (PN 3EM23953AM) Charts 10 for information about how
to physically remove and install the RPS/XPIC module to be replaced in this procedure.
9-99
DLP-122
3EM23956AM
STEP
PROCEDURE

frequencies. Observe all safety instruction per local practices and procedures
during RPS/XPIC replacement procedure.
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. RPS/XPIC replacement should not be

performed with power applied. Hazardous electrical potentials are present; use
extreme care when installing or removing RPS/XPIC module.

instructions.

unprotected link causes a loss of traffic on all facilities that are associated with the
MPT ODU in alarm. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local practices
and procedures.
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Forced EPS/HSB/Rx Radio switching

What is the radio configuration that is associated with the RPS/XPIC module to be
replaced?
If 1+1 XPIC or 1+1 protected, go to step 7.
If co-channel XPIC, go to step 17.
If 1+0 unprotected, go to step 19.
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Forced EPS/HSB/Rx Radio switching

Is the radio channel that is associated with the RPS/XPIC to be replaced the main or
spare?
10
11
12
Go to step 20.
9-100
DLP-122
3EM23956AM
13
14
15
16
Go to step 20.
17
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing the MPT ODU RPS/XPIC

module in an unprotected XPIC link (horizontal or vertical) may cause a disruption
to traffic on the other polarization radio channel (vertical or horizontal) which is a
member of the XPIC configuration.
18
Go to step 20.
19
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing the MPT ODU RPS/XPIC

module in an unprotected link causes a loss of traffic on ALL facilities that are
associated with the MPT ODU. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local
20
Mute the radio channel that is associated with the RPS/XPIC to be replaced.
21
Remove power to the MPT ODU housing the RPS/XPIC; module to be replaced. Use
the Craft Terminal and disable power source.
NOTE: The procedure to remove an RPS/XPIC is the reverse of RPS/XPIC installation. See
Installation Practices manual (PN 3EM23953AM) Charts 10 for information about how to
physically install an MPT ODU.
22
Remove the solar shield from the MPT ODU.
23
Verify that all cable connections to the MPT ODU are properly labeled.
24
Disconnect all of the cables that are connected to the MPT ODU RPS/XPIC module.
See the Installation Practices Manual for more information.
25
Remove the external RPS/XPIC cover.
26
Remove the cap from the replacement RPS/XPIC module.
27
Verify that the gasket is in good condition and installed properly.
28
Install the replacement RPS/XPIC module onto the MPT ODU and lock the four
screws. Pay attention to the correct position of the screws.
29
Connect all of the cables to the MPT ODU RPS/XPIC module that you disconnected in
step 24.
9-101
DLP-122
3EM23956AM
30
Install the solar shield onto the MPT ODU.
31
Apply power to the MPT ODU.
32
Unmute the radio channel that is associated with the replaced MPT ODU RPS/XPIC
module.
33
Using the Craft Terminal, verify that there are no alarms associated with the
MPT ODU associated with the RPS/XPIC module replacement.
34
Open WebEML Measurements windows for the radio channel that is associated with
the MPT ODU RPS/XPIC module replacement.
35
On the Measurements window, enter 15 minutes Measurement Interval.
36
On the Measurements window, select 2 sec Sample Time.
37
On the Measurements window, click on the Start button to start measurements. The
38
On the Measurement graphics window, check on the Details box.Tx and Rx dBm
Power Levels Details table appears.
39
On Tx and Rx dBm Power Levels Details table, verify the Local and Far End Tx and
Rx power levels.
40
Is the MPT ODU status normal and capable of carrying traffic?

41
What is the radio configuration that is associated with the RPS/XPIC module to be
replaced?
If 1+1 XPIC or 1+1 protected, go to step 42.
If co-channel XPIC, go to step 47.
If 1+0 unprotected, go to step 47.
42

43
44
45
9-102
DLP-122
3EM23956AM
46
47
9-103
3EM23956AM
9-104
DLP-122
DLP-123
3EM23956AM
DLP-123 Upgrade MPT ODU to MPT ODU L1 LAG port
DLP-123
Purpose
This procedure describes how to upgrade an Out-of-Service MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU)
radio hop to an MPT ODU configured as the L1 LAG Master Port.
General
This upgrade procedure provides general steps and the sequence required to upgrade an MPT ODU
radio interface supported on an MPTACC card to an MPT ODU radio interface supported on an
P8ETH card and configured as the L1 LAG Master Port.
The L1 LAG Master Port must be located in P8ETH card Ethernet port 5 or 7.
The number of possible radio configurations precludes covering all possible radio configurations.
MPT ODU connected to an P8ETH card requires power provided by one of the following methods:
MPT Power Unit
MPT Extended Power Unit (required for MPT-XP)
Power Injector Card
Power Injector Box
Direct connection to office power
MPTACC card
A site survey and site documentation must be provided to ensure that facilities that are NOT
associated with the upgrade MPT ODU radio direction are not impacted by this upgrade procedure.
Before the L1 LAG port is ready to carry traffic, this procedure must be performed at both ends of
the radio hop.
9-105
DLP-123
3EM23956AM
STEP
PROCEDURE



The radio direction being upgraded must be taken Out-of Service to complete this
procedure. All remaining facilities that are not associated with the radio direction
scheduled for upgrade, should not be impacted by this upgrade procedure.




Verify the NE is running R3.4.0 or higher software version.
Install power source as required per site documentation including running any new
cabling between the power source and the MPT ODU.
10
Install optical Ethernet fiber from MSS-4/8 shelf to MPT ODU as required per site
documentation.
11
Verify that the MPT ODU radio interface is NOT associated with the following:
a.
9-106
Cross-Connection
DLP-123
3EM23956AM
b.
VLAN
c.
Port Segregation
d.
PPP RF enabled
e.
Synchronization reference
f.
SSM
12
Perform a database backup. See the 9500 MPR-A Operation and Administration
Manual, DLP-131 for a detailed procedure to perform a database backup.
13
If MPT ODU radio interface is configured for 1+1 HSB/FD/SD, downgrade radio
protection to 1+0. Refer to 9500 MPR-A Maintenance and Trouble Clearing Manual,
DLP-117 for a detailed procedure.
14
Disable MPT ODU radio port from MPTACC card. See the 9500 MPR-A Operation
and Administration Manual, DLP-105 for a detailed procedure.
15
If MPTACC PFoE is the power source for the MPT ODU, verify the power source is
still configured for PFoE.
16
If MPTACC card is to be replaced with P8ETH card to support L1 LAG port. Perform
the following actions:
17
a.
Verify no radio interfaces are supported on the remaining MPTACC radio

interface. If there is a radio interface connected to the remaining MPTACC radio
port, STOP this procedure immediately and contact the next level of support!
b.
Disable MPTACC card. See the 9500 MPR-A Operation and Administration
Manual, DLP-105 for a detailed procedure.
c.
Remove the MPTACC card from the MSS-4/8 shelf.
d.
Install the P8ETH card into the MSS-4/8 shelf.
Verify/enable P8ETH card to support L1 LAG port.

NOTE: Electrical SFPs are NOT supported for interconnection between P8ETH SFP
port and MPT ODU.
18
Install SFP into the P8ETH radio port and connect fiber cable to SFP. L1 LAG Master
port must reside in P8ETH Ethernet port 5 or 7.
19
Install SFP into the MPT ODU data port and connect the fiber cable to the SFP per
site documentation.
20
Provision MPT ODU radio interface.
9-107
DLP-123
3EM23956AM
21
If MPTACC PFoE/SMA connector is the power source for the MPT ODU, the
Ethernet/coax cable remains connected and will be used to power the MPT ODU.
22
If MPTACC PFoE is the power source for the MPT ODU, perform one of the following:
a.
Disable the power source. Then provision the power source for PFoE. See the
9500 MPR-A Operation and Administration Manual, DLP-109 for a detailed
procedure to provision MPT ODU power scheme.
b.
Unplug and reinsert the PFoE Ethernet cable on the MPTACC card.
23
Create L1 LAG port. See the 9500 MPR-A Operation and Administration Manual,
DLP-140 for a detailed procedure to create L1 LAG port.
24
Add MPT ODU radio interface to L1 LAG port. See the 9500 MPR-A Operation and
Administration Manual, DLP-140 for a detailed procedure to create L1 LAG port.
25
NOTE: To complete the upgrade to MPT ODU L1 LAG Port, this procedure must be
performed on both ends of the radio hop.
26
27
28
9-108
DLP-124
3EM23956AM
DLP-124 Upgrade MPT-HL to MPT-HL L1 LAG port
DLP-124
Purpose
This procedure describes how to upgrade an In-Service MPT-HL radio hop to an MPT-HL configured
as an L1 LAG Lowest Index Port.
General
This upgrade procedure provides general steps and the sequence required to upgrade an MPT-HL
radio port In-Service to an MPT-HL configured as an L1 LAG Lowest Index Port.
Supported configurations are as follows:
1+0 to 1+0 L1 LAG Port
1+1 HSB to 1+1 HSB L1 LAG Port
1+1 FD to 1+1 L1 LAG Ports
Upgrade from an 1+1 FD to 2+0 L1 LAG Ports is not supported. To accomplish this upgrade perform
the following steps:
Down grade the 1+1 FD to 1+0 not protected.upgrade, See DLP-117 for a detailed
procedure to download.
Perform this procedure in its entirety
Add the second MPT-HL radio port to the L1 LAG port
The MPT-HL radio ports to be upgraded to L1 LAG port(s) must reside in P8ETH card Ethernet port
5 or 7 to be a candidate for this upgrade procedure.
The L1 LAG Lowest Index Port must be located in P8ETH card Ethernet port 5 or 7.
During this procedure the following parameters are re-provisioned to the L1 LAG port:
Cross-Connections
VLANs
Port Segregation
PPP-RF
Synchronization
9-109
DLP-124
3EM23956AM
The Max User Bandwidth available for a radio port configured as an L1 LAG port member is
ninety-five percent of the pre-migration MPT-HL radio port capacity. The reduction in Max User
Bandwidth must be accounted for prior to migration to an L1 LAG port. Failure to account for this
reduction in Max User Bandwidth may result in a loss of ALL cross-connected traffic after the
migration to the L1 LAG port.
TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH services supported by the L1 LAG port require a different amount of
bandwidth then when supported by an MPT-HL radio port. The required bandwidth for
cross-connected services must be recalculated to ensure that the cross-connected services do not
exceed the Max User Bandwidth of the new L1 LAG port. Failure to confirm that all services are
supported by the new L1 LAG port may result in a loss of ALL cross-connected traffic after the
migration to the L1 LAG port. For information regarding bandwidth required based upon type of
service, see table 124-A. To calculate the required bandwidth for cross-connected services, use the
following equation:
Required Bandwidth = (# DS1 TDM2TDM x 2080) + (# DS1 TDM2ETH x 1882) +
(# DS3 TDM2TDM x 60264) + (# DS3 TDM2ETH x 46571)
Table 124-A. MPT-HL L1 LAG bandwidth per service type

Type of service
L1 LAG bandwidth used

[Kbps]
MPT-HL bandwidth used

[Kbps]
DS1 TDM2TDM
2080
1683
DS1 TDM2Eth
1882
1694
DS3 TDM2TDM
60264
48756
DS3 TDM2Eth
46571
45574
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption: Migration to L1 LAG port impacts TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH
traffic on a per flow-id basis. Typical impact to traffic is less than 10 seconds for each cross-connection.
The time required for the system to migrate the MPT-HL radio port to the L1 LAG port is dependent upon
radio port provisioning (synchronization, PPP RF, number of; port segregations, VLANs, and
cross-connections). Typical migration duration is less than two minutes. Allow up to five minutes for the
system to migrate all services from the MPT-HL radio port to the L1 LAG port.
The number of possible radio configurations precludes covering all possible radio configurations.
A site survey and site documentation must be provided to ensure that facilities that are NOT
associated with the upgrade MPT-HL radio direction are not impacted by this upgrade procedure.
To complete the migration to an L1 LAG port, both ends of the MPT-HL radio direction must be
migrated.
See the 9500 MPR-A Product Information (PN 3EM23952AM) for a detailed description of the L1
LAG feature and to determine card location and type.
9-110
DLP-124
3EM23956AM
STEP
PROCEDURE

CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Upgrading an MPT-HL radio port to a L1 LAG

port with cross-connections in excess of the supported Max User Bandwidth will result in
a loss of services on ALL cross-connected services associated with the L1 LAG port.
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Migration to L1 LAG port impacts TDM2TDM

and TDM2ETH traffic on a per flow-id basis. Typical impact to traffic is less than 10
seconds for each cross-connection.




Verify the NE is running R3.4.0 or higher software version.
Verify the MPT-HL radio channel is alarm/condition free and error free on both the
near and far ends of the radio hop.
10
Verify there are no unexpected and unexplained alarm/abnormal conditions declared

on the MSS-4/8 shelf supporting both the near and far ends of the radio direction.
11
Verify that ninety-five percent of the MPT-HL radio channel bandwidth is sufficient
to support the existing cross-connected services when configured in an L1 LAG port.
9-111
3EM23956AM
DLP-124
12
Perform a database backup. See the 9500 MPR-A Operation and Administration
Manual, DLP-131 for a detailed procedure to perform a database backup.
13
If radio channel is configured in 1+1 HSB/FD configuration, verify that the radio link
is active on the main radio hop on both the near and far ends of the radio link for the
following:
14
Equipment Protection Switching (EPS)
Hot StandBy (HSB)
Rx Radio (RPS)
If radio channel is configured in 1+1 HSB/FD configuration, perform Lockout

protection switch for the following:
Hot StandBy (HSB)
Rx Radio (RPS)
15
If MPT-HL radio interface is configured for 1+1 FD, and the desired configuration is
2+0 L1 LAG port, downgrade radio protection to 1+0. See the 9500 MPR-A
Maintenance and Trouble Clearing Manual, DLP-117 for a detailed procedure.
16
Download and save the Current Configuration file. See the 9500 MPR-A Operation
and Administration Manual, DLP-116 for a detailed procedure to download and save
the current configuration file.
17
Create L1 LAG port. See the 9500 MPR-A Operation and Administration Manual,
DLP-140 for a detailed procedure to create L1 LAG port.
18
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Upgrading an MPT-HL radio port to an L1

LAG port with cross-connections in excess of the supported Max User Bandwidth will
result in a loss of traffic on ALL cross-connected services associated with the L1 LAG port.
19
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Migration to L1 LAG port impacts TDM2TDM

and TDM2ETH traffic on a per flow-id basis. Typical impact to traffic is less than 10
seconds for each cross-connection.
20
Add MPT-HL radio interface to L1 LAG port. See the 9500 MPR-A Operation and
Administration Manual, DLP-140 for a detailed procedure to create L1 LAG port.
When you add the radio port to the L1 LAG port, the following message will display.
9-112
DLP-124
3EM23956AM
Figure 124-1. MPT-HL to L1 LAG information message
21
Click on the OK button.

After you click on the OK button, the following warning message will display.
Figure 124-2. MPT-HL to L1 LAG warning message
22
Click on the Yes button.
23
Wait for the system to migrate services to the L1 LAG port.

The time required for the system to migrate the MPT-HL radio port to the L1 LAG port
is dependent upon radio port provisioning (synchronization, PPP RF, number of; port
segregations, VLANs, and cross-connections provisioned). Typical migration duration
is two minutes or less. Allow up to five minutes for the system to migrate all services
from the MPT-HL radio port to the L1 LAG port. When the system has completed
migrating to the L1 LAG port you will be prompted to close the Craft Terminal.
24
Close the Craft Terminal.
25
Reopen the Craft Terminal and log in to the NE.
26
27
28
Download and save the Current Configuration file.
29
Using the Current Configuration files downloaded in steps 16 and 28, verify that the
following provisioning parameters were re-provisioned correctly:
9-113
3EM23956AM
30
Cross-Connections
VLANs
Port Segregation
PPP-RF
Synchronization
DLP-124
If radio channel is configured in 1+1 HSB/FD configuration, release Lockout

protection switch for the following:
Hot StandBy (HSB)
Rx Radio (RPS)
31
NOTE: To complete the upgrade to MPT-HL L1 LAG Port, this procedure must be
32
9-114
performed on both ends of the radio direction.
DLP-125
3EM23956AM
DLP-125 MPT Power Unit replacement
DLP-125
Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace a MPT Power Unit or MPT Extended Power Unit.
Prerequisites
General
The MPT Power Unit and MPT Extended Power Unit are stand-alone units.
The MPT Power Unit provides power for up to four MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU) based
radio channels.
The MPT Extended Power Unit provides power for up to two MPT ODU based radio channels.
Power Unit replacement affects traffic on ALL radio channels that are associated with the Power
Unit. Fully understand the ramifications to ALL radio channels before beginning the Power Unit
Replacement Procedure. Verify that radio protection is available for all traffic that is supported by
the Power Unit to be replaced or an appropriate maintenance window is scheduled per local practices
and procedures.
The Power Unit must be powered down during the replacement procedure.
STEP
PROCEDURE


CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing an in-service MPT Power

Unit causes loss of traffic on ALL radio channels that are associated with the MPT
Power Unit.
9-115
DLP-125
3EM23956AM

instructions.

MPT power unit replacement procedure

6
Determine the Power Unit configuration.

a.
Does the Power Unit support one, two, or more radio channels?
b.
Is traffic supported on one, two, or more radio channels?
procedures.
Is it appropriate to proceed with Power Unit replacement procedure?

CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing an in-service Power Unit

causes loss of traffic on ALL radio channels associated with the Power Unit.
10
Verify that all cable connections to the Power Unit to be replaced are properly labeled.
11
Locate the fuses protecting the A and B battery feeds to the Power Unit and remove.
12
Disconnect all of the cables that are connected to the front of the Power Unit.
13
Remove the Power Unit to be replaced from the bracket.
14
Install the Power Unit onto the bracket.
15
Connect all of the cables to the front of the Power Unit that you disconnected in
step 12.
16
17
MPT ODUs. Wait for Dialog Failure condition to clear before proceeding.
9-116
DLP-125
3EM23956AM
18
Verify all the MPT ODUs that are associated with the replacement Power Unit are
free of alarms using Alarm Monitor.
19
Verify all the radio channels that are supported by the Power Unit are error free.
20
Are ALL the MPT ODUs that are associated with the replacement Power Unit error
free and free of alarms?
21
22
9-117
3EM23956AM
9-118
DLP-125
DLP-126
3EM23956AM
DLP-126 SDHACC (2-Port OC-3) Replacement
DLP-126
PURPOSE
This procedure describes how to replace a SDHACC card.
PREREQUISITES
GENERAL
The OC-3 SDHACC card can be installed in any of the universal MSS-8 slots (3 through 8) and
MSS-4 slots (3 through 4).
The MSS-8 can be configured with a maximum of six optional SDHACC cards; three protected pairs,
six unprotected cards, or a combination of protected pairs and unprotected cards.
The MSS-4 can be configured with a maximum of two optional SDHACC cards; one protected pair or
two unprotected cards.
In protected OC-3 configurations, the main SDHACC is resident in slots 3, 5, and/or 7. The spare
SDHACC is resident in slots 4, 6, and/or 8 respectively. The main and spare cards must be plugged
in side-by-side.
In unprotected OC-3 configurations, performing the SDHACC removal and replacement procedure
causes loss of traffic. In a protected system the procedure is an in-service but not a disruptionless
procedure.
STEP
PROCEDURE

9-119
DLP-126
3EM23956AM
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. In protected OC-3 configurations, the

Main SDHACC cards reside in slots 3, 5, and/or 7. The Spare SDHACC cards reside
in slots 4, 6, and/or 8.





SDHACC Replacement Procedures

9
Is the SDHACC to be replaced in a protected system?

10

11
Is the SDHACC to be replaced the main or spare?

12
13
Go to step 15.
14
9-120
DLP-126
3EM23956AM
15
Verify that the SDHACC to be replaced status is Standby.
16

17
Verify that all cable connections to the SDHACC card to be replaced are properly
labeled.
18
Remove the SDHACC to be replaced. See DLP-100 for information about how to
remove the card.
19
Disconnect the OC-3 input and output cables.
20
Install the replacement SDHACC into the shelf, but do not seat the card at this time.
See DLP-100 for information about how to install card.
21
Connect the OC-3 input and output cables.
22

23
Install the replacement SDHACC into the shelf.
24
25
Verify the replacement SDHACC alarms, that the status is normal, and capable of
26
Is the replacement SDHACC status normal and capable of carrying traffic?

27
Is the replacement SDHACC in a protected system?

28

29
30
Go to step 32.
9-121
DLP-126
3EM23956AM
31
32
9-122
DLP-127
3EM23956AM
DLP-127 Software package rollback
DLP-127
Purpose
This procedure describes how to rollback to the previous software package version on a 9500 MPR-A
system.
General
The system supports software package rollback to the previous committed software version.
Software package rollback is supported when the software package and the MSS database for the
previous committed software version are both still present on the Core-E flash card.
All configuration changes applied to the NE after the software version upgrade will be lost during
the software package rollback operation.
Caution: Possibility of service interruption: The software package rollback operation
WILL impact traffic including a possible long out-of service period. For this reason
software package rollback should be considered as a critical operation to be performed
as a last resort only after all other alternatives have been explored.
Software package rollback functionality was added in R4.0.0 and is available for software upgrades
from R4.0.0 and greater. Table 127-A provides a list of supported software package rollbacks:
Table 127-A. Releases supporting software package rollback
Initial software
release version
(Current Status: Stand by)
Upgrade software
release version
(Current Status: Committed)
Software package
rollback support
R3.2.0, R3.3.0, or R3.4.0
R4.0.0
No
R3.4.0
R4.1.0
No
R4.0.0 or greater
R4.1.0 or greater
Yes
For a full description of the software package rollback feature, see the 9500 MPR-A Product
Information (PN 3EM23952AM).
STEP
1
PROCEDURE
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. The software package rollback operation
9-123
DLP-127
3EM23956AM
Have all alternative been explored to resolve the system problem?

Have all appropriate levels of support been notified and all are in agreement that a
software package rollback is the appropriate next step?
Contact ALL appropriate levels of support and obtain all appropriate approvals as
required per local practices and procedures.
Have all appropriate levels of support been notified and are in agreement that a
software package rollback is the appropriate next step?
Software package rollback procedure

6
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. The software package rollback operation

Open the NE Software Status Detail window.

From the Main Menu Bar select, SW Download>SW Status.
On the software bank with the Current Status Committed, verify the software version
matches that of the upgraded software package. See figure 127-2
9-124
DLP-127
3EM23956AM
Figure 127-2. Software bank with upgrade software version Committed status
On the software bank with the Current Status Standby, verify the software version
matches that of the initial software package. See figure 127-3
Figure 127-3. Software bank with Initial software version Standby status
9-125
DLP-127
3EM23956AM
10
Are the committed (upgrade) and standby (initial) software version verified and
correct as expected?
11
On the software bank for the standby software version, select from the Software
Management Action drop-down menu Forced Activation. See figure 127-4
Figure 127-4. Software Management Action - Forced Activation
12
Select the Apply Action button. See figure 127-4
13
Communication with the NE will be lost. Wait until the Core-E card status LED is
solid green before proceeding to step 14.
14
Log in to the NE.
15
Open the NE Software Status Detail window.

From the Main Menu Bar select, SW Download>SW Status.
16
On the software bank with the Current Status Committed, verify the software version
matches that of the initial software package. See figure 127-5
9-126
DLP-127
3EM23956AM
Figure 127-5. Software bank with initial software version Committed status
17
On the software bank with the Current Status Standby, verify the software version
matches that of the upgrade software package. See figure 127-6
Figure 127-6. Software bank with upgrade software version Standby status
9-127
DLP-127
3EM23956AM
18
Are the committed (initial) and standby (upgrade) software version verified and
correct as expected?
19
Contact the next level of support for assistance.
20
9-128
DLP-128
3EM23956AM
DLP-128 MSS-1 shelf replacement
DLP-128
Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace a MSS-1 shelf.
Prerequisites
General
The MSS-1 shelf is a stand-alone unit.
The MSS-1 shelf supports up to four electrical Ethernet ports and up to two optical Ethernet ports.
Each Ethernet port (electrical or optical) may support an MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU)
radio channel.
Each optical Ethernet port may support an MPT-HL radio channel.
Electrical Ethernet ports 1 and 2 may provide power to MPT ODU based radio channels.
The MSS-1 shelf supports up to sixteen DS1 ports.
MSS-1 shelf replacement affects traffic on ALL Ethernet ports, radio channels, and DS1 ports that
are associated with the MSS-1 shelf. Fully understand the ramifications to ALL Ethernet and DS1
ports, and radio channels before beginning the MSS-1 shelf Replacement Procedure. Verify that an
appropriate maintenance window is scheduled per local practices and procedures.
The MSS-1 shelf must be powered down during the replacement procedure.
See the 9500 MPR-A Product Information (PN 3EM23952AM) to determine port location and type.
STEP
1
PROCEDURE
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing an in-service MSS-1 shelf
causes loss of traffic on ALL radio channels, Ethernet Ports, and DS1 ports that are
associated with the MSS-1 shelf.
9-129
DLP-128
3EM23956AM

equipment. MSS-1 shelf contain static-sensitive devices. These devices can be
damaged by static discharge. See the Introduction for special handling
instructions.
MSS-1 shelf replacement procedure

3
Determine the MSS-1 shelf configuration.

a.
Does the MSS-1 support one or more radio channels?
b.
Are DS1 ports configured and carrying traffic?
c.
Are Ethernet ports configured and carrying traffic?
procedures.
Is it appropriate to proceed with Power Unit replacement procedure?

CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing an in-service MSS-1 shelf

causes loss of traffic on ALL radio channels, Ethernet Ports, and DS1 ports
associated with the MSS-1 shelf.
Verify that all cable connections to the MSS-1 shelf to be replaced are properly labeled.
TxMute all radio channels associated with MSS-1 shelf to be replaced.
Locate the fuses protecting the A and B battery feeds to the MSS-1 shelf and remove.
10
Disconnect all of the cables that are connected to the front of the MSS-1 shelf.
11
Remove the MSS-1 shelf to be replaced from the bracket.
12
Install the MSS-1 shelf onto the bracket.
13
Connect all of the cables to the front of the MSS-1 shelf that you disconnected in
step 10.
14
15
MPT ODUs and/or MPT-HLs. Wait for Dialog Failure condition to clear before
proceeding.
9-130
DLP-128
3EM23956AM
16
Verify the MPT ODUs and/or MPT-HLs that are associated with the replacement
MSS-1 shelf are free of alarms using Alarm Monitor.
17
Verify the radio channels that are supported by the MSS-1 shelf are error free.
18
Are ALL the MPT ODUs and/or MPT-HLs that are associated with the replacement
MSS-1 shelf error free and free of alarms?
19
Troubleshoot the MSS-1 shelf MPT ODU alarms.
20
21
Are the MSS-1 shelf MPT ODU alarms clear?

22
Are ALL the Ethernet ports that are associated with the replacement MSS-1 shelf
error free and free of alarms?
23
Troubleshoot the MSS-1 shelf Ethernet port alarms.
24
25
Are the MSS-1 shelf Ethernet port alarms clear?

26
Are ALL the MSS-1 shelf DS1 ports that are associated with the replacement MSS-1
shelf error free and free of alarms?
27
Troubleshoot the MSS-1 shelf DS1 port alarms.
28
9-131
DLP-128
3EM23956AM
29
Are the MSS-1 shelf DS1 port alarms clear?

30
31
9-132
Customer documentation and product

support
Customer documentation
http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/myaccess
Product manuals and documentation updates are available at alcatel-lucent.com. If you
are a new user and require access to this service, please contact your Alcatel-Lucent sales
representative.
Technical support
http://support.alcatel-lucent.com
Documentation feedback
documentation.feedback@alcatel-lucent.com
2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.

3EM23956AMAA Edition 01

9500 MPR-A R4 2 0 Maintenance - TroubleClearing 3EM23956AMAA - 01 PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

9500 MPR-A R4 2 0 Maintenance - TroubleClearing 3EM23956AMAA - 01 PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Main Documentation

Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

THIS PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH D.H.H.S. RADIATION PERFORMANCE STANDARDS 21

Alcatel-Lucent 2013 - All Rights Reserved

Alcatel-Lucent 2013 - All Rights Reserved

Alcatel-Lucent 2013 - All Rights Reserved

Index Task Lists (IXLs)

Task index list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Alarm and abnormal condition clearing procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Support procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57

Equipment replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59

Supporting information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61

Routine Task Lists (RTLs)

Preventive maintenance procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Trouble Analysis Procedures (TAPs)

Facility alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Abnormal conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23

Power alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31

Equipment alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39

Radio alarms (MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, MOD300, ODU300, 9558HC) . . . . . . . . 8-57

Ethernet alarms (Core-E, MPTACC, P8ETH, MSS-1 Shelf Core) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-77

License/software mismatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-79

Internal loss of communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-83

Threshold crossing alarms (MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP,

Synchronization alarms (Core-E, MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP,

ATPC loop conditions (MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC). . . . . . . . . 8-117

Cable LOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-123

Loss of alignment (MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-129

Loss of frame (MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-135

RPS path fail (MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-147

Rx fail (MOD300) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-153

Housekeeping alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-159

LAG alarms (Core-E, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, ODU300, 9558HC,

Ethernet connectivity fault management alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-163

Clock failure (MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-167

Duplicate Address Detected alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-175

Detailed Level Procedures (DLPs)

Mechanical card removal and installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

MPT-HL transceiver air filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

SFP replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

Core switching module (Core-E) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Core switching module (Core-E) flash card replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

Ethernet access switch (P8ETH) replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

MSS-4/8 shelf FAN replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27

MOD300 (radio modem) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

MPT-HL transceiver replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

ODU300 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37

P2E3DS3 (2-Port DS3) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41

P32E1DS1 (32-Port DS1) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45

Clean fiber-optic connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49

System power down and power up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55

MPTACC (MPT Access) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59

MPT ODU replacement (MPT-HC, MPT-XP, 9558HC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65

Auxiliary (AUX) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-71

Protection upgrade and downgrade procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73

Upgrade and downgrade radio profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-83

Upgrade unlicensed MPT-HL radio to lower 6 GHz radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-87

+24/-48 volt converter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-91

Power injector replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-95

RPS/XPIC module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-99

Upgrade MPT ODU to MPT ODU L1 LAG port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-105